Topic outline

  • Fig.1. 1: People listening to music

    Key unit Competence 

    By the end of the unit I should be able to analyze the effects of sound waves in elastic medium 

    My goals 

    • Describe how sound propagates through a substance 

    • Give the characteristics of sound. 

    • Relate loudness and pitch to amplitude and frequency 

    • Carry out calculations relating decibels and intensity 

    • Establish relationship between characteristics of notes and sound waves 

    • Explain beats and establish beat frequency 

    • Explain Doppler – Fizeau effect. 

    • Give examples of musical pipe instruments. 

    • Establish the fundamental frequency and 2nd harmonic, 3rd harmonic, in vibrating strings and in pipes 

    • Explain Doppler – Fizeau effect. • Give examples of musical pipe instruments. 

    • Establish the fundamental frequency and 2nd harmonic, 3rd harmonic, in vibrating strings and in pipes

    Introductory activity

    What properties explain most the behavior  of sound? 

    1. Most people like to listen to music, but hardly anyone likes to listen to noise. What is the difference between a musical sound and noise? 

    2. A guitarist plays any note. The sound is made by the vibration of the guitar string and propagates as a wave through the air and reaches your ear. Which of the following statement is the right? 

    • The vibration on the string and the vibration in the air have the same wavelength. 

    • They have the same frequency. 

    • They have the same speed. 

    • None of the above is the same in the air as it is on the string.

    1.1 CHARACTERISTICS AND PROPERTIES OF SOUND WAVES 

    Activity 1.1: Properties of sound

    Read the scenario below and answer the questions that follow. 

    On an interview for Physics placement in a certain school in Rwanda, Claudette  a S.6 leaver who had applied for the job was asked about sound waves during the interview. 

    She was asked to state the properties of sound waves. Confidently, she responded that the properties are reflection, refraction, diffraction and interference. This was enough to make Claudette pass the first level of the interview. 

    However, in the second step, she was required to discuss different media in which sound waves can propagate. Claudette started discussing these different media. What surprised the interviewer was Claudette’s ability to relate sound waves to other kinds of waves stating that these waves behaves the same way when they pass from one medium to another.  Looking at Claudette’s face, the interviewer asked her to discuss the laws governing reflection and refraction of sound waves.  With a smile, she started by saying that since sound waves have the same properties as for light; these laws therefore do not change. 

    As she was attempting to state them, the interviewer stopped her and congratulated her upon her confidence and bravery she showed in the room. She was directly told that she was successful and she was given the job. Claudette is now working as assistant S2 Physics teacher and doubles as a Physics laboratory attendant.

    1.1.1 Properties of sound waves

    Most of us start our lives by producing sound waves! We spend much of our life surrounded by objects which produce sound waves. Most machines in use vibrate and produce sound so the only sure way to silence them would be to put them in vacuum where there would be no surrounding medium for the vibrating surfaces of the machine to push against, hence no sound waves. Some physiologists are concerned with how speech is produced, how speech impairment might be corrected, how hearing loss can be alleviated.

    Sound is associated with our sense of hearing and, therefore, with the physiology of our ears that intercept the sound and the psychology of our brain which interprets the sensations that reach our ears. Sound waves are longitudinal mechanical waves that can travel through solids, liquids, or gases. 

    As the sound wave propagates, many interactions can occur, including reflection, refraction, diffraction and interference. When a sound wave hits a surface, a part of the energy gets scattered while a part of it is absorbed. Absorption is the phenomenon of the wave where the energy of sound wave gets transformed from one form to another. The high frequency sound waves are more easily absorbed than low frequency sounds. It happens most with the soft materials.

    1.1.2 Characteristics of sound waves

    Activity 1.2: Characteristics of sound waves 

    1. How to calculate the speed of sound waves in different materials. 

    2. How to calculate the intensity of a sound wave. 

    3. From the Fig.1.2, can you hear the ultrasound waves that a bat uses for echolocation? Why or why not?
                 

    Fig.1. 2: Range of frequencies heard by various animals and human (Randall & Knight.,Physics for scientists and engineers: Stategic approach., 2008)

    Usually, the characteristics used to describe waves are period, frequency, wavelength, and amplitude. 

    a. Frequency ranges 

    Any periodic motion has a frequency, which is the number of complete cycles in a second and a period which is the time used to complete one cycle. While the frequency is measured in Hertz (Hz), the period is measured in seconds (s). For a wave, the frequency is the number of wave cycles that pass a point in a second. A wave’s frequency equals the frequency of the vibrating source producing the wave. Sound waves are classified into three categories that cover different frequency ranges:

    Audible soundlies within the range of sensitivity of the human ear. They can be generated in a variety of ways, such as musical instruments, human voices, or loudspeakers. It is almost impossible to hear sounds outside the range of 20 Hz to 20 kHz. These are the limits of audibility for human beings but the range decreases with age.  

    Infrasonic waves have frequencies below the audible range. They are sound waves with frequencies that are below 20 Hz limit. Some animals such as elephants can use infrasonic waves to communicate with each other, even when they are separated by many kilometers. Rhinoceros also use infrasonic as low as 5 Hz to call one another. 

    Ultrasonic waves have frequencies above the audible range. They are sound waves whose frequencies are higher than 20 KHz. You may have used a “silent” whistle to retrieve your dog. The ultrasonic sound emitted by that device is easily heard by dogs, although humans cannot detect it at all. Ultrasonic waves are also used in medical imaging. Many animals hear a much wider range of frequencies than human beings do. For example, dog whistles vibrate at a higher frequency than the human ear can detect, while evidence suggests that dolphins and whales communicate at frequencies beyond human hearing (ultrasound) (Cutnell & Johnson, 2006). 

    b.  Wavelength

    Wavelength is the distance covered by a wave in a period. It is represented by the separation between a point on one wave and a similar point on the next cycle of the wave. For a transverse wave, wavelength is measured between adjacent crests or between adjacent troughs. For a longitudinal wave such as sound wave, wavelength is the distance between adjacent compressions or rarefaction.

    c. Speed of sound

    For a periodic wave, the shape of the string at any instant is a repeating pattern. The length of one complete wave pattern is the distance from one crest to the next or from one trough to the next or from any point to the corresponding point on the next repetition of the wave shape. We call this distance the wavelength of the wave, denoted by the Greek letter lambda (λ). The wave pattern travels with constant speed and advances a distance of one wavelength in a time interval of one period T. So the wave speed is given by                                                  

    (1.01)

    where f is the frequency of the wave. Sound travels faster in liquids and solids than in gases, since the particles in liquids and solids are closer together and can respond more quickly to the motion of their neighbors.  As examples, the speed of sound is 331 m/s in air,1500 m/s in water and 5000 m/s in iron (though these can change depending on temperature and pressure). Sound does not travel in vacuum.

    Example 1.1 Wavelength of a musical sound 

    1. Sound waves can propagate in air. The speed of the sound depends on temperature of the air; at 200  C it is 344 m/s it is. What is the wavelength of a sound wave in air if the frequency is 262 Hz  (the approximate frequency of middle C on a piano)? 

    Answer
     Using Equation of wave (1.01):  λ=V/f = (344m/s)/262Hz=1.31m

    Factors which affect the velocity of sound in air 

    • The speed of sound waves in a medium depends on the compressibility and density of the medium. If the medium is a liquid or a gas and has a bulk modulus Band density ρ , the speed of sound waves in that medium is given by:
                                                                
     (1.02) 

    It is interesting to compare this expression with the equation  applicable to transverse waves on a string. In both cases, the wave speed depends on an elastic property of the medium (bulk modulus B or tension in the string T) and on an inertial property of the medium (the density ρ or linear mass µ ).     In fact, the speed of all mechanical waves follows an expression of the general form (1.03)

     For longitudinal sound waves in a solid rod of material, for example, the speed of sound depends on Young’s modulus Y and the density ρ • Changes of pressure have no effect on the velocity of sound in air. Sir Isaac Newton showed that:

                                                            (1.04)

    In accordance with Boyle’s law, if the pressure of a fixed mass of air is doubled, the volume will be halved. Hence the density will be doubled. Thus at constant temperature, the ratio P/ρ will always remain constant no matter how the pressure may change. The speed of sound increases with temperature If the air temperature increases at constant pressure the air will expand according to Charles’ law, and therefore become less dense.

    The ratio P/ρ will therefore increase, and hence the speed of sound increases with temperature.

    For sound traveling through air, the relationship between wave speed and medium temperature is  (1.05)

        

                        


    d. Amplitude 

    The amplitude of a wave is the maximum displacement of the medium from its rest position. The amplitude of a transverse wave is the distance from the rest position to a crest or a trough. The more energy a wave has, the greater is its amplitude.

    1.1.3 Checking my progress

    1. The correct statement about sound waves is that: 

    a. They are transverse waves 

    b. They can be polarized 

    c. They require material medium to propagate 

    2. Sound travels in 

    a. Air 

    b. Water 

    c. Iron    

    d. All of these 

    3. Two men talk on the moon. Assuming that the thin layer of gases on the moon is negligible, which of the following is the right answer: 

    a. They hear each other with lower frequency  

    b. They hear each other with higher frequency 

    c. They can hear each other at such frequency   

    d. They cannot hear each other at all 

    4. Do you expect an echo to return to you more quickly on a hot day or a cold day? 

    a. Hot day. 

    b. Cold day. 

    c. Same on both days. 

    5.A sound wave is different than a light wave in that a sound wave is: 

    a. Produced by an oscillating object and a light wave is not. 

    b. Not capable of traveling through a vacuum. 

    c. Not capable of diffracting and a light wave is. 

    d. Capable of existing with a variety of frequencies and a light wave has a single frequency. 

    6. A spider of mass 0.30 g waits in its web of negligible mass see Fig. below. A slight movement causes the web to vibrate with a frequency of about 15 Hz.

              
                 Fig.1. 3 A spider of mass waits in its web

    a. Estimate the value of the spring stiffness constant k for the web assuming simple harmonic motion. 

    b. At what frequency would you expect the web to vibrate if an insect of mass 0.10 g were trapped in addition to the spider?

    1.2 PRODUCTION OF STATIONARY SOUND WAVES

     
                                    Fig.1. 4: A guitarist.

    Activity 1.3: Production of stationary sound waves. 

    Look at the Fig.1.4 of guitarist and then answer the following question. 

    1. How do vibrations cause sound? 

    2. What determines the particular frequencies of sound produced by an organ or a flute? 

    3. How resonance occurs in musical instruments? 

    4. How to describe what happens when two sound waves of slightly different frequencies are combined?

    1.2.1 Sound in pipes 

    The source of any sound is vibrating object. Almost any object can vibrate and hence be a source of sound. For musical instruments, the source is set into vibration by striking, plucking, bowing, or blowing.  Standing waves (also known as stationary waves are superposition of two waves moving in opposite directions, each having the same amplitude and frequency) are produced and the source vibrates at its natural resonant frequencies. 

    The most widely used instruments that produce sound waves make use of vibrating strings, such as the violin, guitar, and piano or make use of vibrating columns of air, such as the flute, trumpet, and pipe organ. They are called wind instruments.

    We can create a standing wave: 

    • In a tube, which is open on both ends. The open end of a tube is approximately a node in the pressure (or an antinode in the longitudinal displacement).  

    • In a tube, which is open on one end and closed on the other end.  The closed end of a tube is an antinode in the pressure (or a node in the longitudinal displacement).  In both cases a pressure node is always a displacement antinode and vice versa.

    a. Tube of length L with two open ends 

    An open pipe is one which is open at both ends. The length of the pipe is the distance between consecutive antinodes. But the distance between consecutive

    Quick check 1.1: Standing sound waves are produced in a pipe that is 1.20 m long. For the fundamental and first two overtones, determine the locations along the pipe (measured from the left end) of the displacement nodes and the pressure nodes if the pipe is open at both ends.

    b. Tube of length L with one open end and one closed end

    The longest standing wave in a tube of length L with one open end and one closed end has a displacement antinode at the open end and a displacement node at the closed end.  This is the fundamental.

     


    Another way to analyze the vibrations in a uniform tube is to consider a description in terms of the pressure in the air. Where the air in a wave is compressed, the pressure is higher, whereas in a wave expansion (or rarefaction), the pressure is less than normal.We call a region of increased density a compression; a region of reduced density is a rarefaction. 

    The wavelength is the distance from one compression to the next or from one rarefaction to the next.


    Quick check 1.2: Standing sound waves are produced in a pipe that is 1.20 m long. For the fundamental and first two overtones, determine the locations along the pipe (measured from the left end) of the displacement nodes and the pressure nodes if the pipe is closed at the left end and open at the right end.

    1.2.2 Vibrating strings 

    The string is a tightly stretched wire or length of gut. When it is struck, bowed or plucked, progressive transverse waves travel to both ends, which are fixed, where they are reflected to meet the incident waves. A stationary wave pattern is formed for waves whose wavelengths fit into the length of the string, i.e. resonance occurs. If you shake one end of a cord (slinky) and the other end is kept fixed, a continuous wave will travel down to the fixed end and be reflected back, inverted. The frequencies at which standing waves are produced are the natural frequencies or resonant frequencies of the cord. A progressive sound wave (i.e. a longitudinal wave) is produced in the surrounding air with frequency equal to that of the stationary transverse wave on the string. 

    Now let consider a cord stretched between two supports that is plucked like a guitar or violin string. Waves of a great variety of frequencies will travel in both directions along the string, will be reflected at the ends, and will be travel back in the opposite direction. The ends of the string, since they are fixed, will be nodes. 

    Consider a string of length L fixed at both ends, as shown in Fig.1.12. Standing waves are set up in the string by a continuous superposition of wave incident on and reflected from the ends. 

    Note that there is a boundary condition for the waves on the string. The ends of the string, because they are fixed, must necessarily have zero displacement and are, therefore, nodes by definition.

    The normal modes of vibration form a harmonic series: (b) the fundamental note (first harmonic); (c) First overtone (second harmonic); (d) the second overtone (third harmonic) (Halliday, Resneck, & Walker, 2007).

    1.2.3. Wave Interference and Superposition 

    a. Wave interference 

    Up to this point we’ve been discussing waves that propagate continuously in the same direction. But when a wave strikes the boundaries of its medium, all or part of the wave is reflected

    When you yell at a building wall or a cliff face some distance away, the sound wave is reflected from the rigid surface and you hear an echo. When you flip the end of a rope whose far end is tied to a rigid support, a pulse travels the length of the rope and is reflected back to you. In both cases, the initial and reflected waves overlap in the same region of the medium. This overlapping of waves is called interference

    In general, the term “interference” refers to what happens when two or more waves pass through the same region at the same time Fig.1.14 shows an example of another type of interference that involves waves that spread out in space. 

    Two speakers, driven in phase by the same amplifier, emit identical sinusoidal sound waves with the same constant frequency. We place a microphone at point P in the figure, equidistant from the speakers. Wave crests emitted from the two speakers at the same time travel equal distances and arrive at point P at the same time; hence the waves arrive in phase, and there is constructive interference. 

    The total wave amplitude at P is twice the amplitude from each individual wave, and we can measure this combined amplitude with the microphone.

    Now let’s move the microphone to point Q, where the distances from the two speakers to the microphone differ by a half-wavelength. Then the two waves arrive a half-cycle out of step, or out of phase; a positive crest from one speaker arrives at the same time as a negative crest from the other. Destructive interference takes place, and the amplitude measured by the microphone is much smaller than when only one speaker is present. If the amplitudes from the two speakers are equal, the two waves cancel each other out completely at point Q, and the total amplitude there is zero.

    Activity 1.4: 

    Problem 1 

    The Adventures of Marvin the Mouse: You and your friend are walking down by the pool when you hear a cry for help. Poor Marvin the Mouse has fallen into the pool and needs your help. The sides of the pool are to slippery for Marvin to climb out but there is an inner tube anchored in the center of the pool. Oh no! The sides of the inner tube are too slippery and high for Marvin to climb. He’s getting tired and can’t swim to the sides; he has just enough energy to float by the inner tube. Having studied about waves, you and your friend take up positions on opposite sides of the pool. How did you help Marvin get safely onto the inner tube? 

    Problem 2: Dance club designer 

    You are the designer of a new Dance Club. You have been informed that you need to design the club in such a way that the telephone is placed in a location that allows the customers to hear the people on the other side. The phone company states that they can only put the phone line in at a point 20 m from the stage. Develop a model which allows the customers to use the phone with the least amount of trouble given that the phone must be placed at a distance of 20 m, (2/3 the room size), from the stage. This will be an area where there will be virtually no sound.

    c. Resonance of sound 

    We have seen that a system such as a taut string is capable of oscillating in one or more normal modes of oscillation. If a periodic force is applied to such a system, the amplitude of the resulting motion is greater than normal when the frequency of the applied force is equal to or nearly equal to one of the natural frequencies of the system. This phenomenon is known as resonance. Although a block–spring system or a simple pendulum has only one natural frequency, standing-wave systems can have a whole set of natural frequencies. Because oscillating systems exhibits large amplitude when driven at any of its natural frequencies, these frequencies are often referred to as resonance frequencies. Fig.1.15 shows the response of an oscillating system to various driving frequencies, where one of the resonance frequencies of the system is denoted by fo.

    One of our best models of resonance in a musical instrument is a resonance tube. This is a hollow cylindrical tube partially filled with water and forced into vibration by a tuning fork (Fig.1.16). The tuning fork is the object that forced the air, inside the resonance tube, into resonance.

    As the tines of the tuning fork vibrate at their own natural frequency, they created sound waves that impinge upon the opening of the resonance tube. These impinging sound waves produced by the tuning fork force air inside of the resonance tube to vibrate at the same frequency. Yet, in the absence of resonance, the sound of these vibrations is not loud enough to discern. 

    Resonance only occurs when the first object is vibrating at the natural frequency of the second object. So if the frequency at which the tuning fork vibrates is not identical to one of the natural frequencies of the air column inside the resonance tube, resonance will not occur and the two objects will not sound out together with a loud sound. But the location of the water level can be altered by raising and lowering a reservoir of water, thus decreasing or increasing the length of the air column. 

    So by raising and lowering the water level, the natural frequency of the air in the tube could be matched to the frequency at which the tuning fork vibrates. When the match is achieved, the tuning fork forces the air column inside of the resonance tube to vibrate at its own natural frequency and resonance is achieved. The result of resonance is always a big vibration - that is, a loud sound. A more spectacular example is a singer breaking a wine glass with her amplified voice. A good-quality wine glass has normal-mode frequencies that you can hear by tapping it. 

    If the singer emits a loud note with a frequency corresponding exactly to one of these normal-mode frequencies, large-amplitude oscillations can build up and break the glass (Fig. 1.18)

    d. Beats and its phenomena 

    Beats occur when two sounds-say, two tuning forks- have nearly, but not exactly, the same frequencies interfere with each other.  A crest may meet a trough at one instant in time resulting in destructive interference. However at later time the crest may meet a crest at the same point resulting in constructive interference. To see how beats arise, consider two sound waves of equal amplitudes and slightly different frequencies as shown on the figure below.

    In 1.00 s, the first source makes 50 vibrations whereas the second makes 60. We now examine the waves at one point in space equidistant from the two sources. The waveforms for each wave as a function of time, at a fixed position, are shown on the top graph of Fig. 1.19; the red line represents the 50 Hz wave, and the blue line represents the 60 Hz wave. The lower graph in Fig. 1.18 shows the sum of the two waves as a function of time. At the time the two waves are in phase they interfere constructively and at other time the two waves are completely out of phase and interfere destructively. Thus the resultant amplitude is large every 0.10 s and drops periodically in between. This rising and falling of the intensity is what is heard as beats.  In this case the beats are 0.10 s apart. The beat frequency is equal to the difference in frequencies of the two interfering waves.. Consider two sound waves of equal amplitude traveling through a medium with slightly different frequencies f1 and f2atchosen point x = 0: 

    Quick check 1.4: A tuning fork produces a steady 400 Hz tone. When this tuning fork is struck and held near a vibrating guitar string, twenty beats are counted in five seconds. What are the possible frequencies produced by the guitar string?

                                   

    9. Why is a pulse on a string considered to be transverse? 

    10. A guitar string has a total length of 90 cm and a mass of 3.6 g. From the bridge to the nut there is a distance of 60 cm and the string has a tension of 520 N. Calculate the fundamental frequency and the first two overtones

    1.3 CHARACTERISTICS OF MUSICAL NOTES

    Activity 1.5: Characteristics of musical notes 

    The physical characteristics of a sound wave are directly related to the perception of that sound by a listener. Before you read this section answer these questions. As you read this section answer again these questions. Compare your answer. 

    1. What is the difference between the sound of whistle and that of drum? 

    2. Can you tell which musical instrument is played if the same note is played on different instrument without seeing it? Explain 

    3. How can you calculate the intensity of a sound wave?

    A musical note is produced by vibrations that are regular and repeating, i.e. by periodic motion. Non-periodic motion results in noise which is not pleasant to the ear. Many behaviors of musical note can be explained using a few characteristics: intensity and loudness, frequency and pitch, and quality or timber. 

    1.3.1. Pitch and frequency 

    The sound of a whistle is different from the sound of a drum. The whistle makes a high sound. The drum makes a low sound. The highness or lowness of a sound is called its pitch. The higher the frequency, the higher is the pitch. The frequency of an audible sound wave determines how high or low we perceive the sound to be, which is known as pitch.

    Frequency refers to how often something happens or in our case, the number of periodic, compression-rarefaction cycles that occur each second as a sound wave moves through a medium -- and is measured in Hertz (Hz) or cycles/second. The term pitch is used to describe our perception of frequencies within the range of human hearing. 

    If a note of frequency 300 Hz and note of 600 Hz, are sounded by a siren, the pitch of the higher note is recognized to be an upper octave of the lower note. The musical interval between two notes is an upper octave if the ratio of their frequencies is 2:1. It can be shown that the musical interval between two notes depends on the ratio of their frequencies, and not on the actual frequencies. 

    Whether a sound is high-pitched or low-pitched depends on how fast something vibrates. Fast vibrations make high-pitched sounds. Slow vibrations make low pitched sounds. 

    Do not confuse the term pitch with frequency. Frequency is the physical measurement of the number of oscillations per second. Pitch is a psychological reaction to sound that enables a person to place the sound on a scale from high to low, or from treble to bass. Thus, frequency is the stimulus and pitch is the response. Although pitch is related mostly to frequency, they are not the same. A phrase such as “the pitch of the sound” is incorrect because pitch is not a physical property of the sound.The octave is a measure of musical frequency.

    1.3.2 Intensity and amplitude 

    A police siren makes a loud sound. Whispering makes a soft sound. Whether a sound is loud or soft depends on the force or power of the sound wave. Powerful sound waves travel farther than weak sound waves. To talk to a friend across the street you have to shout and send out powerful sound waves. Your friend would never hear you if you whispered. 

    A unit called the decibel measures the power of sound waves. The sound waves of a whisper are about 10 decibels. Loud music can have a level of 120 decibels or more. Sounds above 140 decibels can actually make your ears hurt. The energy carried by a sound wave is proportional to the square of its amplitude.  The energy passing a unit area per unit time is called the intensity of the wave.  

    The intensity of spherical sound wave at a place p is defined as the energy per second per m2, or power per m2 flowing normally through an area at X. i.e

    where r is the distance from the source for a spherical wave

    Quick check 1.4: A point source emits sound waves with an average power output of 80.0 W. 

    a. Find the intensity 3.00 m from the source. 

    b. Find the distance at which the sound level is 40 dB.

    Activity 1.6: Noise or music 

    Most people like to listen to music, but hardly anyone likes to listen to noise. 

    1. What is the physical difference between musical sound and noise? 

    2. What is the effect of noise to human being?

    The physical characteristics of a sound wave are directly related to the perception of that sound by a listener. For a given frequency the greater the pressure amplitude of a sinusoidal sound wave, the greater the perceived loudness. 

    The loudness or softness of sound depends on the intensity of the sound wave reaching the person concerned. Loudness is a subjective quantity unlike intensity. Sound that is not wanted or unpleasant to the ear is called noise. High intensity can damage hearing.The higher the intensity, the louder is the sound.  Our ears, however, do not respond linearly to the intensity.  A wave that carries twice the energy does not sound twice as loud. 

    1.3.3 Quality or timbre

    If the same note is sounded on the violin and then on the piano, an untrained listener can tell which instrument is being used, without seeing it. We would never mistake a piano for flute. We say that the quality or timbre of note is different in each case. The manner in which an instrument is played strongly influences the sound quality. Two tones produced by different instruments might have the same fundamental frequency (and thus the same pitch) but sound different because of different harmonic content. The difference in sound is called tone color, quality, or timbre. A violin has a different timbre than a piano.

    1.3.4 Checking my progress

    1. Complete each of the following sentences by choosing the correct term from the word bank: loudness, pitch, sound quality, echoes, intensity and noise 

    a. The ------------ of a sound wave depends on its amplitude 

    b. Reflected sound waves are called --------------------------

    c. Two different instruments playing the same note sound different because of -----------------

    2. Plane sound wave of frequency 100 Hz fall normally on a smooth wall. At what distances from the wall will the air particles have: a. Maximum b. Minimum amplitude of vibration? Give reasons for your answer. The speed of sound in air may be taken as 340 m/s 

    3. A boy whistles a sound with the power of 0.5x10-4w . What will be his sound intensity at a distance of 5m? 

    4. Calculate the intensity level equivalent to an intensity 1 nW/m2 

    5. If the statement is true, write true. If it is false, change the underlined word or words to make the statement true. 

    a. Intensity is mass per unit volume.

    b. Loudness is how the ear perceives frequency 

    c. Music is a set of notes that are pleasing

    1.4 APPLICATIONS OF SOUND WAVES 

    Activity1.7: Doppler Effect and uses of sound waves 

    1. Why does the pitch of a siren change as it moves past you? 

    2. How is Doppler’s effect used in communication with satellites? 

    3. Explain how is the Doppler’s effect used in Astronomy? 

    4. People use sound for other things other than talking and making music. In your own word, give more examples and explanations to support this statement.

    1.4.1 The Doppler Effect 

    Doppler’s effect is the apparent variation in frequency of a wave due to the relative motion of the source of the wave and the observer. 

                                      

    Fig.1. 19 C.J.Doppler (Douglass, PHYSICS, Principles with applications., 2014)

    The effect takes its name from the Austrian Mathematician Christian Johann Doppler (1803-1853), who first stated the physical principle in 1842. Doppler’s principle explains why, if a source of sound of a constant pitch is moving toward an observer, the sound seems higher in pitch, whereas if the source is moving away it seems lower. This change in pitch can be heard by an observer listening to the whistle of an express train from a station platform or another train.

    The upper signs apply if source and/or observer move toward each other. The lower signs apply if they are moving apart. The word toward is associated with an increase
    in observed frequency. The words away from are associated with a decrease in observed frequency. 

    Although the Doppler’s effect is most typically experienced with sound waves, it is a phenomenon that is common to all waves. For example, the relative motion of source and observer produces a frequency shift in light waves. The Doppler’s effect is used in police radar systems to measure the speeds of motor vehicles. Likewise, astronomers use the effect to determine the speeds of stars, galaxies, and other celestial objects relative to the Earth.

    Quick check 1.5: Middle C on the musical scale has a frequency of 264 Hz.  What is the wavelength of the sound wave?

    1.4.2 Uses of Ultrasonic 

    a. Echolocation 

    Some marine mammals, such as dolphin, whales, and porpoises use sound waves to locate distant objects. In this process, called echolocation, a dolphin produces a rapid train of short sound pulses that travel through the water, bounce off distant objects, and reflect back to the dolphin. From these echoes, dolphins can determine the size, shape, speed, and distance of their potential prey.  Experiments have shown that at distance of 114 m, a blindfolded dolphin can locate a stainless-steel sphere with a diameter of 7.5 cm and can distinguish between a sheet of aluminum and a sheet of copper (Cutnell & Johnson, 2006). 

    The Ultrasonic waves emitted by a dolphin enable it to see through bodies of other animals and people (Fig.1.20). Skin muscles and fat are almost transparent to dolphins, so they see only a thin outline of the body but the bones, teeth and gas-filled cavities are clearly apparent.  Physical evidence of cancers, tumors, heat attacks, and even emotional shake can all be seen by dolphin. What is more interesting, the dolphin can reproduce the sonic signals that paint the mental image of its surroundings, and thus the dolphin probably communicates its experience to other dolphins. It needs no words or symbol for fish, for example, but communicates an image of the real thing.

                                                          

    Fig.1. 21:  The Ultrasonic waves emitted by a dolphin enable it to see through bodies of other animals and people. 

    Bats also use echo to navigate through air.Bats use ultrasonic with frequencies up to 100 kHz to move around and hunt (Fig.1.23). 

                                           

                   Fig.1. 22 Bats use ultrasonic with frequencies up to 100 kHz to move around and hunt

    The waves reflect off objects and return the bat’s ears. The time it takes for the sound waves to return tells the bat how far it is from obstacles or prey. The bat uses the reflected sound waves to build up a picture of what lies ahead. Dogs, cats and mice can hear ultrasound frequencies up to 450 kHz. Some animals not only hear ultrasound but also use ultrasonic to see in dark. 

    b. In medicine 

    The sonogram is device used in medicine and exploits the reflected ultrasound to create images. This pulse-echo technique can be used to produce images of objects inside the body and is used by Physicians to observe fetuses. Ultrasound use a high frequency in the range of 1 MHz to 10 MHz that is directed into the body, and its reflections from boundaries or interfaces between organs and other structures and lesions in the body are then detected. (Michael, Loannis, & Martha, 2006) Tumors and other abnormal growths can be distinguished; the action of heart valves and the development of a foetus (Fig.1.24) can be examined; and information about various organs of the body, such as the brain, heart, liver, and kidneys, can be obtained. 

    Although ultrasound does not replace X-rays, for certain kinds of diagnosis it is more helpful. Some tissues or fluid are not detected in X-ray photographs, but ultrasound waves are reflected from their boundaries. Echoes from ultrasound waves can show what is inside the body. Echo is a reflection of sound off the surface of an object.

                                                         
    Fig.1. 23: Ultrasound image as an example of using high-frequency sound waves to see within the human body (Douglass, PHYSICS, Principles with applications., 2014).

    In medicine, ultrasonic is used as a diagnostic tool, to destroy diseased tissue, and to repair damaged tissue.Ultrasound examination of the heart is known as echocardiography

    c. Sonar 

    The sonar or pulse-echo technique is used to locate underwater objects and to determine distance. A transmitter sends out a sound pulse through the water, and a detector receives its reflection, or echo, a short time later. This time interval is carefully measured, and from it the distance to the reflecting object can be determined since the speed of sound in water is known. The depth of the sea and the location of sunken ships, submarines, or fish can be determined in this way. Sonar also tells how fast and what direction things are moving. Scientists use sonar to make maps of the bottom of the sea. 

    An analysis of waves reflected from various structures and boundaries within the Earth reveals characteristic patterns that are also useful in the exploration for oil and minerals. 

    Radar used at airports to track aircraft involves a similar pulse-echo technique except that it uses electromagnetic (EM) waves, which, like visible light, travel with a speed of 3 ×108 m/s. One reason for using ultrasound waves, other than the fact that they are inaudible, is that for shorter wavelengths there is less diffraction so the beam spreads less and smaller objects can be detected. 

    1.4.3 Uses of infrasonic 

    Elephants use infrasonic sounds waves to communicate with one another. Their large ears enable them to detect these low frequency sound waves which have relatively long wavelengths. Elephants can effectively communicate in this way even when they are separated by many kilometers. Some animals, such as this young bateared fox, have ears adapted for the detection of very weak sounds.

                                                
    Fig.1. 24:  Some animals, such as this young bat-eared fox, have ears adapted for the detection of very weak sounds.

    1.4.4  Checking my progress 

    For question 1 to 2: Choose the letter of the best answer 

    1. Choose the best answer: Bats can fly in the dark without hitting anything because 

    a. They are flying mammals  

    b. Their night vision is going 

    c. They are guided by ultrasonic waves produced by them  

    d. Of no scientific reason 

    2. Bats and dolphins use echolocation to determine distances and find prey.           

    What characteristic of sound waves is most important for echolocation? 

    a. Sound waves reflect when they hit a surface 

    b. Sound waves spread out from a source 

    c. Sound waves diffract around corner 

    d. Sound waves interfere when they overlap 

    3. Discuss application of sound waves in medicine and navigation 

    4. Explain how sonar is used to measure the depth of a sea 

    5. a.  What is meant by Doppler Effect? 

    b.  A police car sound a siren of 1000 Hz as it approaches a stationary      

    observer at a speed of 33.5 m/s. What is the apparent frequency of the  siren as heard by the observer if the speed of sound in air is 340 m/s. 

    c.  Give one application of the Doppler Effect.

    1.5 END UNIT ASSESSMENT 

    1.5.1 Multiple choices question 

    For question 1 to 6, choose the letter of the best answer 

    1. Which of the following affects the frequency of wave? 

    a. Reflection 

    b. Doppler effect 

    c. Diffraction d. All of the above 

    2. Consider the following statements: 

    I. Recording of sound on tapes was first invented by Valdemar Poulsen. 

    II. Audio tapes have magnetic property. 

    III. The tapes may also be made of PVC (Polyvinyl-chloride)Of these statements: 

    a. I, II, and III all are correct. 

    b. I, II, and III all are wrong   

    c. I and II are correct, III  is wrong    

    d. I and II are wrong, III is correct 

    3. Nodes are 

    a. Positions of maximum displacement 

    b. Positions of no displacement 

    c. A position between no displacement and maximum displacement 

    d. None of these 

    4. Sound waves are 

    a. Transverse waves characterized by the displacement of air molecules. 

    b. Longitudinal waves characterized by the displacement of air molecules. 

    c. Longitudinal waves characterized by pressure differences. 

    d. Both (B) and (C). e. (A), (B), and (C). 

    5. In which of the following is the wavelength of the lowest vibration mode the same as the length of the string or tube? 

    a. A string. 

    b. A tube closed at one end. 

    c. All of the above.    

    d. An open tube. 

    e. E. None of the above. 

    6. When a sound wave passes from air into water, what properties of the wave will change? 

    a. Frequency.     

    b. Wave speed.   

    c. Both frequency and wavelength. 

    d. Wavelength. 

    e. Both wave speed and wavelength.

    1.5.2 Structured questions 

    1. Does the phenomenon of wave interference apply only to sinusoidal waves? Explain. 

    2. As oppositely moving pulses of the same shape (one upward, one downward) on a string pass through each other, there is one instant at which the string shows no displacement from the equilibrium position at any point. Has the energy carried by the pulses disappeared at this instant of time? If not, where is it? 

    3. Can two pulses traveling in opposite directions on the same string reflect from each other? Explain. 

    4. When two waves interfere, can the amplitude of the resultant wave be greater than the amplitude of any of the two original waves? Under which conditions? 

    5. When two waves interfere constructively or destructively, is there any gain or loss in energy? Explain. 

    6. Explain why your voice seems to sound better than usual when you sing in the shower. 

    7. An airplane mechanic notices that the sound from a twin-engine aircraft rapidly varies in loudness when both engines are running. What could be causing this variation from loud to soft? 

    8. Explain how a musical instrument such as a piano may be tuned by using the phenomenon of beats. 

    9. Fill in the gap 

    a. As a sound wave or water ripple travels out from its source, its ------------- decreases. 

    b. The vibrating air in a/an ----------------------------- has displacement antinodes at both ends. 

    c. For a /an ……………., the fundamental corresponds to a wavelength four times the length of the tube. 

    d. The ……………….. refers to the change in pitch of a sound due to the motion either of the source or of the observer. If source and observer are approaching each other, the perceived pitch is …….. If they are moving apart, the perceived pitch is ……………. 10. A bat, moving at 5.00 m/s, is chasing a flying insect. If the bat emits a 40.0 kHz chirp and receives back an echo at 40.4 kHz, at what speed is the insect moving toward or away from the bat? (Take the speed of sound in air to be v = 340 m/s.)

    11. If you hear the horn of the car whose frequency is 216 Hz at a frequency of 225 Hz, what is their velocity?  Is it away from you or toward you? The speed of sound is 343 m/s

    12.  You run at 12.5 m/s toward a stationary speaker that is emitting a frequency of 518 Hz.  What frequency do you hear? The speed of sound is 343 m/s 

    13.  If you are moving and you hear the frequency of the speaker at 557 Hz, what is your velocity?  Is it away from or toward the speaker?  The speed of sound is 343 m/s 

    1.5.3 Essay type question 

    20. Read the following text and answer the question

    Researchers have known for decades that whales sing complicated songs. Their songs can last for 30 min and a whale may repeat the song for two or more hours. Songs can be heard at a distances of hundreds of kilometers. There is evidence that whales use variations in the songs to tell other whales about the location of food and predators. Only the male whales sing, which has led some researchers to think that songs are also used to attract a male. 

    The whale songs may be threatened by noise pollution. in the past 50 years, ocean noise has increased due to human activities. Goods are transported across the ocean in larger ships than ever before. Large ships use bigger engines. They produce low-frequency noise by stirring up air bubbles with their propellers. Unfortunately, whales also use low-frequency sound in their songs, perhaps because these sounds carry further than high-frequency sounds in the ocean. Propeller noise from large ships is loud enough to interfere with whale songs at a distance of 20 km.

    Question: Are regulations needed to protect whales from noise? 

    In your own words, describe the major issue that needs to be resolved about ocean noise pollution. List three arguments for those who think regulations should require large ships to reduce noise pollution. List three arguments for those who think regulations are not necessary.


    •                         

      Key unit Competence 

      By the end of the unit, I should be able to evaluate climate change and greenhouse effect. 

      My goals 

      • Explain concepts of climate change  

      • Explain causes of climate change

      • State the Stefan-Boltzmann law and apply it to emission rates from different surfaces  

      • Outline the nature of black body radiation and its emissivity  

      • Evaluate concept of emissivity and relate to emission rates for different surfaces.  

      • Carry out an investigation on greenhouse effect  

      • Make observations and ask questions on climate change, Identify problems and formulate hypotheses to investigate climate change in surrounding environment 

      Introductory activity 

      Most of the solar radiation that is incident onto the Earth is absorbed and the rest is reflected back into the atmosphere. Our Earth acts almost as a black body, thereby it radiates back to the space part of the energy it has absorbed from the sun. The earth and its atmosphere is a part of the solar system. Life on the Earth cannot exist without the energy from the sun. a. Basing on Physics concepts, how do humans and plants get energy from the sun? Give the major source of this energy?

      a. Do humans and plants maintain the energy absorbed forever? Explain your reasoning using physics concepts. 

      b. State and explain the scientific term used to describe a body that can absorb or emit radiations that fall on them. 

      c. Basing on your ideas in (c) above what could be the effect on that body if: 

      I. It maintains the energy for a long time

      II. Reflects energy after a given time. 

      III. Do you think that these reflected and absorbed radiations have effect on the Climate? Why? Discuss your answers with your friends and even present it to your Physics teacher

      2.1 SCIENTIFIC PROCESS BEHIND CLIMATE CHANGE 

      2.1.1 Black body radiation 

      Activity 2.1: black body radiation 

      • Try to get two clothes of the same kind (similar material) but of different colour black and White   

      • Soak them in water at the same time 

      • Display them to places of the same sunlight intensity. 

      • Check them after like 20 min, 30 min, or 40 min. 

      • Observe how they are drying up.

      • Make a comprehensive report about your findings.  

      • Relate your findings to the concept of black body and hence define ‘a black body’ 

      • From your deductions, explain what happens when the temperature of a black body increase 

      • You can share your observations and findings with your friends and even to your teacher. 

      An object that absorbs all radiation falling on it and therefore emitting radiation in whole spectrum of wavelengths is called a blackbody. At equilibrium temperature a black body has a characteristic frequency spectrum that depends only on its temperature. 

      A perfect blackbody is one that absorbs all incoming light and does not reflect any. At room temperature, such an object would appear to be perfectly black (hence the term blackbody). However, if heated to a high temperature, a blackbody will begin to glow with thermal radiation. 

      2.1.2 Laws of black body radiation 

      a. Stefan-Boltzmann law The law states that, “the power per unit area radiated by a surface of a black body is directly proportional to the forth power of its temperature”.

                                          

      Using this formula, we can calculate the amount of power radiated by an object. A black body which emit in whole spectrum of wavelength would have an emissivity of 1. Since the earth is not a perfect black body, it has a certain emissivity value. The emissivity is defined as the power radiated by a surface divided by the power radiated from a perfect black body of the same surface area and temperature

      In simpler terms, it is the relative ability of a surface to emit energy by radiation. A true blackbody would have an emissivity of 1 while highly polished silver could have an emissivity of around 0.02. The emissivity is a dimensionless quantity.

      b. Wien’s displacement law

      It states that“the maximum wavelength of the emitted energy from a blackbody is inversely proportional to its absolute temperature”. This law was formulated by the German physicist Wilhelm Wien in 1893 who related the temperature of a black body and its wavelength of maximum emission following the equation

                                      

      Quick check 2. 1: When an iron bar is heated at high temperatures it becomes orange-red and its color progressively shifts toward blue and white as it is heated further. Explain this observation? 

      Remember: 

      It is not good to put on black clothes on a sunny day. This is because these dark clothes will absorb more radiations from the sun which may be harmful to our health.

      2.1.3 Black body radiation curves

                                         

                              Fig.2. 1 Black body radiation curves showing peak wavelengths at various temperatures 

      This Fig.2.1 shows how the black body radiation curves change at various temperatures. 

      The graph indicates that as the temperature increases, the peak wavelength emitted by the black body decreases. It therefore begins to move from the infra-red towards the visible part of the spectrum. Again, none of the graphs touch the x-axis so they emit at every wavelength. This means that some visible radiation is emitted even at these lower temperatures and at any temperature above absolute zero, a black body will emit some visible light. Features/Characteristics of the Graph  

      • As temperature increases, the total energy emitted increases, because the total area under the curve increases.

      • It also shows that the relationship is not linear as the area does not increase in even steps. The rate of increase of area and therefore energy increases as temperature increases. 

      2.1.4 Checking my progress

      For the questions listed below, re-write the questions in your notebooks and CIRCLE the best alternative 

      1. What is the black body or an ideal radiator?

      a. The body which transmits all the radiations incident upon it 

      b. The body which absorbs all the radiations incident upon it  

      c. The body which reflects all the radiations incident upon it 

      d. None of the above 

      2. As a radiator, the black body emits the maximum possible thermal radiation  

      a. At the constant single wavelength    

      b. At all Possible wavelengths  

      c. At a maximum wavelength    

      d. None of the above 

      3. Which of the following sentences are correct for black body 

      I. The black body is a hypothetical body

      II. The black body is a real body

      III. The black body is used as a standard of perfection against which the radiation characteristics of other bodies are compared 

      A. sentences (i) and (ii)

      B. sentences (i) and (iii)    

      C. sentences (ii) and (iii)   

      D. all the sentences (i), (ii) and (iii)

      2.2 INTENSITY OF THE SUN’S RADIATION REACHING PLANETS 

      2.2.1 Intensity of the sun’s radiation and albedo 

      Activity 2.2: Intensity of the sun’s radiation 

      Below is a stove of a gas cooker producing heat (You can use a Bunsen burner in your laboratory)

                                      
                                                                   Fig.2. 2 Stove of a gas cooker

      Questions: 

      a. Light up the stove or Bunsen burner provided 

      b. Come close to the lighting Bunsen or stove. In your words write down what you are experiencing in terms of heat. 

      c. Place conductor (You can use an old iron sheet) between you and the source. Can you still receive the same amount of heat from the source? Explain why? 

      d. Relating the scenario above with the transfer of heat (radiation) from the sun, how does sun’s heat (radiations) reaches us, and other planets, 

      e. If you are far away from the source, can you receive the same amount as someone near it? Relate it to the transfer of heat from the sun to different planets explain your reasoning. 

      f. In your own words, explain the factors that determine a body’s ability to absorb or reflect a certain radiation

      Sun produces heat of very high intensity that is spread and then received by all surrounding objects. These objects include all the planets and other objects around it.
      The intensity of the sun (at the top of the earth’s atmosphere) is approximately 1400 W/m2 also known as the solar constant. The amount received on the earth surface is slightly below 1400 w/m2.The main reasons for variation in intensity include: 

      The shape of the earth: The earth has a spherical shape and therefore the sunlight is more spread out near the poles because it is hitting the earth at an angle, as opposed to hitting the earth straight-on at the equator. There are also fewer atmospheres at the equator, allowing more sunlight to reach the earth. Therefore, the intensity varies depending on the geographical latitude of the earth’s location.

      The earth’s rotation: all areas are not consistently exposed to sunlight. Areas that are experiencing ‘nighttime’ are not receiving a lot of the sun’s power; therefore the time of the day or night will affect the solar constant. 

      The angle of the surface to the horizontal at that particular location: When the Sun is directly overhead, its rays strike Earth perpendicular to the ground and so deliver the maximum amount of energy. When the Sun is lower in the sky, a sunbeam strikes the ground at an angle and so its energy is “spread out” over a larger area 

      The solar constant represents the mean amount of incoming solar electromagnetic radiation per unit area on the earth’s surface. This constant takes into account all types of solar radiation, including UV and infrared. The accuracy of the solar constant is questionable due to the following generalizations: This radiation is assumed to be incident on a plane perpendicular to the earth’s surface. It is assumed that the earth is at its mean distance from the sun. 

      Our seasons also determine how much Sun’s radiation strikes a square meter of ground in a given place on the planet’s surface at a given time of the year. The sun’s radiation is maximum in the summer and it is minimum in winter

      Scientists use a quantity called “albedo” to describe the degree to which a surface reflects light that strikes it. It can be calculated by the ratio of reflected radiation from the surface to the incident radiation upon it.

                                                     
      The albedo has no units since it is a ratio of the similar quantities. Being a dimensionless fraction, it can also be expressed as a percentage and is measured on a scale from 0 (0%) for no reflective power to 1 (100%) for perfect reflectors. The earth’s albedo is about 0.3, meaning, on average, 30% of the radiation incident on the earth is directly reflected or scattered back into space. An object that has no reflective power and completely absorbs radiation is also known as a black body.

                                      

                                          Fig.2. 3: The transmission of light (heat) from the sun to the Earth
      The table below gives you some values of estimated albedo for various surfaces expressed as percentages: 

                                          

                                                                              Table 2. 1 Albedo for various surfaces 

      Some other facts about sun 

      1. At its centre, the sun reaches temperature of 15 million degrees Celsius 

      2. The sun is all the colors mixed together, this makes it appear white to our eyes. 

      3. The sun is mostly composed of hydrogen (70%) and Helium (28%) 

      4. The sun belongs to the main Sequence G2V star (Yellow Dwarf) 

      5. The sun is about 4.6 billion years old 

      6. The sun is about 100 times wider than the earth and 3330 000 times as massive 

      Activity 2.3: 1

      a. With clear explanations, explain the approximate spectral composition of the Sun’s radiation before it interacts with Earth’s atmosphere? 

      b. Is the amount of solar energy that reaches the top of Earth’s atmosphere constant? Explain giving valid examples and evidence. 

      c. Are all wavelengths of Sun’s radiation transmitted equally through Earth’s atmosphere? Explain your reasoning. 

      2. a. What effect does absorption have on the amount of solar radiation that reaches Earth’s surface?

          b. List down other processes (besides absorption) that affect radiation reaching the earth’s surface? 

      c. What can be percentage of incoming solar radiation that is affected by absorption and scattering (or reflection)? 

      3. a. Jane Says that clouds have a high albedo while Pierre says land vegetation has a low albedo? Using Scientific explanations, Discuss what they base on to make their deductions 

      b. What do you think are major factors that influence the insolation at a particular location on a particular day? How do they affect it? 

      c. What latitudinal regions experience least variation in day-to-day solar radiation? Which one experiences the greatest? Why?

      Activity.2.4 

      The text below is incomplete as it misses some of the technical terms. Using the knowledge and idea about albedo, re-write the text in your notebook and fil the spaces with the words given in the brackets (Aerosols, Deforestation, Lifetime, Climate, Infrared Radiation)to complete the text. 

      a. There are many factors that affct the Earth’s _________. Snow and ice are highly reflctive so when they melt, _____________ drops.  b. Forests have a lower  ________  than open land so ___________ increases ___________ 

      c. __________ have a direct and indirect effct on _______________.

      d. The direct effct is by reflcting sunlight back into space, cooling the Earth. 

      e. The indirect effct is when aerosolparticles act as a cloud condensation nucleus, affcting the formation and ______________of clouds.

      f. Clouds in turn inflence global temperatures in various ways. 

      g. They cool the ________ by reflcting incoming sunlight but can also warm the ___________ by trapping outgoing _____________from the surface

      2.2.2 Factors affecting Earth’s albedo

      mong other factors, the following are some of the factors that affect the albedo of the earth: 

      • Clouds: The atmosphere is usually covered with clouds that usually pass over the earth’s surface. This leads to reduction or increase in the temperature of the earth’s surface. This is because these clouds may absorb or reflects back sun’s light to the free space. However, this depends on the distance from which the clouds are from earth’s surface. When sun’s radiation is reflected, the earth’s surface is cooled and when it is absorbed the earth is warmed. 

      • Oceans: While observing from the space, you will find out that water bodies appear differently from land surfaces. They appear darker and therefore absorb more sun’s radiations than land. However, some of the radiations heating the water surface (ocean) may be carried away by the currents while others may form water vapor. 

      • Thick vegetation covers or forested areas: Places covered with vegetation absorb a lot of sun’s radiation. This is because the vegetation cover provides a dark surface which absorbs more radiations than the bare land.  

      • Surface albedo: Different surfaces appear differently. Light coloured surfaces absorb different amounts of radiations than dark coloured surfaces. Snow covered areas are highly reflective. They thus absorb less amounts of energy (Sun’s radiation). The snow cover reduces the heating effect of the earth’s surface. 

      However, if temperatures reduce, the snow cover reduces leading to the absorption of radiation by the exposed ground surface.

      2.2.3 Checking my progress

      For questions 1-4 below, re-write them in your notebook and CIRCLE the best alternative of your choice 

      1. Which of the following has high Albedo? 

            a. Asphalt parking lot 

            b. Snow-covered field

            c. They have the same albedo

            d. Some information is missing for this question 

      2. Imagine you are having two places: a desert and a forest. Which one has lower albedo,? 

           a. Desert

           b. Forest

           c. They have the same albedo 

           d. This question lacks some information 

      3. Imagine you are looking at two Areas of land while flying over in a jet at midday. Plot #A looks very bright. Plot #B looks very dark. Which area of land has a lower albedo? 

           e. Plot #A 

           a. Plot #B 

           b. They have the same values for albedo 

           c. More information is needed to answer this question 

      4. Refer to the list of albedo values (below). Order these three surfaces - fresh snow, grasslands, and asphalt - from highest albedo to lowest albedo. 

       2.3 GREENHOUSE EFFECTS

                            

                                                          Fig.2. 4: Greenhouse effect

      Discovery Activity 2.5 

      a. What do you know about greenhouse?

      b. Different activities like industrialization and others give out gases after burning fossil fuels. I. What special name is given to these gases? II. If these gases accumulate in the atmosphere, what effect do they have on to the temperature of the earth and its atmosphere? 

      c. Suggest measures that can be done to limit high accumulation of these gases in the atmosphere. 

      d. Discuss your findings with your classmates and even to your teacher. Come up with a general stand from your findings

      The relationships between the atmospheric concentration of greenhouse gases and their radiative effects are well quantified. The greenhouse effect has the root from greenhouses that becomes warmer when heated by sun’s radiation. The mode of operation of a green house is that a part of the sunlight radiations incident on the ground surface of the greenhouse are absorbed and warms the surface inside the greenhouse. Both the reflected radiations and the heat emitted by the ground surface in the greenhouse are trapped and re-absorbed inside the structure. Thus, the temperature rises inside the greenhouse compared to its surrounding environment.

      Therefore, the greenhouse effect heats up the earth’s surface because the green gases that are in the atmosphere prevent radiations from leaving the atmosphere. The absorption of these radiations contributes to the increase of the atmosphere’s temperature.

      Note: green gases act as a glass or plastic in greenhouses 

      A greenhouse is constructed by using any material that allows sunlight to pass through usually plastic or glass. This prevents reflected radiations from leaving the structure thereby leading to the increase in the temperature within. If a small puncture is made on to the greenhouse, the temperature within reduces. 

      PROJECT: 2.1 

      Construct a greenhouse (Can be done in a period of 3 months) In this project you may need 

      • Polyethene paper or plastic or glass. 

      • Wood 

      • Nails 

      • Any fiber that can be used while Tying 

      Procedures 

      a. Using materials listed above, construct a small greenhouse. It Can be done at School or at home. 

      b. Sow any seed inside. 

      c. After seeds have germinated, see the changes in the development of the plant. 

      d. Make a comprehensive Report about your Greenhouse. Include temperature and vapor changes within the green house. 

      e. Share it with your friends or your teacher.

      By definition therefore, Greenhouse effect is the process by which thermal radiation from the sun is prevented from leaving the atmosphere and then re-radiated in different directions. 

      Since some of these re-radiated radiations come back to the earth’s surface, they lead to the increase in the temperature of the earth’s surface leading to global warming.

                                

                               Fig.2. 5: (a) Greenhouses in one of the parts of Rwanda and (b) emission of greenhouse gases.

      2.3.1 Greenhouse gases 

      Some gases in the earth’s atmosphere act a bit like the glass in a greenhouse, trapping the sun’s heat and stopping it from leaking back into space. Many of these gases occur naturally, but human activity is increasing the concentrations of some of them in the atmosphere, in particular: 

      a. Carbon dioxide (CO2) 

      b. Methane 

      c. Nitrous oxide 

      d. Fluorinated gases 

      CO2 is the greenhouse gas most commonly produced by human activities and it is mainly responsible for man-made global warming. Its concentration in the atmosphere keeps on increasing with industrialization. Other greenhouse gases are emitted in smaller quantities, but they trap heat far more effectively than CO2, and in some cases are thousands of times stronger. Methane is responsible for 17% of man-made global warming, nitrous oxide for 6%.

      Causes for rising emissions: 

      Burning coal, oil and gas that produce carbon dioxide and nitrous oxide. Cutting down forests (deforestation). Trees help to regulate the climate by absorbing CO2 from the atmosphere. So when they are cut down, that beneficial effect is lost and the carbon stored in the trees is released into the atmosphere, adding to the greenhouse effect. 

      Increasing livestock farming. Cows and sheep produce large amounts of methane when they digest their food.

      Fertilizers containing nitrogen produce nitrous oxide emissions. 

      Fluorinated gases produce a very strong warming effect, up to 23 000 times greater than CO2. Thankfully these are released in smaller quantities and are being phased down by European Union regulation.

      Activity 2.6: 

      Emitted greenhouse gases worldwide from 1990 to 2005

      Below is a bar graph showing emitted Greenhouse gases worldwide from 1990 to 2005. Use it to answer the questions that follow.

                                                                      

      Fig.2. 6 Emissions of greenhouse gases worldwide from 1990 to 2005 by Rwanda Environment Management authority (REMA) 

      a. From your analysis (using the graph) which kind of gas was emitted in excess for the specified period? What could be the factors that led that gas to be emitted in large quantities? 

      b. What do you think one can do to limit such emissions? 

      c. From your own point of view, do you think it’s a good idea to stop completely emission of these gases? Explain your reasoning by giving valid examples.

      Solutions to reduce the impact of greenhouse gases

       • High efficiency during power production 

      • Replacing coal and oil with natural gas 

      • Combined heating and power systems (CHP) 

      • Renewable energy sources and nuclear power 

      • Carbon dioxide capture and storage 

      • Use of hybrid vehicles.

      2.3.2 Impact of greenhouse effect on climate change. 

      With the greenhouse effect, the earth is unable to emit the excess heat to space and this leads to increase in atmosphere’s temperature and global warming. Scientists have recorded about 0.75°C increase in the planet’s overall temperature during the course of the last 100 years. The increased greenhouse effect leads to other effects on our climate and has already caused: (REMA) 

      • Greater strength of extreme weather events like: heat waves, tropical cyclones, floods, and other major storms. 

      • Increasing number and size of forest fires. 

      • Rising sea levels (predicted to be as high as about 5.8 cm at the end of the next century). 

      • Melting of glaciers and polar ice. 

      • Increasing acidity in the ocean, resulting in bleaching of coral reefs and damage to oceanic wildlife. 

      2.3.3 Global warming 

      Global warming is the persistent increase in temperature of the earth’s surface (both land and water) as well as its atmosphere. Scientists have found out that the average temperature in the world has risen by about 0.750C in the last 100 years and about 75% of this rise is from 1975. Previously the changes were due to natural factors but currently the changes are due to both natural and human activities. From research, natural greenhouse maintains the temperature of the earth making it a better place for human kind and animal life. However ever since the evolution of industries, there has been significant change in the temperature. The causes are both natural and human activities: 

      a. Human activities 

      Burning of fossil fuels: These emit carbon dioxide gases when heated that accumulate in the atmosphere. These gases absorb and may not allow sun’s radiation to pass through. This in turn leads to an increase in the temperature of the earth’s atmosphere, hence global warming. These fuels are burnt in vehicles and in industries. 

      • Deforestation. Plants use carbon dioxide in manufacturing their food.  

      • This implies that trees reduce amount of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere. Cutting down these trees therefore leads to part of carbon dioxide remains unused. This is a big problem 

      • Agriculture: Agriculture is a good practice. Though if not handled with care, it may lead to destruction of nature which is a big problem

      • And all other infrastructure development: These include, urbanization, road construction and places for settlement. These have contributed to the destruction of nature.

      b. Natural causes 

      • Volcanicity: When volcanoes erupt, they throw out large volumes of sulphur dioxide (SO2), water vapor, dust, and ash into the atmosphere. Although the volcanic activity may last only a few days, the large volumes of gases and ash can influence climatic patterns for years. Millions of tones of sulphur dioxide gas can reach the upper levels of the atmosphere (called the stratosphere) from a major eruption. 

      • Ocean currents: Oceans plays a major role in the change of climate. Oceans cover about 71% of the Earth and absorb about twice as much of the sun’s radiation as the atmosphere or the land surface. Ocean currents move vast amounts of heat across the planet - roughly the same amount as the atmosphere does. But the oceans are surrounded by land masses, so heat transport through the water is through channels. 

      All the above practices lead to high concentration of greenhouse gases in the atmosphere especially carbon dioxide gases.

      Note: If these greenhouse gases were completely not there, the Earth would be too cold for humans, plants and other creatures to live.

      Can you now see the importance of these greenhouse gases! Though they cause greenhouse effect, they are responsible for regulating the temperature of the earth. 

      Global warming is damaging the earth’s climate as well as the physical environment. One of the most visible effects of global warming can be seen in the Arctic region where glaciers, permafrost and sea ice are melting rapidly. Global warming is harming the environment in several ways. 

      Global warming has led to: desertification, increased melting of snow and ice, sea level rise, stronger hurricanes and cyclones

      2.3.4 Checking my progress

      1. What do you understand by the term “greenhouse” effect? 

      2. With clear explanations, explain why it is called the “greenhouse” effect? 

      3. From your own reasoning and understanding, why do you think Environmental experts have become worried about the greenhouse effect?

      2.4 CLIMATE CHANGE 

      Activity 2.7

      Having discussed the intensity of Sun’s radiation reaching the earth and the black body radiation theory, discuss the following questions: 

      • What are the effects of these radiations on the earth and its atmosphere after absorption and reflection?

      • From your own understanding, what would happen if there is imbalance between the absorbed and radiated energy in the earth’s atmosphere.

      • Can that incidence be avoided? How? Write in your own words all the scientific measures that can be done to avoid that kind of situation.

      Activity 2.8:

                                         
                                                                            Fig.2. 7:From the picture above, 

      1. What do you observe from the picture above? 

      2. What could be the major causes of such situation in most of the communities especially in Rwanda? 

      3. How does this situation affect the welfare of the people in a given community? 

      4. In your view, suggest the preventive practices people should do to avoid such situations?

      2.4.1 Climate change and related facts 

      There has been variation in the atmospheric conditions in a given time. This has affected the seasons leading to a less output of our produce especially from agriculture, fishing and other activities. These changes are sometimes for a short time but also may take a long time. Some of these changes result from our practices like farming, industrialization, urbanization, mining and other infrastructure developments. Care should be taken so as these changes in the atmospheric conditions can be avoided.

      Activity 2.9 

      1.From your experience, have you ever experienced changes in atmospheric conditions? How long did it take?  

      2. In your own views discuss the causes of those changes. Are these changes harmful or useful?  Explain your reasoning 

      3. As a member of the community discuss how you identify that there is climatic change 

      4. If an investor wants to start an agricultural farm in your community. Depending on related reality of climatic conditions of your area, what advices and information would you give to that investor?

      Climate is usually defined as the “average weather,” or more rigorously, as the statistical description in terms of the mean and variability of relevant quantities over a period of time ranging from months to thousands of years. The classical period is 3 decades, as defined by the World Meteorological Organization (WMO).These quantities are most often surface variables such as temperature, precipitation, and wind. Weather is measured in terms of the following parameters: wind, temperature, humidity, atmospheric pressure, cloudiness, and precipitation. In most places, weather can change from hour-to-hour, day-to-day, and season-toseason. Climate can be described as the sum of weather. While the weather is quite variable, the trend over a longer period, the climate, is more stable. 

      However climate change can be observed over a longer period of time. Climate change refers to any significant change in the climate parameters such astemperature, precipitation, or wind patterns, among others, that occur over several decades or longer Natural and human systems have adapted to the prevailing amount of sunshine, wind, and rain. While these systems can adapt to small changes in climate, adaptation is more difficult or even impossible if the change in climate is too rapid or too large. This is the driving concern over anthropogenic, or human induced, climate change. If climate changes are too rapid then many natural systems will not be able to adapt and will be damaged and societies will need to incur the costs of adapting to a changed climate (REMA)

      Some of important terms we need to know 

      • Climate feedback: This refers to a process that acts to amplify or reduce direct warming or cooling effects. 

      • Climate lag: This is the delay that can occur in a change of some aspect of climate due to the influence of a factor that is slow acting. 

      • Climate model: This is a quantitative way of representing the interactions of the atmosphere, oceans, land surface, and ice. Models can range from relatively simple to quite comprehensive

      This explains a delay that occurs in climate change as a result of some factors that changes only very slowly. For example, the effects of releasing more carbon dioxide into the atmosphere occur gradually over time because the ocean takes a long time to warm up in response to these emissions. 

      Project work 2.2: 

      1. Using a case study of Rwanda, by identifying different areas or provinces, Design a good chat that may be in tabular form showing differences in the amounts of sunshine, rainfall, humidity and precipitation in those areas or provinces. 

      2. Still using your findings, what has led to the difference in the climate changes in these areas yet they are all found in Rwanda? 

      3. Compare and contrast the climate of these provinces 

      4. Make a compressive report. You can share it with your friends and finally to the teacher.

      2.4.2 Causes of climate change.

       Activity.2.10: 

      Read the text below and answer the questions that follow.

      In Rwanda, like in many other developing countries, large efforts are being invested in reducing vulnerability to climate change by taking actions needed to increase preparedness for climate change, including specific interventions (such as larger storm drains or new crop varieties) and also broader social economic strategies (such as relocating households from high risk zones). This is called adaptation to climate change. The terminology of “Climate resilience” is usually used to describe a broader agenda than adaptation as described above. It captures activities which build the ability to deal with climate variability – both today and in the future. Among other causes, the concentration of green gases in the atmosphere greatly affects the temperature of the Earth. 

      Questions 

      1. Explain the meaning of the underlined terms in the text 

      2. From the text above, what is the major cause of climate change 

      3. Discuss some of the strategies that the Rwandan Government is doing to fight the problem of the climate change. State some of the actions taken as described in the text 

      4. The writer in the text talked about industrialization as a practice that can lead to climate change. From your understanding and experience, how is this possible?

      Physics behind climate change and causes

      The climate of the earth is controlled by its absorption and the subsequent emission of that energy. The Earth’s surface temperature is determined by the balance between the absorption and emission of Sun’s radiation. 

      The major cause of climate change is the concentration of greenhouse gases, especially water vapor and carbon dioxide. These gases trap thermal radiation from the earth’s surface and this effect keeps the surface warmer than it would be. Human activities are major factors that lead to natural greenhouse effect. 

      Most of activities done by human lead to high concentration of greenhouse gases. From research it has been found that the concentration of carbon dioxide has risen by about 30% in this era as compared to pre-industrial era. This gives a projection that the concentration of these greenhouse gases is still increasing day and night as people continue using fossil fuels. Such activities include bush burning, burning of fossil fuels, deforestation and agriculture. 

      All these activities have a strong impact on the climate of a given area as they may lead to either warming or cooling the land. 

      On another hand, industries have also led to the change in climatic conditions as they emit carbon gases into the atmosphere. From what is happening currently, the climatic conditions are worsening if the world becomes more industrialized. 

      Man is trying to limit this by making machines that emit less carbon gases (REMA)

                                  

                                                                      Fig.2. 8 An operating industry giving out gases

      These gases affect the atmosphere that leads to climate change. Note: It is very important to have to work and do different activities that may lead us to develop and our country too. But care should be taken NOT to destroy the Nature. 

      Activity 2.11: 

      1. What do you think are the factors that lead climatic change in your area? Make a general conclusion using a case study of Rwanda.

      2. The earth’s climate can be affected by natural factors that are external to the climate system, such as changes in volcanic activity, solar output, and the earth’s orbit around the sun. How can people limit these factors to have a better climate? Share with your friends and even the teacher.

      2.4.3 Checking my progress

      1. What do you understand by the following terms as used in this concept? 

          a. Weather 

          b. Climate

          c. Humidity

          d. Temperature 

          e. Climatic change 

      2. Using Physics Concepts, discuss why different areas found in the same region may have different climatic conditions. 

      3. What are some of the strategies as a Rwandan have you set to fight these changes? 

      4. Plan and write an essay about climatic changes in Rwanda. 

      5. Study the graph given below and answer the questions that follow

                                        

      Fig.2. 9 Variation of the annual average temperature in 0C (1971-2009) at Kigali station Airport and Kamembe Airport Station (Source: Data analysis provided by the Rwanda meteorological service) (REMA)

         a. From the graph, which station had higher temperature? Explain why the selected station show high values of temperature relating to the factors that affect climate. 

         b. What was the recorded temperature of the two stations in 2005? 

         c. Discuss with relevant examples why there is a need to record temperatures of a given place after a given time. 

      6. Let’s have our minds rest using physics Below is a crossword puzzle about climatic change. Check the left of the puzzle and find the corresponding word in the puzzle

                     

      What you can do to save your/our climate 

      • Learn about climate change share knowledge and information on climate change. By sharing knowledge and strategies to combat climate change with others you will increase awareness on climate change issues. Talk with your colleagues and leadership about how you can better integrate climate change considerations; 

      • Learn about how climate change impacts your sector. By looking into the negative impacts of climate change on your business processes and coming up with adaptation solutions you will make it climate-proof and reduce your sector’s vulnerability to climate change.

      2.5 CLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION 

      2.5.1 Climate change mitigation

      Activity 2.13: Read and Contribute 

      The government of Rwanda is trying to sensitize people not to cut down trees for charcoal, Drying wetlands for farming activities and regulating people from approaching wetlands, forests (Both Natural and artificial) and Fighting all activities that may lead to climate change. 

      a. As a good citizen of Rwanda, Do you support these plans of the government? Support your stand with clear justifications 

      b. If Yes what have you done to implement some of these policies? 

      c. What are some of the New Technologies that the government is advocating for to stop these negative climate changes?

      Climate change mitigation refers to efforts to reduce or prevent emission of greenhouse gases. Mitigation can mean using new technologies and renewable energies, making older equipment more energy efficient, or changing management practices or consumer behavior (IPCC, 1996). 

      Climate change is one of the most complex issues we are facing today. It involves many dimensions science, economics, society, and moral and ethical questions and is a global problem, felt on local scales that will be around for decades and centuries to come. Carbon dioxide, the heat-trapping greenhouse gas that has driven recent global warming, lingers in the atmosphere for centuries, and the earth (especially the oceans) takes a while to respond to warming. 

      So even if we stopped emitting all greenhouse gases today, global warming and climate change will continue to affect future generations. In this way, humanity is “committed” to some level of climate change.  

      Because we are already committed to some level of climate change, responding to climate change involves a two-pronged approach: 

      Reducing emissions and stabilizing the levels of heat-trapping greenhouse gases in the atmosphere (“mitigation”); Adapting to the climate change already in the pipeline (“adaptation”).

      2.5.2 Mitigation and adaptation

                                 

                             Fig.2. 10: Solar panels have been used to reduce some of the problems caused by other sources of energy 

      Because of these changes in climatic conditions, man has devised all possible measures to see how he can live in harmony on this planet. This has made man to think harder so that these green gases can be minimized. 

      The process of preventing all these greenhouse gases is what is known as mitigation. This is very important as it is aimed at controlling the rise in temperatures of the earth while regulating earth’s temperature. 

      The main goal of mitigation is to reduce human interference to nature thereby stabilizing the greenhouse gas levels in a given time to allow ecosystem to adapt naturally to the climate changes. Care should be taken while these adjustments are made not to affect food production and other economic developments. 

      Among other strategies, mitigation strategies include retrofitting buildings to make them more energy efficient; adopting renewable energy sources like solar, wind and small hydro-electric plants helping cities develop more sustainable transport such as bus rapid transit, electric vehicles and bio fuels, promoting more sustainable uses of land and forests and creating carbon sinks like in big oceans in case there are no alternatives.

      Project.2.3

      Goal: To construct your control greenhouse model and your enhanced greenhouse model, begin by collecting all the materials other than the dry ice. 

      Materials 

                                     

      Procedures: 

      1. Prepare the enhanced greenhouse model, 

      2. Use a flame from the candle to heat the end of a paper clip. 

      3. Use the hot paper clip to make a small hole in the side of one of the plastic drinking bottles. 

      4. Make this hole about half way between the top and bottom of the bottle. 

      5. Make sure that the plastic tubing will fit into the hole. 

      6. Put 200 ml of distilled water into each of the two bottles. 

      7. Place the plastic tubing into the hole that you made for the “enhanced greenhouse” effect model. 

      8. Use clay to prevent any air from leaking out once the experiment begins. 

      9. Place a thermometer into the top of each bottle so that the end of the thermometer is in the centre of the bottle. 

      10. Hold in place and seal off the bottle top opening using the modelling clay. 

      11. Prepare the container for inserting the dry ice vapor, obtain two Styrofoam cups. One should be larger than the other or you can cut one to fit beneath the other. 

      12. Punch a hole in the bottom of the larger cup on the top. 

      13. Insert the plastic tubing and use the clay to prevent any leakage of the carbon dioxide.

      14. Obtain a piece of dry ice that fits into the smaller Styrofoam cup. 

      15. Add enough water to begin sublimation. 

      16. Connect the plastic tubing to the bottle and let the carbon dioxide gas to flow into the bottle for 90 seconds. 

      17. Take the tubing out and close the tubing hole with clay once you have added the carbon dioxide. 

      18. Place both bottles the same distance from a heat lamp and turn on the light 

      19. Begin recording the temperature as soon as you have closed the hole and turn on the light. Record the temperature every two minutes for twenty minutes in the table. 

      20. Construct a graph of your data. 

      2.5.3 Checking my progress

      The graph below shows the emission of Carbon emissions from fossil fuels of a certain region in Africa from 1990 to 2014. Study the graph carefully and answer the questions that follow

                                  

                                  Fig.2. 11 Global carbon emission from fossil fuels, 1900-2010 (REMA)

      1. By observing clearly the graph, explain the trend of the Curve from 1990 to 2010. With the knowledge and ideas you have acquired from this Unit, Discuss factors that might have led to the rise of the shape of the graph 

      2. Suppose the Curve was to be extended to 2018, do you think the curve would continue the trend or would Fall? Explain your reasoning 

      3. Discuss some of the major causes of increased carbon emissions in our Society, 

      4. Come up with possible measures that can assist the community to have less 

      2.6 END UNIT ASSESSMENT

      2.6.1 Multiple choice type questions. 

      Re-write the questions below in your notebook and CIRCLE the best alternative 

      1. The emissivity (ε) can be defined as the ratio of 

       a. Emissive power of real body to the emissive power of black body 

       b. Emissive power of black body to the emissive power of real body 

       c. Reflectivity of real body to emissive power of black body 

       d. Reflectivity of black body to emissive power of real body. 

      2. Imagine two planets. Planet A is completely covered by an ocean, and has and overall average albedo of 20%. Planet B is blanketed by clouds, and has an overall average albedo of 70%. Which planet reflects more sunlight back into space? 

       a. Planet A 

       b. Planet B 

       c. The two planets reflect the same amount of light 

       d. More information is needed to answer this question 

      3. _______________ is a term used to a process that acts to amplify or reduce direct warming or cooling effects 

       a. Climate change  

       b. Weather

       c. Climate feedback

       d. Climate model 

      4. The filament of an electric bulb has length of 0.5 m and a diameter of 6x10-5 m. The power rating of the lamp is 60 W Assuming the radiation from the filament is equivalent to 80% that of a perfect black body radiator at the same temperature. The temperature of the filament is (Stefan Constant is 5.7x10-8 Wm-2K-4):

        a. 1933 K

        b. 796178.3 K

        c. 64433333.3 K

        d. 60 K 

      5 .The long-term storage of carbon dioxide at the surface of the earth is termed as 

        a. Black body radiation   

        b. Thermal expansion 

        c. Solar radiation management

        d. Sequestration 

      6. The balance between the amount of energy entering and exiting the Earth system is known as 

        a. Radiative balance

        b. Paleoclimatology

        c. Black body Radiation

        d. Solar radiation 

      7. The following are examples of green gases except 

         a. Carbon dioxide

         b. Nitrous oxide

         c. Methane

         d. Oxygen 

      8. The government of Rwanda is advising the people to conserve the nature. This is intended to limit the incidence of rise in the temperature. This conservation of nature

        a. Reduces the amount of water vapor that leads to increase in temperature

        b. Reduces the amount of Carbon dioxide in the space

        c. Increases the amount of plant species that is required to boost our tourism industry 

        d. Provides a green environment for human settlement 

      2.6.2 Structured questions 

      1. a.  State Wien’s displacement law and its practical implications     

          b.  Use the graph indicated below to answer the questions that follow

                                

       I. What does the graph explain?

       II. Explain the spectrum that is found between temperatures of  4000 and 7000  K

       III. Why do you think the three curves have different shapes 

      2. Discuss any 4 main reasons that brings about variation of sun’s Intensity 

      3.a. Calculate the albedo of a surface that receives 15000 Wm-2 and reflects 15 KW.m-2 Comment on the surface of that body

         b. Discuss some of the scientific factors that affect planets Albedo 

      4.a. What do you understand by the following terms? 

         I. Climate change as applied in physics

         II. Greenhouse Effect

         b. With Clear explanations, discuss how Greenhouse effect can be avoided 

      2.6.3 Essay type questions 

      1. Clemance a year 4 student in the faculty of engineering in University of Rwanda found out in her research that a strong metal at 1000k is red hot while at 2000k its white hot. Using the idea of black body, explain this observation. 

      2. John defined black body as anybody that is black. Do you agree with his definition? If YES why? and if NOT why not? Also sketch curves to show the distribution of energy with wavelength in the radiation from a black body varies with temperature.

      3. An electric bulb of length 0.6 m and diameter 5 x 10-5 m is connected to a power source of 50 W. Assuming that the radiation from the bulb is 70% that of a perfect black body radiator at the same temperature, Estimate the steady temperature of the bulb. (Stefan’s constant = 5.7 x 10 - 8 W m 2 K-4.) 

      4. Write short notes about greenhouse effect and explain all its effects. 

      5. What do you understand by the term green gases? How do these gases contribute to the global warming?

      6. REMA is always advising people to plant more trees and stop cutting the existing ones. Using scientific examples, explain how this is aimed at controlling global warming 

      7. Explain climate change mitigation and explain why it’s important. 

      8. Explain what happens to most radiation that is absorbed by the surface of earth? 

      9. Is there difference between sensible and latent heat? 

      10. Write short notes on the following terms as applied in climate change 

        I. Climate feedback  

        II. Climate lag 

        III. Climate model    

      11. Plan and write a good composition about causes of climate change and how it can be controlled. (Your essay should bear introduction, body and conclusion)

      •                

                                                              Fig.3. 1: A farmer spraying rice
        Key unit Competence 

        By the end of the unit the learner should be able to evaluate applications of Physics in Agriculture. 

        My goals

        • Describe the atmosphere and its constituents.  

        • Outline variation of atmospheric pressure, air density and water vapour with altitude.  

        • Evaluate how heat and mass transfers occur in the atmosphere. 

        • Apply knowledge of physics to illustrate changes in water vapour atmospheric pressure, and air with altitude.

        • Evaluate and interpret physical properties of soil (soil Texture and structure).  

        • Evaluate why air, temperature and rainfall limit economical activities in Agriculture.  

        • Explaining how mechanical weathering and soil erosion impact economic activities in agriculture. 

        • Explaining clearly how agrophysics plays an important role in the limitation of hazards to agricultural objects and environment in our country.

        Introductory activity: Role of machines in agriculture

        It is very important to know the role of Physics in agriculture and environment. Knowledge in physics can contribute more in the limitation of hazards in agriculture (soils, plants, agricultural products and foods) and the environment based on suitable programs of transformation and modernization of agriculture in our country.

        Look at the image given in Fig.3.1 above!  

        a. What do you observe? Is there any application of prior knowledge of Physics learnt before applied on the image? Justify your answer?

        b. Can you suggest the role of machines in agriculture? How do they contribute in the rapid development of the country programs of transformation and modernization of agriculture? Knowing different stages of growing plants activities, suggest which stages mostly benefit the use of technology! 

        Plan it! To get started, brainstorm about your prior knowledge on applications of physics in agriculture and try to suggest answers to questions given above based on your understanding.

        3.1 ATMOSPHERE AND ITS CONSTITUENTS 

        3.1.1 Atmosphere 

        Activity 3.1: How the atmosphere protect life on the earth 

        a. Brainstorm and write short notes on constituents of atmosphere and explain clearly how the atmosphere of Earth protects life on earth. 

        b. Why should you care about protecting the atmosphere and minimise the long-term changes in the climate? 

        c. What can be the use of atmospheric knowledge in evaluating and improving agricultural activities? 

        The atmosphere of earth is the layer of gases, commonly known as air that surrounds the earth. This layer of gases is retained by Earth’s gravity. The atmosphere of Earth protects life on Earth by absorbing ultraviolet solar radiations that cause cancers and other diseases, warming the surface through heat retention (greenhouse effect) and reducing temperature extremes between day and night. It also contain the oxygen which human beings, animals and plants are using, The atmospheric knowledge can be helpful in evaluating and improving the quality of soils and agricultural products as well as the technological processes.

        3.1.2 Composition of the Atmosphere 

        The atmosphere is composed of a mixture of several gases in differing amounts.  The permanent gases whose percentages do not change from day to day are nitrogen, oxygen and argon. By volume, dry air contains 78.0% nitrogen, 21% oxygen, 0.9% argon, 0.04% carbon dioxide, and small amounts of other gases called trace gases 0.1% as shown in Fig.3.2 

        Gases like carbon dioxide, nitrous oxides, methane, and ozone are trace gases that account for about a tenth of one percent of the atmosphere.

                                                     
                                                                       Fig.3. 2Composition of the atmosphere 

        Air also contains a variable amount of water vapor, on average around 1% at sea level, and 0.4% over the entire atmosphere. Water vapor is unique in that its concentration varies from 0-4% of the atmosphere depending on where you are and what time of the day it is.  In the cold, dry Arctic regions water vapor usually accounts for less than 1% of the atmosphere, while in humid, tropical regions water vapor can account for almost 4% of the atmosphere.  Water vapor content is very important in predicting weather. Air content and atmospheric pressure vary at different layers, and air suitable for use in photosynthesis by terrestrial plants and breathing of terrestrial animals is found only in earth’s troposphere. 

        The composition of the atmosphere, among other things, determines its ability to partly absorb and transmit sunlight radiations and trap infrared radiations, leading to potentially minimise the long-term changes in climate.

        3.1.3 Layers of the atmosphere. 

        Activity 3.2 Classifying layers of the atmosphere. 

        Materials For class demonstration:

         • Chalk board or dry erase board mounted on a wall

         • Chalk or dry erase marker

         • 2-meter piece of string

         • 1000 ml (1 litre) graduated cylinder

         • Four bags of fish gravel or coloured sand (different colours)

        Procedures 

        Case1: 

        1. Use a model to explore how far the earth’s atmosphere extends above the surface of the earth and learn about the thickness of the different layers of the atmosphere. 

        2. How far do you think the atmosphere extends above us? Tie a dry eraser marker or a piece of chalk to one end of the string. Standing next to the board, place your foot on the free end of the string and draw an arc on the board with a radius of about 1.2 m. Your foot represents the center of the earth. The arc represents the surface of the Earth.

                                           

                                       Fig.3. 3 A person demonstrating the layers of the atmosphere 

        3. Suggest how far the earth’s atmosphere would extend above the surface in this drawing. Mark your suggestions on the board above the chalk/marker line. Note that it is found that over 90% of the earth’s atmosphere is within about 12km of the earth’s surface. The distance from the centre of the earth to its surface equals about 6361 km.

         Case 2: 

        1. Use a 1000 ml (1 litter) graduated cylinder and represent the layers by using the following amounts of fish gravel or coloured sand found in the photo and table below. 

        2. Choose what colour you want for each atmospheric layer. Keep in mind these are relative proportions and not exact points of departure for the different layers. In this scale model, each millilitre of volume represents one kilometre of atmosphere layer thickness (for example, the troposphere is 10 km thick and is represented by 10 ml of sand or gravel in the graduated cylinder). 

                                           

        Questions 

        1. What atmospheric layers are represented by the different colors? 

        2. What atmospheric layer do we live in? 

        3. How much thicker is the stratosphere compared to the troposphere? 

        4. How much thicker is the thermosphere compared to all the other layers combined? 

        5. Where in this model would you expect to find clouds? 

        6. Where in this model would you expect to find mounts Everest and Kalisimbi? 

        7. Where in this model would you expect to find a satellite? 

        8. Where in this model would you expect to find the space shuttle? 

        9. Where in this model is the ozone layer? 

        Earth’s atmosphere has a series of layers, each with its own specific characteristics and properties. Moving upward from ground level, these layers are named the troposphere, stratosphere, mesosphere, thermosphere and exosphere. 

        The above activity demonstrates the relative thickness of the thin section of the atmosphere that includes the troposphere and stratosphere. These layers are essential to all life on Earth. 

        Over 99% of the mass of the Earth’s atmosphere is contained in the two lowest layers: the troposphere and the stratosphere. Most of the Earth’s atmosphere (80 to 90%) is found in the troposphere, the atmospheric layer where we live (Cunningham & William, 2000).

        This layer, where the Earth’s weather occurs, is within about 10 km of the Earth’s surface. The stratosphere goes up to about 50 km. Gravity is the reason why atmosphere is more dense closer to the Earth’s surface.

                              

                             Fig.3. 5: Illustration of layers from the core to the atmosphere 

        While we may think of the atmosphere as a vast ocean of air around us, it is very thin relative to the size of the earth. The “thickness” of the atmosphere, or the distance between the earth’s surface and the “top” of the atmosphere, is not an exact measure. Although air is considered as a fluid, it does not have the same well-defined surface as water does. The atmosphere just fades away into space with increasing altitude. Description of layers of earth’s atmosphere: 

        A. Troposphere 

        This is the lowest layer of our atmosphere starting at ground level; it extends upward to about 10 km above the sea level. We live in the troposphere, and nearly all weather occurs in this lowest layer. Most clouds appear here, mainly because 99% of the water vapor in the atmosphere is found in the troposphere. Air pressure drops and temperatures get colder, as you climb higher in the troposphere.

        B. Stratosphere 

        The stratosphere extends from the top of the troposphere to about 50 km above the ground. The infamous ozone layer is found within the stratosphere. Ozone molecules in this layer absorb high-energy ultraviolet (UV) light from the sun, converting the ultraviolet energy into heat. Unlike the troposphere, the stratosphere actually gets warmer the higher you go! That trend of rising temperatures with altitude means that air in the stratosphere lacks the turbulence and updrafts of the troposphere beneath. Commercial passenger jets fly in the lower stratosphere, partly because this less-turbulent layer provides a smoother ride.

        C. Mesosphere 

        It extends upward to a height of about 85 km above our planet. Most meteors burn up in the mesosphere. Unlike the stratosphere, temperatures once again grow colder as you rise up through the mesosphere. The coldest temperatures in earth’s atmosphere, about -90° C, are found near the top of this layer. The air in the mesosphere is far too thin to breathe; air pressure at the bottom of this layer is well below 1% of the pressure at sea level, and continues dropping as you go higher.

        D. Thermosphere 

        High-energy X-rays and ultraviolet radiations from the Sun are absorbed in the thermosphere, raising its temperature to hundreds or at times thousands of degrees. Many satellites actually orbit Earth within the thermosphere! Variations in the amount of energy coming from the Sun exert a powerful influence on both the height of the top of this layer and the temperature within it. Because of this, the top of the thermosphere can be found anywhere between 500 km and 1 000 km above the ground. Temperatures in the upper thermosphere can range from about 500 ° C to 2 000 °C or even higher. 

        E. Exosphere 

        Although some experts consider the thermosphere to be the uppermost layer of our atmosphere, others consider the exosphere to be the actual “final frontier” of Earth’s gaseous envelope. As you might imagine, the “air” in the exosphere is very thin, making this layer even more space-like than the thermosphere. In fact, air in the exosphere is constantly “leaking” out of earth’s atmosphere into outer space. There is no clear-cut upper boundary where the exosphere finally fades away into space. Different definitions place the top of the exosphere somewhere between 100 000 km and 190 000 km above the surface of earth. The latter value is about halfway to the moon!

        F. Ionosphere 

        The ionosphere is not a distinct layer like the others mentioned above. Instead, the ionosphere is a series of regions in parts of the mesosphere and thermosphere where high-energy radiation from the sun has ionized atoms and molecules. The ions formed in this way are responsible of the naming of this region as the ionosphere and endowing it with some special properties.

        Activity 3.3 Classifying layers of the atmosphere. 

        Observe scale models of the atmosphere on fig.3.3 below and its layers. Note the height of earth’s atmosphere as compared to the size of the planet overall and the relative thickness of each of the four main layers of the atmosphere. Interpret the graph and Use it to answer questions below: 

                                                     
                                                            Fig.3. 6: Layers of the atmosphere. 

        Questions: 

        a. Outline the economic activities taking place in the layers represented above? 

        b. Why is it very important to have ozone layer in the layers close to the earth surface? 

        c. Explain why it is advisable to travel in troposphere and stratosphere than in other layers of the atmosphere? 

        d. Explain clearly why the rocket and aeroplanes decide to move in the corresponding layers of the atmosphere?

        3.1.4 Checking my progress

        1. Use the fruit question suggested in the procedure and respond in writing or with a picture instead of simply orally in class. Think of the fruit as the size of the Earth and the skin of the fruit represents the thickness of the atmosphere. Make a labelled diagram in your note book illustrating the most important point of the lesson and the reason why the atmosphere is considered as the skin of the fruit? 

        2. Imagine that you are in an orbit around a planet one half the size and mass of the Earth. Explain how I would expect the atmosphere of the new planet to be different from my planet? 

        3. What is the structure and composition of the atmosphere? 

        4. How does solar energy influence the atmosphere? 

        5. How does the atmosphere interact with land and oceans? 

        6. Outline two most important layers that are essential to all life on earth?  

            Explain clearly to support your answer.

        3.2 HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER 

        3.2.1 Modes of Heat Transfer

        Activity 3.4: Describing the different modes of heat transfer in the atmosphere 

        Brainstorm on modes of heat transfer and explain clearly how each affects agricultural activities?

        Heat transfer is concerned with the exchange of thermal energy through a body or between bodies which occurs when there is a temperature difference. When two bodies are at different temperatures, thermal energy transfers from the one with higher temperature to the one with lower temperature. Naturally heat transfers from hot to cold.

        A small amount of the energy that was directed towards the earth from the sun is absorbed by the atmosphere, a larger amount (about 30%) is reflected back to space by clouds and the Earth’s surface, and the remaining is absorbed at the planet surface and then partially released as heat.  

        Energy is transferred between the Earth’s surface and the atmosphere in a variety of ways, including radiation, conduction, and convection. The figure below uses a camp stove to summarize the various mechanisms of heat transfer. If you were standing next to the camp stove, you would be warmed by the radiation emitted
        by the gas flame. A portion of the radiant energy generated by the gas flame is absorbed by the frying pan and the pot of water. 

        By the process of conduction, this energy is transferred through the pot and pan. If you reached for the metal handle of the frying pan without using a potholder, you would burn your fingers! As the temperature of the water at the bottom of the pot increases, this layer of water moves upward and is replaced by cool water descending from above. Thus convection currents that redistribute the newly acquired energy throughout the pot are established.

                                   

                                             Fig.3. 7: Camp stove to summarize the various mechanisms of heat transfer. 

        As in this simple example using a camp stove, the heating of the Earth’s atmosphere involves radiation, conduction, and convection, all occurring simultaneously. A basic theory of meteorology is that the Sun warms the ground and the ground warms the air. This activity focuses on radiation, the process by which the Sun warms the ground. Energy from the Sun is the driving force behind weather and climate.

        Quick check 3.1 

        What do trees, snow, cars, horses, rocks, centipedes, oceans, the atmosphere, and you have in common?

        Each one is a source of radiation to some degree. Most of this radiation is invisible to humans but that does not make it any less real. 

        Radiation is the transfer of energy by electromagnetic waves. The transfer of energy from the Sun across nearly empty space is accomplished primarily by radiation. Radiation occurs without the involvement of a physical substance as the medium. The Sun emits many forms of electromagnetic radiation in varying quantities.

                                   

                                       Fig.3. 8: The spectrum of electromagnetic radiations emitted by the sun 

        About 43% of the total radiant energy emitted from the Sun is in the visible part of the spectrum. The bulk of the remainder lies in the near-infrared (49%) and ultraviolet (7%) bands. Less than 1% of solar radiation is emitted as x-rays, gamma rays, and radio waves.

        A perfect radiating body emits energy in all possible wavelengths, but the wave energies are not emitted equally in all wavelengths; a spectrum will show a distinct maximum in energy at a particular wavelength depending upon the temperature of the radiating body. As the temperature increases, the maximum radiation occurs at shorter wavelengths. 

        The hotter the radiating body, the shorter the wavelength of maximum radiation. For example, a very hot metal rod will emit visible radiation and produce a white glow. On cooling, it will emit more of its energy in longer wavelengths and will glow a reddish color. Eventually no light will be given off, but if you place your hand near the rod, the infrared radiation will be detectable as heat. 

        The amount of energy absorbed by an object depends upon the following: 

        • The object’s absorptivity, which, in the visible range of wavelengths, is a function of its color  

        • The intensity of the radiation striking the object

        Every surface on Earth absorbs and reflects energy at varying degrees, based on its color and texture. Darker-colored objects absorb more visible radiation, whereas lighter-colored objects reflect more visible radiation. These concepts are clearly discussed in unit two.

        3.2.2 Environmental heat energy and mass transfer

                               
                             Fig.3. 9: Illustration of interactions of solar radiations with different constituents of the atmosphere.
         

        Practically all of the energy that reaches the earth comes from the sun. Intercepted first by the atmosphere, a small part is directly absorbed, particularly by certain gases such as ozone and water vapor. Some energy is also reflected back to space by clouds and the earth’s surface. 

        In the atmosphere, convection includes large- and small-scale rising and sinking of air masses.. These vertical motions effectively distribute heat and moisture throughout the atmospheric column and contribute to cloud and storm development where rising motion occurs) and dissipation where sinking motion occurs.

        3.2.3 Water vapour in the atmosphere.

        Activity3.5: Impact of water vapor in agricultural activities 

        1. Brainstorm on water vapor in the atmosphere and explain clearly how it impacts on agricultural activities? 

        2. Does water vapor play an important role in the atmosphere? Justify your answer with clear reasons.

        When water vapor condenses onto a surface, a net warming occurs on that surface. The water molecule brings heat energy with it. In turn, the temperature of the atmosphere drops slightly. In the atmosphere, condensation produces clouds, fog and precipitation (usually only when facilitated by cloud condensation nuclei).

        The role of water vapor in the atmosphere 

        Water vapor plays a dominant role in the radiative balance and the hydrological cycle. It is a principal element in the thermodynamics of the atmosphere as it transports latent heat and contributes to absorption and emission in a number of bands. It also condenses into clouds that reflect and adsorb solar radiation, thus directly affecting the energy balance. 

        In the lower atmosphere, the water vapor concentrations can vary by orders of magnitude from place to place.

        3.2.4 Variation in Atmospheric Pressure 

        Variation with height or vertical variation: The pressure depends on the density or mass of the air.  The density of air depends on its temperature, composition and force of gravity. It is observed that the density of air decreases with increase in height so the pressure also decreases with increase in height. 

        Horizontal variation of pressure: The horizontal variation of atmospheric pressure depends on temperature, extent of water vapor, latitude and land and water relationship. 

        Factors affecting atmospheric pressure: 

        1. Temperature of air 

        2. Altitude 

        3. Water vapor in air 

        4.  Gravity of the earth.

        Effect of atmospheric pressure in agricultural activities 

        The pressure exerted by the atmosphere of the earth’s surface is called atmospheric pressure. Generally, in areas of higher temperature, the atmospheric pressure is low and in areas of low-temperature the pressure is high. Atmospheric pressure has no direct influence on crop growth. It is, however an important parameter in weather forecasting.

        3.2.5 Air density and water vapour with altitude

        Activity 3.7: Effect of air density in the atmosphere 

        Brainstorm on air density and explain clearly its affects in the earth’s atmosphere?

        The density of air (air density) is the mass per unit volume of earth’s atmosphere. Air density, like air pressure, decreases with increasing altitude. It also changes with variation in temperature and humidity. At sea level and at 15 °C air has a density of approximately 1.225 kg/m3

        Air density and the water vapor content of the air have an important effect upon engine performance and the takeoff characteristics of air-craft. Some of the effects these two factors have upon engine takeoff, and the methods for computing these elements from a meteorological standpoint. Pressure altitude, density altitude, vapor pressure, and specific humidity in the atmosphere are determined using a Density Altitude Computer. 

        Pressure altitude: Pressure altitude is defined as the altitude of a given atmospheric pressure in the standard atmosphere. The pressure altitude of a given pressure is, therefore, usually a fictitious altitude, since it is equal to true altitude only rarely, when atmospheric conditions between sea level and the altimeter in the aircraft correspond to those of the standard atmosphere. Aircraft altimeters are constructed for the pressure-height relationship that exists in the standard atmosphere.

        3.2.6 Checking my progress 

        1. Why does atmospheric pressure change with altitude? 

        2. The graph below gives an indication of how pressure varies non-linearly with altitude. Use the graph to answer the following questions:

                         
                                       Fig.3. 10: A graph of altitude vs pressure

        a. Explain what happens to pressure if the altitude reduces? 

        b. Estimate the atmospheric pressure when someone is at an altitude of 40 km above sea level.

        3.3 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF SOIL 

        Practical Activity 3.8: How the surface of earth reflects and absorbs heat 

        Perform the activity to investigate how different surfaces of the earth reflect and absorb heat and apply this knowledge to real-world situations. It justifies that the physical characteristics of the Earth’s surface affect the way that surface absorbs and releases heat from the Sun. 

        Materials needed in demonstration

            
        Procedures 

        1. a. Brainstorm on the already known concepts about how the color and type of material affects how hot it gets in the sunshine. Try to think about these questions. When it is a hot day, what color shirt would you wear to keep cool and why? During the summer, what would it feel like to walk on gravel with no shoes? 

            b. In performing activity, explore how different types of surfaces found at the earth’s surface (such as sand, soil, and water) heat up when the sun’s energy reaches them, and how they cool down when out of the sunshine. 

            c. Note that this experiment uses materials to model sunshine and earth materials. Observe the materials and realize how each material relates to the earth system. (The lamp represents the sun in this model. The sand represents beaches, sand dunes, and rocks. The potting soil represents large areas of soil outdoors. And the water represents lakes, rivers, and the ocean.) 

        2. Fill the pie pans to the same level, one with dark soil, one with light sand, and one with water.  

        3. Place the pie pans on a table or desk and position the lamp about 30.48 cm above them. (Do not turn on the lamp yet.)

                                                  

                                               Fig.3. 11:  Arrangement of pie pans to investigate the absorption of solar radiation. 

        Checking skills Questions 

        1. Which material absorbed more heat in the first ten minutes? 

        2. Which material lost the most heat in the last ten minutes? 

        3. Imagine that it is summer and that the Sun is shining on the ocean and on a stretch of land. 

            a. Which one will heat up more during the day?

            b. Which one will cool more slowly at night? Explain. 

        4. Imagine three cities in the desert, all at about the same altitude and latitude. Which city would likely have the highest average summer air temperature and why? 

        • One city (A) is surrounded by a dark-colored rocky surface

        • Another city (B) is surrounded by a light-colored sandy surface. 

        • The third city (C) is built on the edge of a large man-made desert lake. 

        5. The Earth’s surface tends to lose heat in winter. Which of the above cities would have the warmest average winter temperature? Why? 

        6. Since the Sun is approximately 93 million miles from the Earth and space has no temperature, how do we get heat from the Sun?

        Physical properties of a soil that affect a plant’s ability to grow include: Soil texture, which affects the soil’s ability to hold onto nutrients (cation exchange capacity) and water. Texture refers to the relative distribution of the different sized particles in the soil. It is a stable property of soils and, hence, is used in soil classification and description. 

        Soil structure, which affects aeration, water-holding capacity, drainage, and penetration by roots and seedlings, among other things. Soil structure refers to the arrangement of soil particles into aggregates and the distribution of pores in between. It is not a stable property and is greatly influenced by soil management practices. 

        3.3.1 Soil texture 

        Practical Activity3.9: Soil texture is determined by three proportions of the soil

        Brainstorm and try to answer questions using knowledge gained. 

        a. Outline three proportions of the soil? 

        b. What does the underlined word mean?

        Soil texture, or the ‘feel’ of a soil, is determined by the proportions of sand, silt, and clay in the soil. When they are wet, sandy soils feel gritty, silky soils feel smooth and silky, and clayey soils feel sticky and plastic, or capable of being moulded. Soils with a high proportion of sand are referred to as ‘light’, and those with a high proportion of clay are referred to as ‘heavy’.

        The names of soil texture classes are intended to give you an idea of their textural make-up and physical properties. The three basic groups of texture classes are sands, clays and loams.

        A soil in the sand group contains at least 70% by weight of sand. A soil in the clay group must contain at least 35% clay and, in most cases, not less than 40%. A loam soil is, ideally, a mixture of sand, silt and clay particles that exhibit light and heavy properties in about equal proportions, so a soil in the loam group will start from this point and then include greater or lesser amounts of sand, silt or clay. 

        3.3.2 Soil structure 

        Activity3.10:

         a. It is known that soil structure contains soil particles and pores and is classified under physical properties of soil. Brainstorm and write short notes on soil structure. Use the knowledge gained in part (a) above to answer questions in part (b). 

        b. (i) List the elements found in soil particles. 

                   I. What do the underlined words mean? 

                   II. Explain the role of pores in soil structure that improves capillary action in plant growth.
        Structure is the arrangement of primary sand, silt and clay particles into secondary aggregates called peds or structural units which have distinct shapes and are easy to recognize. These differently shaped aggregates are called the structural type. 

        There are 5 basic types of structural units: 

         • Platy: Plate-like aggregates that form parallel to the horizons like pages in a book. This type of structure may reduce air, water and root movement.  

        Blocky: Two types--angular blocky and sub angular blocky. These types of structures are commonly seen in the B horizon. Angular is cube-like with sharp corners while sub angular blocky has rounded corners.  

        Prismatic: Vertical axis is longer than the horizontal axis. If the top is flat, it is referred to as prismatic. If the top is rounded, it is called columnar. 

         • Granular: Peds are round and pourous, spheroidal. This is usually the structure of A horizons.  

         • Structureless: No observable aggregation or structural units. 

        Good soil structure means the presence of aggregations which has positive benefits for plant growth. These benefits arise from the wider range of pore sizes which result from aggregation. 

        The nature of the pore spaces of a soil controls to a large extent the behavior of the soil water and the soil atmosphere. It influences the soil temperature. All these affect root growth, as does the presence of soil pores of appropriate size to permit root elongation. Favorable soil structure is therefore crucial for successful crop development. The destruction of soil structure may result in a reduction in soil porosity and/or change to the pore size distribution. 

        Soil structure refers to the arrangement of soil particles (sand, silt and clay) and pores in the soil and to the ability of the particles to form aggregates.

        Aggregates are groups of soil particles held together by organic matter or chemical forces. Pores are the spaces in the soil. 

        The pores between the aggregates are usually large (macro pores), and their large size allows good aeration, rapid infiltration of water, easy plant root penetration, and good water drainage, as well as providing good conditions for soil micro-organisms to thrive. The smaller pores within the aggregates or between soil’s particles (micro pores) hold water against gravity (capillary action) but not necessarily so tightly that plant cannot extract the water. 

        A well-structured soil forms stable aggregates and has many pores (Fig.3.12 A). it is friable, easily worked and allows germinating seedlings to emerge and to quickly establish a strong root system. A poorly structured soil has either few or unstable aggregates and few pore spaces (Fig.3.12 B). This type of soil can result in unproductive compacted or waterlogged soils that have poor drainage and aeration. Poorly structured soil is also more likely to slake and to become eroded.

                                              
                                           Fig.3. 12: Different soil structures: well structured and poorly structured soil.

        3.3.3 Checking my progress:

        1. (a) Explain the physical properties of Soil and explain clearly how each impact agricultural activities? 

        2. (a)  Explain how the weathering of rocks contributes to soil formation. 

            (b) Explain the following terms as used in the context of soil and plant   growth.

                  I. Well structured soil 

                  II. Poor structured soil

            (c) The following table shows the water content of three soil samples. Use  the table to answer questions that follows: 

                              

        Analytical Questions: 

         I. What is the percentage of available water in sample A? 

         II. Which sample would be the most suitable for a crop suffering a drought during the growing season?

         III. Which sample would be the most suitable for a crop growing during a rainy season? 

        (d) Describe an experiment to compare the capillarity of two contrasting soils.

        3.4 MECHANICAL WEATHERING 

        3.4.1 Concepts of mechanical weathering 

        Laboratory Activity 3.11: Exploring Mechanical Weathering 

        Mechanical rock weathering is an important part of the formation of both soils and new rocks, and an important part of the entire rock cycle. The activity explores what causes rocks to break down. 

        Materials: 

        • Coffee can with lid    

        • Rocks 

        • Dark-coloured construction paper

                                      

                                             Fig.3. 13 Coffee can with lid

        Procedures 

        Place a handful of rocks on a piece of dark-coloured construction paper. Observe the rocks and take notes on their appearance. Place the rocks in a coffee can. Put the lid on the can and shake the can forcefully for 2 minutes, holding the lid tightly shut. Pour the rocks onto the construction paper. Observe them and take notes on any changes in their appearance.

        a. Use the skills gained above to answer the following questions: 

        b. What happened to the rocks and why? 

        c. What forces in nature might affect rocks in similar ways?

        Briefly explain what causes mechanical weathering? 

        Earth’s surface is constantly changing. Rock is integrated and decomposed, moved to lower elevations by gravity, and carried away by water, wind, or ice. When a rock undergoes mechanical weathering, it is broken into smaller and smaller pieces of sediment and dissolved minerals; each retaining the characteristics of the original material. The result is many small pieces from a single large one. 

        Weathering takes place in two ways: physical weathering and chemical weathering. Physical and chemical weathering can go on at the same time. Weathering is thus the response of Earth’s materials to change environment. Weathering is the first step in the breakdown of rock into smaller fragments. This process is critical to the formation of landscapes and many other geological processes. Our discussion will focus on mechanical weathering.

        Mechanical weathering is the physical breaking up of rocks into smaller pieces.

        3.4.2 Causes of mechanical weathering 

        a. Temperature change

        Activity 3.12: Effects of temperature on mechanical weathering 

        a. Brainstorm on the effects of temperature in mechanical weathering and explain clearly its impacts on soil formation and agricultural activities?

        b. Explain how thermal expansion and contraction affect mineral composition?

        As the water evaporates, the salt is left behind. Over time, these salt deposits build up, creating pressure that can cause rocks to split and weaken. Temperature changes also affect mechanical weathering. As temperatures heat up, the rocks themselves expand.

                                    

                                                              Fig.3. 2 Illustration of mechanical weathering 

        Temperature is an essential part of rock creation, modification and destruction. Heating a rock causes it to expand, and cooling causes it to contract. Repeated swelling and shrinking of minerals that have different expansion and contraction rates should exert some stress on the rock’s outer shell.

        Thermal expansion and contraction of minerals 

        Thermal expansion is the tendency of matter to change in shape, area, and volume in response to a change in temperature. Thermal expansion due to the extreme range of temperatures can shatter rocks in desert environments. Temperature is a monotonic function of the average molecular kinetic energy of a substance. When a substance is heated, the kinetic energy of its molecules increases. Thus, the molecules begin vibrating more and usually maintain a greater average separation. 

        Materials which contract with increasing temperature are unusual; this effect is limited in size, and only occurs within limited temperature ranges. The relative expansion (also called strain) divided by the change in temperature is called the material’s coefficient of thermal expansion and generally varies with temperature. Materials expand or contract when subjected to changes in temperature. Most materials expand when they are heated, and contract when they are cooled.

        When free to deform, concrete will expand or contract due to fluctuations in temperature. Concrete expands slightly as temperature rises and contracts as temperature falls. Temperature changes may be caused by environmental conditions or by cement hydration. 

        Thermal expansion and contraction of concrete varies primarily with aggregate type (shale, limestone, siliceous gravel and granite), cementitious material content, water cement ratio, temperature range, concrete age, and ambient relative humidity. Of these factors, aggregate type has the greatest influence on the expansion and contraction of concrete.

         
        Quick Check 3.2 

        a. How does climate affect the rate of weathering?

        b. What is the process that breaks down rocks?

        Effects of temperature and moisture changes on weathering 

        At high elevations, cold night time temperatures during much of the year can produce relentless freeze-thaw cycles. This process explains the presence of broken boulders and stony fragments that litter mountaintops. And, the minerals in volcanic rock that formed at the highest temperatures and pressures are the most vulnerable to chemical weathering at Earth’s surface. 

        In many locations, changes in temperature and moisture content of the environment cause significant physical weathering. When rock is warmed, it expands; when it cools, it contracts. In some regions, rocks are heated to relatively high temperatures during the day and then cooled to much lower temperatures during the night. The constant expansion and contraction of the rocks may result in pieces being broken off. 

        Temperature also affects the land as the cool nights and hot days always cause things to expand and contract. That movement can cause rocks to crack and break apart. The most common type of mechanical weathering is the constant freezing, and thawing of water. In liquid form, water is capable of penetrating holes, joints, and fissures within a rock. As the temperature drops below zero celcius, this water freezes.  Frozen water expands compared to its liquid form. The result is that the holes and cracks in rocks are pushed outward. Even the strongest rocks are no match for this force. 

        As temperatures heat up, the rocks themselves expand. As the temperatures cool down, rocks contract slightly. The effect can be the weakening of the rock itself which induces mechanical weathering. It breaks rock into smaller pieces. These smaller pieces are just like the bigger rock, but smaller. That means the rock has changed physically without changing its composition. The smaller pieces have the same minerals, in just the same proportions as the original rock. 

        b. Ice wedging 

        There are many ways that rocks can be broken apart into smaller pieces. Ice wedging is the main form of mechanical weathering in any climate that regularly cycles above and below the freezing point works quickly, breaking apart rocks in areas with temperatures that cycle above and below freezing in the day and night

                                              

                                                    (Fig.3.13). Ice wedging 

        Explanation of figure 3.14: 

        (A) water seeps into cracks and fractures in rock, (B) when the water freezes, it expands about 9% in volume, which wedges apart the rock, (C)  with repeated freeze cycles, rock breaks into pieces. 

        Ice wedging breaks apart so much, rocks with large piles of broken rock are seen at the base of a hillside, as rock fragments separate and tumble down. Ice wedging is common in Earth’s polar regions and mid latitudes, and also at higher elevations in the mountains.

        Water has the unique property of expanding about 9% when it freezes. This increase in volume occurs because, as ice form, the water molecules arrange themselves into a very open crystalline structure. As a result, when water freezes, it expands and exerts a tremendous outward force. This can be verified by completely filling a container with water and freezing it. 

        After many freezing cycle, the rock is broken into pieces. This process is called frost wedging also as known as Freeze-thaw weathering as shown in Fig.3.13. This occurs when water gets into the small holes and gaps in rocks. If the water in the gap freezes, it expands, splitting the existing gaps into wider cracks. When the water thaws, the wider gaps allow even more water to enter the rock and freeze. Frost wedging can repeat over months or years, turning microscopic gaps in the rock into large cracks. 

        Ice has more volume than liquid water, so the cracks are forced wider. Then, more
        water accumulates in the cracks the next day, which freeze at night to widen the cracks further. When this happens repeatedly, the rock eventually breaks apart along the crevices. 

        Frost heaving, a similar process to frost wedging, occurs when a layer of ice forms under loose rock or soil during the winter, causing the ground surface to bulge upward. When it melts in the spring, the ground surface collapses.

        c. Abrasion 

        Activity 3.14: Importance of abrasion in real life situations

        With the help of knowledge gained in the concepts above, explain how abrasion is formed and suggest its importance in real life situations

        The word ‘abrasion’ literally means scraping of the surface of an object. This is exactly what happens with abrasion of rocks. Weathering by abrasion is responsible for the creation of some of the largest deserts in the world. The rock’s surface is exposed to blown sands - high velocity winds which blow throughout the day while carrying large sand particles. 

        The sand blasts against the surfaces of the rocks, undercutting and deflating them. As a result, smaller rock particles are formed, which when exposed to further sand abrasion become sand particles themselves. 

        Abrasion makes rocks with sharp or jagged edges smooth and round. If you have ever collected beach glass or cobbles from a stream, you have witnessed the work of abrasion (Fig.3.14 below). Rocks on a beach are worn down by abrasion as passing waves cause them to strike each other.

                                        

                                                                                 Fig.3. 14 Smooth round rocks

        In abrasion, one rock bumps against another rock. The following are the causes of abrasion; 

        • Gravity causes abrasion as a rock tumbles down a mountainside or cliff. 

        • Moving water causes abrasion as particles in the water collide and bump against one another. 

        • Strong winds carrying pieces of sand can sandblast surfaces. 

        • Ice in glaciers carries many bits and pieces of rock. Rocks embedded at the bottom of the glacier scrape against the rocks.

        In abrasion, one rock bumps against another rock. The following are the causes of abrasion; • Gravity causes abrasion as a rock tumbles down a mountainside or cliff. • Moving water causes abrasion as particles in the water collide and bump against one another. • Strong winds carrying pieces of sand can sandblast surfaces. • Ice in glaciers carries many bits and pieces of rock. Rocks embedded at the bottom of the glacier scrape against the rocks.

        d. Biological activity 

        Weathering is also accomplished by the activities of organisms, including plants, burrowing animals, and humans. Plant roots in search of minerals and water grow into fractures, and as the roots grow they wedge the rock apart . 

        Burrowing animals further break down the rock by moving fresh material to the surface, where physical and chemical process can more effectively attack it. Decaying organisms also produce acids, which contribute to chemical weathering .

        3.4.3 Factors influencing the type and rate of rock weathering

        Activity3.15:
        Brainstorm and classify clearly the factors affecting the rate of weathering?

        Several factors influence the type and rate of rock weathering. By breaking a rock into smaller pieces, the amount of surface area exposed to chemical weathering is increased. The presence or absence of joints can be significant because they influence the ability of water to penetrate the rock. Other important factors include the mineral makeup of rocks and climate.

        a. Climate

        The amount of water in the air and the temperature of an area are both part of an area’s climate. Moisture speeds up chemical weathering. Weathering occurs fastest in hot, wet climates. It occurs very slowly in hot and dry climates. Without temperature changes, ice wedging cannot occur. In very cold, dry areas, there is little weathering.

        b. Surface 

        area Most weathering occurs on exposed surfaces of rocks and minerals. The more surface area a rock has, the more quickly it will weather. When a block is cut into smaller pieces, it has more surface area. So, therefore, the smaller pieces of a rock will weather faster than a large block of rock.

        c. Rock

        composition Headstones of granite, which is composed of silicate minerals, are relatively resistant to chemical weathering. The minerals that crystallize first form under much higher temperatures than those which crystallize last. Consequently, the early formed minerals are not as stable at Earth’s surface, where the temperatures are different from the environment in which they formed. Olivine crystalizes first and is therefore the least resistant to chemical weathering, whereas quartz, which crystallizes last, is the most resistant.

        d. Pollution

        speeds up weathering Factories and cars release carbon dioxide and other gases into the air. These gases dissolve in the rainwater, causing acid rain to form. Acid rain contains nitric and sulfuric acid, causing rocks and minerals to dissolve faster. 

        e.  Soil erosion and soil deposition

        Activity 3.17: Soil erosion
        Look at the figure below that represents soil erosion. Carefully study the figure and answer the following questions:

                              

                                                             Fig.3. 15 The erosive force of wind on an open field.

        I. What does the term soil erosion mean?

        II. Write down the two kinds of soil erosion illustrated in the figure above? Which kind of soil erosion mostly occurs in your home area? III. Explain clearly how the kinds of soil erosion outlined in ii) above affects on agricultural activities?

        Soil covers most land surfaces. Along with air and water, it is one of our most indispensableresources. Soil is a combination of mineral and organic matter. 

        Soil erosion is a naturally occurring process that affects all landforms. In agriculture, soil erosion refers to the wearing away of a field’s topsoil by the natural physical forces of water and wind or through forces associated with farming activities.

        Erosion is incorporation and transportation of material by a mobile agent, usually water, wind, or ice.

        Erosion whether it is by water and wind, involves three distinct actions – soil detachment, movement and deposition. Topsoil, which is high in organic matter, fertility and soil life, is relocated elsewhere “on-site” where it builds up over time or is carried “off-site” where it fills in drainage channels. Soil erosion reduces cropland productivity and contributes to the pollution of adjacent watercourses, wetlands and lakes. 

        Soil erosion can be a slow process that continues relatively unnoticed or can occur at an alarming rate, causing serious loss of topsoil. 

        Soil compaction, low organic matter, loss of soil structure, poor internal drainage and soil acidity problems are other serious soil degradation conditions that can accelerate the soil erosion process.

                             

                           Fig.3. 16 The erosive force of water from concentrated surface water runoff.

        Deposition is the geological process in which sediments, soil and rocks are added to a landform or land mass. Wind, ice, and water, as well as sediment flowing via gravity, transport previously eroded sediment, which, at the loss of enough kinetic energy in the fluid, is deposited, building up layers of sediment.

        3.4.4 Checking my progress

        1. The pictures A and B are of two geographical features. Look and carefully study the pictures to answer questions below.

                                           

                                                                           Fig.3. 17 Illustration of geographical features
        a. Interpret the images above and Use your observation to suggest names of the corresponding geographical features in the image above? 

        b. Do you have such geographical features in your district or neighboring districts? Use your observation to explain clearly the two geographical features occurring in the image above? 

        c. Explain the causes for each geographical feature occurring above? 

        d. Can the geographical features identified above impact agriculture in our communities? Explain with clear facts to support your decision. 

        e. What are moral and ethical issues associated with the geographical features given above?

        3.5 END UNIT ASSESSMENT 

        3.5.1 Multiple choices questions

        For question 1 to 5, choose the letter of the best answer 

        1. It is known that earth’s atmosphere has a series of layers, each with its own specific characteristics and properties? The following is the appropriate layer where we live.

                  a. Thermosphere 

                  b. Troposphere 

                  c. Stratosphere 

                  d. Mesosphere 

        2. Consider the following statements: 

           I. The atmosphere of Earth protects life on Earth by absorbing ultraviolet solar radiation, warming the surface through greenhouse effect and reducing temperature extremes between day and night.

           II. X-rays and ultraviolet radiation from the Sun are absorbed in the thermosphere. 

           III. The stratosphere extends from the top of the thermosphere to about 50 km above the ground. 

        Of these statements: 

           a. I, II, and III are correct. 

           b. I, II and III are wrong    

           c. I and II are correct but III is wrong d. I and III are wrong but II is correct 

        3. Agrophysics is defined as 

           a. The branch of science dealing with study of matter and energy and their mutual relation. 

           b. The branch of science dealing with communication devices to measure and collect information about physical conditions in agricultural and natural environments.

           c. The branch of natural sciences dealing with the application of physics in agriculture and environment.

           d. None of these

        3.5.2 Structured Questions

        1. Write the missing word or words on the space before each number. For items 1-9  

        a. ___speeds up chemical weathering. 

        b. Weathering happens ______ in hot, wet (humid) climates. 

        c. Weathering occurs very slowly in _______ and ______ climates. 

        d.  Without ________ changes, ice wedging cannot occur e.  In very ________ and ________ areas, there is little weathering. 

        f. Most weathering occurs on ____________________of  rocks and minerals 

        g.  The ________ surface area a rock has, the quicker it will weather. h. Some minerals resist weathering. _________________ is a mineral that weathers slowly. 

        i. Rocks made up of minerals such as feldspar, ______, and iron, weather more quickly. 

        2. If the statement is true, write true. If it is false, change the underlined word or words to make the statement true.

           a. Water vapor is very important in predicting weather. 

           b. Temperature is a reason why atmosphere is more dense close to the earth’s surface.  

           c. Agrophysics plays an important role in the limitation of hazards to agricultural objects and environment. 

           d. Energy is transferred between the earth surface and planet in a variety of ways. 

           e. As the temperature increases in the atmosphere, the minimum radiation occurs at short wavelengths.

        3. Write a sentence describing the relationship between each pair of terms. 

            I.  Gravity, atmosphere 

           II. Temperature, rocks. 

        4. Marry wants to make agrophysics journal.  She says, “My journal will be focused on advances in sensors and communication devices to measure and collect information about physical conditions in agricultural and natural environments”. Evaluate Marry’s statement. 

        5. With the help of two clear examples on each, explain clearly how temperature and water vapor impact agricultural activities using the table. Terms 

                         
         6. Complete the chart below. If the left column is blank, give the correct term. If the right column is blank, give an example of economic activities taking place in the corresponding layer if possible. 

                         

        7. How do climate impact agricultural activities? 

        8. Explain briefly the role of machines in agriculture in rapid development of the country towards suitable programs of transformation and modernization of agriculture?

        9. Knowing different stages of growing plants in our daily agriculture activities, explain clearly which stages mostly benefit the use of technology? 

        10. Cracks in rocks widen as water in them freezes and thaws. How does this affect the surface of Earth? 

        11. Name the four factors that can hasten or speed up the process of weathering. 

        12. How is weathering different from erosion? Think! 

        13. How can increasing the surface area of rock hasten or speed up the process of weathering Think! 

        14. Human activities are responsible for enormous amounts of mechanical weathering, by digging or blasting into rock to build homes, roads, and subways or to quarry stone. Suggest measures that can be taken to minimize mechanical weathering caused by human activities? 

        3.5.3 Essay type questions 

        15. Design and conduct your own research into the influence of surfaces on temperature comparing earth surfaces that interest them (such as colored soils, dry and wet soils, grass, dry leaves, or different types of coverings such as plastic or aluminum foil). Compare the data with these new surfaces compared to the given surfaces (water, light soil, dark soil).  Note that the data may not be comparable due to variations in experimental design, such as differences in light bulb temperature and height of the lamp.

        •                

          Fig. 4.1: Illustration of the impact of natural disaster such as earthquakes, tsunami, floods, landslides, cyclones on human activities and infrastructures.
          Key unit Competence

          By the end of the unit the learner should be able to relate physics concepts to earthquakes, Tsunami landslide and cyclone occurrences and impact on environment.

          My goals

          • Anaylse earthquakes, landslides, floods, and tsunami  

          • Describe natural and human made seismic occurrences  

          • Describe earthquake causes as: geological faults, volcanic activity, landslides, mine blasts, and nuclear weapon tests.  

          • Relate Physics concepts to natural disasters impact.  

          • Explain causes of earthquakes, tsunami, landslide and floods.  

          • Outline impacts of earthquakes on buildings and other structures.

          Introductory activity:

          Using the information collected from the above Fig. 4.1, answer the following questions related to natural disasters due to underground earth’s movements. Your answers have to reflect the role of Physics in explaining the origin, causes and impact of these natural disasters. Also describe how their impacts on the environment can be reduced.

          • To what extend is the human activities and environment are affected by natural disaster?  

          • What are the measures to minimize their impacts or prevent them from occurring? 

          • What makes buildings to collapse during such disturbance? What can be done to minimize the impact on buildings and other properties? 

          • What happen to the ocean when such underground disturbances occur?

          • By learning this unit, each student will realize the need for better understanding of the basic physics concepts behind the occurrence of natural disasters such as earthquake, landslide, tsunami, flood and cyclone. The unit focuses on the physics and dynamic of those natural disasters.

           4.1 The earthquake

          Activity4.1: Physical concept behind the earthquake. 

          1. Brainstorm the physics concepts behind the occurrence of earthquakes. 

          2. Write a summary of the main physics concepts in the occurrence of the earthquake.

          An earthquake also known as a quake, tremor or temblor is the shaking or trembling of the ground caused by the sudden release of energy. This is usually associated with faulting or breaking of rocks followed by continuing adjustment of their positions with the later resulting in aftershocks. 

          This continuing shaking or trembling of the ground with unexpected energy is usually associated with perturbation of ground’s medium in different direction that causes the ground to be compressed and stretched. The stretching and compression of the ground medium will result in the emission of waves that propagate in all directions. 

          During the ground’s shaking, the elastic strain energy is released and waves radiate from where ground is disturbed. An element of the ground therefore moves in simple harmonic motion.

          It is said that earthquakes has created seismic waves. Those waves can range in size from those that are so weak that they cannot be felt to those that are violent enough to toss people around and destroy entire cities.

          The seismicity or seismic activity of an area refers to the frequency, type and size of earthquakes experienced over a period of time. The place where an earthquake begins underground is called the focus or hypocenter, and the area on the earth’s surface directly above the hypocenter is called the epicenter. This epicenter region receives normally the most powerful shock waves.

                                          

                                                                    Fig.4. 2: A region where Earthquakes begin.

          4.1.1 Origin of earthquakes 

          Earthquake originates from a high pressure region at the hypocenter. This high pressure increases gradually the temperature and the increase in temperature inside the earth and consequently the increase in heat finally makes rocks to be in molten state.

          As pressure keeps on increasing due to strong heat effect, molten rocks try to get rid of the excess pressure and explode. The explosion induces elastic energy release at the hypocenter and a wave spread out as result of the shifting of the plates and internal disturbances. The wave propagates away from the source. In additional to that, the disturbance that moves away from the hypocenter makes the earth to vibrate. So quakes are accompanied with shock waves. 

          To better understand this phenomenon, let take an example a covered sauce pan filled with milk and heated up. As the pressure increases inside the saucepan, the temperature also increases and the milk starts to boil. As the milk boils due to increased temperature, the excess pressure in milk eject the cover of the saucepan and the sound of the boiling milk is heard at a certain distance from where the phenomenon occurred.

          Major earthquakes have generated into tsunamis that destroyed entire cities and affected whole countries. Relatively minor earthquakes can also be caused by human activity, including extraction of minerals and the collapse of large buildings.

          4.1.2 Intensity of earthquakes 

          The earthquake size is a quantitative measure of the size of the earthquake at its source. The Richter magnitude scale measures the amount of seismic energy released by an earthquake. 

          This magnitude is related to the amount of seismic energy released at the hypocenter of the earthquake. It is based on the amplitude of the earthquake waves recorded on instruments which have identical calibrations called seismographs. The magnitude of an earthquake is translated in the reading on the Richter scale.

          The severity of an earthquake can be expressed in terms of both the intensity and magnitude. However, the two terms are quite different and are often confused. Intensity is based on the observed effects of ground shaking on people, buildings, and natural features. It varies from place to place within the disturbed region depending on the location of the observer with respect to the earthquake’s epicenter. The amplitude and energy measured by the Richter scale are objective and quantitative while intensity is more subjective and qualitative as it depends on the judgment of the observers.

          Earthquakes are recorded by instruments called seismographs or seismometer and their recordings produce a seismogram as represented on fig.4.3. The fig. 4.2 shows a typical seismograph used to measure the magnitude of earthquakes. It has a base that is set firmly on the ground and a heavy weight that hangs free. 

          When an earthquake causes the ground to shake, the base of the seismograph shakes too, but the hanging weight does not. Instead the spring or the string that it is hanging from absorbs all the movement. The difference in position between the shaking part of the seismograph and the motionless part of it is what is recorded. 

                                                           

                                Fig.4. 3: Instrument used to measure earthquakes: seismographs or seismometer

          4.1.3 Measurement of the size of earthquakes

          The size of an earthquake depends on the size of the fault and the amount of slip on the fault, but that’s not something scientists can simply measure since faults are many kilometers deep beneath the earth’s surface. So how do they measure an earthquake? They analyse the seismograms recorded at the surface of the earth to determine how large the earthquake was. A typical seismogram is shown on the Fig.4.3.

                              

                                                                       Fig.4. 4: intensity or size of Earthquakes.
          A short wiggly line that doesn’t wiggle very much means a small earthquake, and a long wiggly line that wiggles a lot means a large earthquake. The length of the wiggle depends on the size of the fault, and the size of the wiggle depends on the amount of slip.

          4.1.4 Types of earthquake waves 

          They are two types of earthquakes. Those are body and surface waves 

          Body waves are subdivided into P waves or Primary waves and S wave or secondary waves. P and S waves shake each the ground in different ways as they travel through it. The P waves, or compression waves, alternately compresses and expands medium in the direction of propagation.  They are fastest waves and travel through solids, liquids, or gases.

          The surface waves or S waves are slower than P waves and travel through solids only. They are shear waves and the direction of propagation of such waves is perpendicular to the direction of vibration of the medium. The surface waves just travel below or along the ground’s surface and their side-to-side movement and the rock vibration reduce with depth into the earth. They are the main cause of damage to buildings. 

          To understand how this works, let’s compare P and S waves to lightning and thunder. Light travels faster than sound, so during a thunderstorm you will first see the lightning and then after hear the thunder. If you are too close to where the lightning happens, the thunder will boom right after the lightning, but if you are far away from the lightning, you can count several seconds before you hear the thunder. 

          4.1.5 Causes of earthquake 

          The shaking motion of an earthquake is the result of a sudden release of energy. This situation is observed when stress, building up within rocks of the earth’s crust, is released in a sudden jolt. Rocks crack and slip past each other causing the ground to vibrate. The causes are both natural and man- made.

          • Volcanic activity: The combining effects of increase of pressure, temperature and heat inside the volcano results in volume increase and increase in energy. This makes rocks inside the volcanoes to be in molten rocks and as the heat keeps on increasing the molten rocks become sticky hot liquid. As the volume increase further within that sticky liquid it will reach a boiling point and start ejecting gases at high temperature. The ejection of such gases makes the ground to vibrate resulting in earthquakes. Finally the molten liquid is ejected out in an explosion. Earthquakes related to volcanic activity may produce hazards which include ground cracks or deformation.

          • Nuclear weapon testing: The process of underground nuclear testing is rather straightforward. The rocks in the surrounding area of the thermonuclear device are scattered by the passage of explosion shock waves. This sudden release of the elastic strain energy that was stored in the rock will cause the ground to vibrate. 

          • Underground mining: In mining depending on the amount of materials that are removed from the ground, people use deep well injection and shift the stress on underlying rocks. At some point the extractions of minerals will cause the ground to vibrate. 

          There are other causes such as water pumping, collapse of roofs of caverns or even heavy trucks that can cause the ground to shake.

          4.1.6 Effects of earthquakes

          Activity 4.2: Effects of earthquakes

                    

                                    Fig.4. 5: illustration of impact of earthquakes on human activities.

          The above pictures A, B and C describe what happened in a certain region after an earthquake. Observe them carefully and answer the following questions: 

          1. In your own words, discuss what you are observing. 

          2. Think of what people can do before, during and after an earthquake.

          The earthquake environmental effects are effects caused by an earthquake on the natural environment. These include surface faulting, ground deformation and subsidence tsunamis, ground resonance, landslides and ground failures. They are either directly linked to the earthquake source or provoked by the ground shaking. 

          Geological effects such as soil liquefaction, landslides etc., that are related to both surface deformation, faulting and ground shaking, not only leave permanent imprints in the environment, but also dramatically affect human lives and infrastructures. Moreover, underwater fault ruptures and seismically triggered landslides can generate devastating tsunami waves. 

          Earthquakes environmental effects are categorized into two main types: 

          • Primary effects: which are the surface expression of the seismogenic source (e.g., surface faulting), normally observed for crustal earthquakes above a given magnitude threshold. 

          • Secondary effects: basically those effects are related to ground. It includes landslides, soil liquefaction, fires, floods etc. they play an important role in the destructions produced by earthquakes.

          The direct shaking effects as damage or collapse of buildings, bridges, elevated roads, railways, water towers, water treatment facilities, utility lines, pipelines, electrical generating facilities and transformer stations , are not the only hazard associated with earthquakes.

          Depending on the vulnerability of the affected community, people may lose their lives get traumatized or become homeless in the aftermath of an earthquake. The table below shows the Richter magnitude of earthquakes and impacts they have on people and infrastructures.

                                

                                                   Table 4.1: Richter magnitude of earthquakes.

          4.1.7 Safety measures on earthquakes

          Before an earthquake 

          • You should secure all items that could fall or move and cause injuries or damage (e.g. bookshelves, mirrors, light fixtures, televisions, computers, hot water heaters etc). 

          • Move beds away from windows and secure any hanging items over beds, other places people sit or lie.

          • Protect yourselves: Cover your head and neck with your arms. 

          • Create a strategies plan that you will use to communicate with family members. 

          • Consult a structural engineer to evaluate your home and ask about updates to strengthen areas that would be weak during an earthquake. 

          • In searching buildings to rent or buy, verify whether its materials have earthquake standards.

          During an earthquake

          • Lay down onto your hands and knees so the earthquake doesn’t knock you down.  

          • Cover your head and neck with your arms to protect yourself from falling debris. 

          • If you are in danger from falling objects, and you can move safely, crawl for additional cover under a sturdy desk or table. 

          • If no sturdy shelter is nearby, crawl away from windows, next to an interior wall. Stay away from glass, windows, outside doors and walls, and anything that could fall, such as light fixtures or furniture. 

          • Hold on to any sturdy covering so you can move with it until the shaking stops. 

          • Stay where you are until the shaking stops. Do not run outside. Do not get in a doorway as this does not provide protection from falling or flying objects, and you may not be able to remain standing.

          If you are in bed: 

          • Stay there and Cover your head and neck with a pillow. At night, hazards and debris are difficult to see and avoid; attempts to move in the dark result in more injuries than remaining in bed.

          If you are outside: 

          • If you are outdoors when the shaking starts, move away from buildings, streetlights, and utility wires. Once in the open, “Drop, Cover, and Hold On.” Stay there until the shaking stops. 

          If you are in a moving vehicle: 

          • It is difficult to control a vehicle during the shaking. If you are in a moving vehicle, stop as quickly and safely as possible and stay in the vehicle. Avoid stopping near or under buildings, trees, overpasses, and utility wires. Proceed cautiously once the earthquake has stopped. Avoid roads, bridges, or ramps that the earthquake may have damaged.

          After an earthquake 

          • When the shaking stops, look around. If the building is damaged and there is a clear path to safety, leave the building and go to an open space away from damaged areas. 

          • If you are trapped, do not move about or kick up dust. 

          • If you have a cell phone with you, use it to call or text for help.

          • Tap on a pipe or wall or use a whistle, if you have one, so that rescuers can locate you.

          • Once safe, monitor local news reports via battery operated radio, TV, social media, and cell phone text alerts for emergency information and instructions. 

          • Check for injuries and provide assistance if you have training. Assist with rescues if you can do so safely, etc.

           4.1.8 Checking my progress

          1. What do you understand by the term Earthquake? 

          2. Outline the impact do earthquakes human activities and infrastructure? 

          3. How nuclear weapons testing cause earthquakes? 

          4. What can you do when you are inside  a house during ground shaking?  

          4.2. LANDSLIDES.

           Activity 4.3: Description of landslides 

                        

                                  Fig.4.6: illustration of landslide and the impact on environment.

          Observe carefully the above figure and answer the following questions. 

          a. What do you think could have happened to the area shown in the above figure? 

          b. Can you think of the major causes this kind situation? 

          c. Discuss the possible effects of such disaster on human activities and on the environment. 

          d. Suppose that you are living in a region that is likely to be affected by such disaster, discuss what would do you to prevent it from occurring. How will you behave if it happens?

          4.2.1 Definition of landslide 

          A landslide, also known as slope movement, mass movement or mass wasting, is the movement by which soil, sand, and rock move down the slope, typically as a mass, largely under the force of gravity. It is frequently caused by the soil’s water content which acts as a lubricating agent for failure to occur.

                               

                               Fig.4.7: illustration of landslide event with soil, sand and rocks being moved down the slope.

          4.2.2 Causes of landslide

          Several factors can increase a slope’s susceptibility to a landslide event. The following are some the causes:

          • Water (rainfall or the movement of the sea) this acts as a grease to the material increasing the likelihood that it will slip and also adds extra weight to the rock 

          • Erosion processes such as coastal erosion and river erosion 

          • Steepness of slope

          • Rock: soft rock such as mudstone or hard rock such as limestone 

          • Shape of the rock ‘grains’ 

          • Jointing and orientation of bedding planes 

          • Arrangement of the rock layers 

          • Weathering processes for example freeze-thaw reduces the stickiness (cohesion) between the rock grains. 

          • Lack of vegetation which would help bind material together 

          • Flooding 

          • Volcanoes and earthquake activity nearby man’s activity mining, traffic vibrations or urbanization which changes surface water drainage patterns.

          4.2.3. Effect of landslides 

          Due to the movement of rocks, soils, sand mixed with water under the force of gravity, landslides produce both positive and negative effects: Among the positive effects we can mention: 

          • Promotion of mining activities. 

          • Building of fertile flood plains for agriculture  

          • Promotion of tourism due to land forms of mass wasting 

          • Promotion of research or study purposes 

          • Soil formation due to the exposure of fresh rocks.

          Negative effects

          Activity 4.4: Puzzle or cross words.

          To do this activity, check the words in the puzzle then after fill it in the missing sentence such that it will have meaning.  It is related to the negative impact of landslide.

                           

          • Loss of…….. 

          • ………… of people

          • ………of agriculture, land and crops

          • Destruction of ……….. 

          • Alteration of …… ( e.g. damming rivers)

          • …….of vegetation 

          • Increase in ………. expenditures

          4.2.4 Safety measures of landslides 

          Whenever landslide occurs, it damages many things in different area (eg environment, people, buildings, roads etc. Some actions are required:
          Before a landslide 

          • Do not build your house near steep slope, drainage ways or natural erosion. 

          • Ask information to local officials or geologist on vulnerable area to landslides and corrective measures you can take if necessary. 

          • Make an evacuation plans for your area how you will communicate with other people.etc

          During landslide 

          • Stay alert and awake. Many debris-flow fatalities occur when people are sleeping. Be aware that intense, short bursts of rain may be particularly dangerous, especially after longer periods of heavy rainfall and damp weather.

          • If you are in areas susceptible to landslides and debris flows, remember that driving during an intensive storm can be dangerous. 

          • Listen for any unusual sounds that might designate moving debris, this can flow quickly and sometimes without warning that precede a large landslide.  

          • When you are near a steam or channel of water flow, be aware if it increase or decrease, such changes may indicate landslide activity upstream, so be prepared to move quickly. 

          • Inform affected neighbors. Your neighbors may not be aware of potential hazards. Advising them of a potential threat may help save lives. Help neighbors who may need assistance to evacuate. Etc

          After landslide 

          • Report quickly the potential hazards as possible for prevention of further hazard and injury. 

          • Look for and report broken utility lines and damaged roadways and railways to the authorities 

          • Search advice for geologist/geotechnical expert for evaluating and best ways to prevent or reduce landslide risk, without creating further hazard 

          • Look around and check whether the building foundation, chimney, and surrounding land have damaged. 

          • Help your neighbor who may require individual support, aged people and people with disabilities, because they may require additional assistance. The same as people who care for them or who have large families may need a special assistance in emergency situations.

          4.2.5 Checking my progress 

          1. Copy the table into your exercise books and fill it in with the sentences below. 

          • Man’s activity mining brought traffic vibrations which changes surface water drainage patterns. 

          • Ground deformation due to the fact that rocks and debris are swapped by water. 

          • Plant the ground cover on slopes and build retaining walls. 

          • Earthquakes create stresses that make weak slopes fail.

          • Rainfall or the movement of the sea.

          • Listen to local radio or television stations for the latest emergency information. 

          • Erosion.

                   

          4.3. TSUNAMI 

          Activity 4.5: Tsunami event


          Fig.4.8: illustration of the devastating effects of Tsunami. 

          The above figures shows scenarios that where  observed during and after a Tsunami had affected a certain region. Study the picture above carefly these pictures and answer the following questions:
           
           What are the main observations?

           II. What do you think could have caused such situations?

           III. From your analysis, to what extent this natural disaster affects human activities and environment?

           IV. Imagine your family in such situations as shown above, which advice would you provide to them? 

          4.3.1 Definition of Tsunami. 

          A sudden offset changes the elevation of the ocean and initiates a water wave that travels outward from the region of sea-floor disruption.  Such water waves are called Tsunamis waves and can travel long distances across the ocean. As an example, large earthquakes in Alaska or Chile have generated waves that caused damage and deaths in regions as far away as California, Hawaii and Japan. 

          The world tsunami comes from two Japanese words: Tsu mean “Harbor” and Nami means “wave” so Tsunami mean a “Harbor wave”. A tsunami is a series of waves in a water body caused by the displacement of a large volume of water, generally in large lake, volcanic eruptions and other underwater explosions, landslide, and other disturbances above and below all have a potential to generate a tsunami.

          Generally a tsunami consists of a series of waves with periods ranging from minutes to hours, a small amplitude (wave height) offshore, and a very long wavelength hundreds of kilometers long, whereas in normal ocean waves have a wavelength of only 30 or 40 meters. This is why they generally pass unnoticed at sea, as they form only a slight swell usually about 300 mm above the normal sea surface. They grow in height when they reach shallower water. 

          Tsunamis are sometime referred to as tidal waves. This once popular term from the most common appearance of tsunami which is that of an extraordinarily high tidal bore, both produce waves of water that move internal (inland) but in the case of tsunami the inland movement of water may be much greater, the impression of an exceedingly high and forceful tide. In recent years, the term “tidal wave” has fallen out of favour, especially in the scientific community, because tsunamis have nothing to do with tides which are produced by the gravitational pull of the moon and sun rather than the displacement of water finally tidal wave is discouraged by oceanographers and geologists.

                                        
                                    Fig.4. 9: illustration of how Tsunami waves increase in amplitude as they approach the shore.

          In deep water tsunamis are not large and pose no danger. They are very broad with horizontal wavelengths of hundreds of kilometers and surface heights much smaller, about one meter. Tsunamis pose no threat in the deep ocean because they are only a meter or so high in deep water. But as the wave approaches the shore and the water shallows, all the energy that was distributed throughout the ocean depth becomes concentrated in the shallow water and the wave height increases, its wavelength diminishes and its amplitude grows enormously.

          Development of Tsunami

          Everybody knows that what goes up must come down. This is particularly true for water which always forms a nice flat surface. So once a disturbance has risen up an amount of water the next step is for the sea to level itself out and bring it back down. 

          This pushes the water that was underneath it to spread outwards and thus creating a wave. As this wave travels through the ocean it may eventually reach the shore. As the sea becomes shallower close to the shore, the energy carried in the water wave remains unchanged. It compresses the small amount water upwards resulting in Tsunamis. The stages of process of the development of tsunami are shown on the figure 4.9. The numbers on the figure correspond to the stage number. 

          As one plate subducts below another the pressure builds up progressively. After many years this will result in a section of the megatrust giving way. 

          Stage 2: As the section gives way it ruptures the ocean floor causing a massive displacement of water. 

          Stage 3:  stage 2 can develop due to an earthquake that create a landslide under the sea floor which in turn would have generated a swell 

          Stage 4: A Tsunami wave is barely noticeable as a ripple of water near the epicenter 

          Stage 5: As the wave reaches the cost and the water becomes shallower the size of the wave increases drastically.

                                   

                                         Fig.4. 10: Different stage of Tsunami development process 

          4.3.2 Causes of Tsunami 

          The principal cause of tsunami is the displacement of a substantial volume of water or perturbation of the sea, this displacement of water is usually attributed to either Earthquake, landslide, volcanic eruption, etc. The waves formed in this way are sustained by full of gravity. 

          The rapid displacement of water for a large volume, as energy transfers to the water at a rate faster than the water can be absorbed, the wave did not travel far as it strike land immediately and generate the landslide. The people fishing in the bay were killed, and another board managed to ride the wave .

          Volcanoes cause tsunami when there is an eruption. The volcano can either be on land or under the sea, in which case it is known as a submarine volcano. Violent volcanic eruptions represent also impulsive disturbances, which can displace a great volume of water and generate extremely destructive tsunami waves in the immediate source area. The water in the sea then breaks into waves which travel across the ocean until they come into contact with a coast. Here, a tsunami is formed.

          4.3.3 Effects of Tsunami 

          They are many effect of Tsunami most of them are: 

          • Loss of lives 

          • Death of marine life( aquatic animals) 

          • Famine 

          • Coastal erosion (the wearing a way of coastal land or beaches) 

          • Structural damage through destruction of people’s properties. 

          • Higher  risks of diseases( eg Malaria) 

          • Severe flooding 

          • Displacement of people 

          • Trauma (Psychological effects.) 

          • Government expenditure, etc. 

          4.3.4 Prevention of tsunami 

          Unfortunately nothing can be done to prevent Tsunamis. However, there are several organizations that use complex technology to monitor movement of the earth’s plates and sudden changes in water movement. There are also warning and evacuation procedures in place around countries with higher risks like Japan and Hawaii where Tsunamis are frequent.

          Any sudden earthquake that happens underwater will be detected in the same manner of an on-shore earthquake. These are recorded on the Richter scale and depending on its magnitude then warning systems can be activated to evacuate people.

          4.3.5 Checking my progress.

                     

          4.4. FLOODS. 

          4.4.1 concept of flood

          Activity 4.6:

                    

                     Fig.4.11: Illustration of the impact of floods on human activities and on environments.

          a. Critically, analyze the pictures shown in the figure above and write down what is happening. 

          b. What technical term that describes the scenario. Define the term you have mentioned 

          c. What are the end results after the occurrence of the disaster shown in the figure above?. 

          d. Suppose that you are living in the area that is always affected by the disaster, what you would do to prevent it from occurring again?

          Many of us try to generate the process of water cycle in dairy life and rains falling around our environment cause too much water around our house. People think of what they can do during rainfall. 

          Flooding occurs mostly from heavy rainfall when natural watercourses do not have the capacity to convey excess water. However, floods are not always caused by heavy rainfall.

                          

                                          Fig.4.12: Heavy rain can cause flooding in some areas

          4.4.2 Types of floods 

          There are three major types flood: Flash floods, rapid on-set floods and slow on-set floods: 

          a. Flash floods 

          This type of flood occurs within a very short time (2-6 hours, and sometimes within minutes) and is usually a result of heavy rain, dam break or snow melt. Sometimes, intense rainfall from slow moving thunderstorms can cause it.  Flash floods are the most destructive and can be fatal, as people are usually taken by surprise. There is usually no warning, no preparation and the impact can be very swift and devastating. 

          b. Rapid on-set floods 

          Similar to flash floods, this type of flood takes slightly longer to develop and the flood can last for a day or two only. It is also very destructive, but does not usually surprise people like flash floods. With rapid on-set floods, people can quickly put a few things right and escape before it gets very bad. 

          c. Slow on-set floods 

          This kind of flood is usually a result of water bodies over flooding their banks. They tend to develop slowly and can last for days and weeks. They usually spread over many kilometers and occur more in flood plains (fields prone to floods in low-lying areas). The effect of this kind of floods on people is more likely to be due to disease, malnutrition or snakebites.

          4.4.3 Causes of floods 

          Here are a few events that can cause flooding: 

          Rains: Each time there are more rains than the drainage system can take, there can be floods. Sometimes, there is heavy rain for a very short period that results in floods. In other times, there may be light rain for many days and weeks and can also result in floods.

          River overflow: Rivers can overflow their banks to cause flooding. This happens when there is more water upstream than usual, and as it flows downstream to the adjacent low-lying areas (also called a floodplain), there is a burst and water gets into the land.

          Strong winds in coastal areas: Sea water can be carried by massive winds and hurricanes onto dry coastal lands and cause flooding. Sometimes water from the sea resulting from a tsunami can flow inland and cause damages. 

          Dam breaking:  Dams are man-made blocks mounted to hold water flowing down from a highland and this water can be used to generate electricity. Sometimes, too much water held up in the dam can cause it to break and overflow the area. Excess water can also be intentionally released from the dam to prevent it from breaking and that can also cause floods. 

          Ice and snow-melts:  In many cold regions, heavy snow over the winter usually stays
          un-melted for some time. There are also mountains that have ice on top of them. Sometimes the ice suddenly melts when the temperature rises, resulting in massive movement of water into places that are usually dry. This is usually called a snowmelt flood.

          4.4.4 Consequences of floods 

          Floods can have devastating consequences and can have serious impact on the country’s economy, the environment, people and animals 

          a. Economic 

          During floods, especially flash floods, roads, bridges, farms, houses and automobiles are destroyed. All these come at a heavy cost to people and the government. It usually takes years for affected communities to rebuild and business to come back to normalcy.

          b.  Environment

          The environment also suffers when floods happen. Chemicals and other hazardous substances end up in the water and eventually contaminate the water bodies that floods. Additionally, flooding kills animals and others insects in the affected areas, distorting the natural balance of the ecosystem. 

          c. People and animals 

          Many people and animals may get killed   during flash floods. Many more are injured and others made homeless. Water supply and electricity are disrupted. In addition to this, flooding brings a lot of diseases and infections and sometimes insects and snakes make their ways to the area and cause a lot of havoc. 

          However, there is also something good about floods, especially those that occur in floodplains and farm fields. Flood water carries lots of nutrients that are deposited in the plains. Farmers love such soils, as they are perfect for cultivating any kinds of crops.

          4.4.5 Floods and safety measures 

          Sometimes there is no warning of flash floods, and that is why it is important to think of them and prepare for them before they happen. Here are a few things you can do. 

          Before the floods

          • Know about your local relief centers and evacuation routes. 

          • Keep emergency numbers and important information handy, as well as emergency supplies, kits, first aid items. These may include water, canned food; can opener, battery-operated radio, flashlight and protective clothing. 

          • Fold and roll up anything onto higher ground (or upper floors of your home), including chemicals and medicines. 

          • Make sure everything that is of importance is secured (jewelry, documents, pets, and other valuables).

          • Plant trees and shrubs and keep a lot of vegetation in your compound if you are in a low-lying area as that can control erosion and help soften the speed of the flowing water. 

          During the floods 

          • Flash floods occur in a short spate of time. As soon as they start, be quick, keep safe and ensure that children and elderly are safe by leaving the house to a higher ground. 

          • Turn off all electrical appliances, gas, heating and the like if there is a bit of time.

          • Leave the area before it gets too late. Do not drive through the water as moving water can sweep you away. 

          • Stay away from power lines or broken power transmission cables.  

          • Try to keep away from flood water as it may contain chemicals or other hazardous materials. 

          • Don’t walk, swim or drive through floodwater. Just six inches of fast-flowing water can knock you over and two feet will float a car.

          After the floods 

          • Make sure you have permission from emergency officers to get back inside your house.

          • Keep all power and electrical appliance off until the house is cleaned up properly and electrical personnel has confirmed that it is OK to put them on. 

          • Make sure you have photographs, or a record of all the damage, as it may be needed for insurance claims. 

          • Clean the entire home, together with all the objects in it very well before you use them again. They may be contaminated.

          • Keep children and pets away from hazardous sites and floodwater. 

          • Let friends and family know you’re safe. Register yourself as safe on the Safe and Well website.

          4.4.6 Checking my progress 

          1. Explain how the flood is formed? 

          2. Draw diagrams showing 

              I. Infrastructures affected by floods 

             II. People trying to save their lives by clinging on a security line to cross a flooded road.

          4.5. CYCLONES AND ANTICYCLONES 

          Activity 4.8: focused on cyclone

                                

                                                               Fig.4.14: illustration of a cyclone and an anticyclone.

          Describe the above figure and then after answer the following question: 

          a. Which direction does the winds moves?

          b. Relate hemispheres with these winds. 

          c. Describe the characteristics of each and their corresponding whether 

          d. Imagine that such kind of wind comes at certain area/ region, what impact does it have to the area?

          Cyclones can be the most intense storms on Earth. A cyclone is a system of winds rotating counterclockwise in the Northern Hemisphere around a low pressure center. The swirling air rises and cools, creating clouds and precipitation. Low pressure systems are also known as depressions

          These are systems of air masses forming an oval or circular shape, where pressure is low in the center and increases towards the periphery.

                                          

                                                                Fig.4.15: Illustration of the cyclone formation 

          4.5.1 Types of cyclones 

          There are two types of cyclones: Temperate cyclones or depressions and Tropical cyclones

          a. Temperate cyclones or depressions 

          They rise in the belt of westerly winds and are caused by the mixing of cold air from the Polar Regions with warm and humid air from tropical regions. They are dominantly located in temperate regions between 40- 60 degrees North and South of the equator. The temperate cyclone is also known as middle latitude (mid-latitude)cyclones e.g.  North West Europe, British Columbia, Alaska and the coasts of Chile.

          Characteristics of temperate depressions 

          1. Lowest  pressure is near the center of the depression 

          2. Highest pressure is at the periphery of the system 

          3. Air circulate around the point of low pressure 

          4. The circulation is clockwise in the southern hemisphere 

          5. And anti-clock wise in the northern hemisphere 

          6. Winds blow towards the center, which is a zone of low pressure 

          7. They develop over sea or ocean water 

          8. They affect small area which may not reach 150 km off the coast 

          9. It is a cyclic form of circulation capable of movement, growth and decay.

          Weather associated with temperate cyclones or depressions 

          • It causes rainfall which begins as light showers and progressively become heavier as the warm front passes 

          • The winds blow in easterly or southeasterly direction

          • Much of precipitation starts to fall as snow 

          • With the passage of the warm front and arrival of the warm sector, rain ceases apart from drizzles, temperatures rise and stable stratiform clouds prevail.  

          • Advection fog is common in winter and reduces visibility.

          b. Tropical cyclones/ tropical depressions 

          It is a large scale storm with heavy rainfall and winds which rotate anti-clock wise in the northern hemisphere and clockwise in the southern hemisphere around and towards a low pressure atmospheric pressure center.

          Characteristics of Tropical cyclones/ tropical depressions 

          • They are among the most destructive storms on the earth’s surface.  

          • They are given name where they occur and affect a small area. 

          • They develop on either side of equator between 10 and 20 degrees of latitude rarely between if ever between 5 degrees N and S of the equator. 

          • They originate over sea and oceans water surfaces never over land surfaces 

          • They mainly occur over the western regions of the oceans with a speed of 120km/h 

          • winds which rotate anti-clock wise in the northern hemisphere and clockwise in the southern hemisphere 

          • In northern hemisphere they are most active in August and early September 

          • While in southern hemisphere they are most active in February and March 

          4.5.2 Effect of Cyclone 

          Depending on the location in the world, cyclone takes different name depending on where they develop so their effects are varied according to   the locations.

           

                       Table 4.2: The effects, names and location of cyclone.

          4.5.3 Safety and emergency measures of cyclones.

                 

          Before Cyclone 

          • Check whether your home has been built to cyclone standards. 

          • Keep a list of emergency phone numbers on display 

          • Be sure trees around your home are well trimmed. 

          • If you are living away from the floodplain, make plans to secure your property. 

          • Check that the walls, roof and eaves of your home are secured. 

          • Ensure that there is no possibly cause injury or damage during extreme winds.

          During the cyclone 

          • Leave the center if it is possible to move. 

          • If you are unable to quit, go to your safe room. 

          • Close all interiors doors and support exterior doors. 

          • Lie on the floor under a table or another powerful object. 

          After the cyclone 

          • If you are inside the room, don’t go outside until officially advised it is safe. 

          • Don’t use electric appliances if wet. 

          • Listen to local radio for official warnings and advice. 

          • Be careful of damaged power lines, bridges, buildings, trees, etc.

          4.5.4 Anticyclone

          Activity 4.10:  Description of anticyclone 

          a. What do you understand by the term “anticyclone”? 

          b. Categorize the types of anticyclone and explain them. 

          c. Compare and contrast cyclones and anticyclones. You can even use illustrations to clarify your answers. 

          d. Ask your friend whether he/she has ever experienced this disaster in their place? Let him him/her support his/her answer.

          An anticyclone is the opposite of a cyclone. An anticyclone’s winds rotate clockwise in the Northern Hemisphere around a center of high pressure. Air comes in from above and sinks to the ground. High pressure centers generally are associated with fair weather.

                                           

                                                           Fig.4. 16: illustration of an anticyclone development

          4.5.5 Types of anticyclones

          a. Cold anticyclones: are relatively shallow features related to the surface chill(coldness) of the polar regions. 

          b. Warm anticyclones: they are characterized by cold dense air in the lower troposphere with relatively warm air above. 

          Characteristics of anticyclones 

          • Winds blow from the center to the periphery 

          • Many move slowly and remain stationary for a long time before fading out. 

          • They move northwards 

          • They affect large area( larger than cyclones). 

          • etc

          Weather associated with anticyclones

           • High pressure systems bring clear skies.

           • Winds are usually light, and blow out of the high pressure area.

           • Some few clouds giving rise to little rain and drizzle.

           • High pressure in winter gives us light clouds or clear skies, very low temperatures, calm or light winds.

           • etc.

          Difference of characteristics between a cyclone and anticyclone 

                       

                                                      Table 4.3: Difference between cyclone and anticyclone

          4.5.6 Checking my progress 

          1. Explain the cause of cyclone.

          4.6 END UNIT ASSESSMENT

          4.6.1 Multiple choices.

          What will happen when the pressure keeps on increasing and the temperature gets higher inside the ground? 

                     a. The volume decreases and heat  energy decreases. 

                     b. The volume increases and  heat energy decreases. 

                      c. The volume increases and heat  energy increases. 

                      d. The volume and heat energy remain constant. 

          2. The intensity of an earthquake is measured with a 

                       a. Barometer 

                        b. Polygraph 

                        c. Hydrometer

                        d. Seismograph

          3. Richter scale is used to measure Temperature of bodies Magnitude of earthquake Intensity of wind Intensity of earthquake

          4.6.2 Structured Questions 

          1. Copy and complete the sentence below and use your prior knowledge to fill in. Calm weather and soft winds is associated with….…. the main difference between a cyclone and an anticyclone is that cyclone has a ………… and anticyclone has …………. The winds blow from the center to the periphery. This is the …………. of anticyclone 

          2. Distinguish landslide to the erosion. 

          3. Why, during earthquakes, tall building and small building are shaken differently? Explain your answer. 

          4. Discuss the impact of floods on human activities and suggest ways of minimizing their negative impact? 

          5. Explain how floods develop. 6. Why does the earth shake when there is an earthquake?

          4.6.3 Essay type questions

          1. Explain how erosion, earthquakes and water increase the possibility of landslide to occur? 

          2. Volcanic activity is one of the causes of the earthquake. What people can do in order to prevent it? 

          3. Elaborate more on the role of water in landslide. 

          4.  Describe different ways of reducing the impact of landslides

          •                                      

                                                                         Fig.5. 1: Sign of radiation precaution.

            Key unit Competence 

            By the end of the unit, I should be able to analyze atomic nuclei and radioactivity decay 

            My goals 

            • Define atomic mass and atomic number 

            • Identify the constituents of a nucleus  

            • Explain Einstein’s mass-energy relation. 

            • Define nuclear fusion and fission. 

            • Analyze determinations of a mass of nuclei by using Bainbridge mass spectrometer. 

            • Derive the relationship between decay constant and half-life.  

            • Determine the stability of a nuclei. 

            • Describe properties of different radiations.  

            • Describe creation of artificial isotopes.  

            • Identify the application of radioactivity in life. 

            • Plot a graph of binding energy against nucleon and explain its features. 

            • Calculate the decay rate of unstable isotopes.  

            • Appreciate the safety precautions to be taken when handling radioactive materials.  

            • Appreciate that the nucleus of an atom and quantum system has discrete energy levels.

            Introductory activity: The uses of radiation

                                   

            In different places like industries, hospitals, and other sensitive places, there are different posts that caution someone about dangerous substances one may encounter if care is not taken. Among the reasons why these places bare such instruction is because of chemicals and radiations that are used in such places which may be harmful if not handled with care. 

            1. Discuss some of the safety signs you have ever seen in any hospitals or industry if you have ever visited one. 

            2. Why do you think there is a need to put those signs in such places? 

            3. It is believed that there are some of diseases that are treated using radioactive substances. Can you state some of the radiations used to treat some diseases. 

            4. There are natural men made radioactive substances. All of these are used for different purposes. What are some of negative effects of these radiations to (i) man , (ii) environment 

            5. Some countries like Iran are affected by these radiations. Imagine you were a resident of that country, what would you do to protect yourself from such effects of radioactive substances.

            5.1 ATOMIC NUCLEI-NUCLIDE 

            5.1.1 Standard representation of the atomic nucleus 

            Activity 5.1: Investigating the stable and unstable nucleus 

                                                       

                                     Fig.5. 2 The standard representation of an atom nucleus 

            Observe the Fig.5.1 above of an atom and answer to the questions that follow: 

            1. What do numbers A and Z stand for? 

            2. Describe the relation between the two numbers and their meanings. 

            3. When do we say that an atom is stable or unstable? 

            4. Explain clearly the meaning of isotopes. Give an example of isotopes you know.

            A nucleus is composed of two types of particles: protons and neutrons. The only exception is the ordinary hydrogen nucleus, which is a single proton. We describe the atomic nucleus by the number of protons and neutrons it contains, using the following quantities:

            • The atomic number or the number of protons Z in the nucleus (sometimes called the charge number). 

            • The neutron number or the number of neutrons N in the nucleus. 

            • The mass number or the number of nucleons in the nucleus, 

              

            5.1.2 Classification

            Depending on the combinations of protons and neutrons in the nucleus, nuclides can be classified in the following 3 categories: 

            a. Isotopes: These are nuclei of a particular element that contain the same number of protons but different numbers of neutrons. Most elements have a few stable isotopes and several unstable, radioactive isotopes. 


            Therefore, the chemical properties of different isotopes of an element are identical but they will often have great differences in nuclear stability. For stable isotopes of light elements, the number of protons will be almost equal to the number of neutrons. Physical properties of different isotopes of the same element are different and therefore they cannot be separated by chemical methods i.e. only physics methods such as the centrifugation method can be used to separate different isotopes of an element. 

            b. Isobars: these are nuclei which have the same mass number but     different number of protons Z or neutrons N. 


            c. Isotones: these are nuclei in which the number of neutrons is the same but the mass number A and the atomic number Z differ


            5.1.3 Units and dimensions in nuclear physics 

            The standard SI units used to measure length, mass, energy etc. are too large to use conveniently on an atomic scale. Instead appropriate units are chosen. 

            • The length: The unit of length in nuclear physics is the femtometer.
               
                                     1fm=10-15

            This unit is called Fermi in the honor of the Italian Americano physicists who did a lot of pioneering work in nuclear physics.

             • The mass: The unit used to measure the mass of an atom is called the atomic mass unit, abbreviated “amu or u” and is defined as a 1/12 the mass of an atom of carbon-12. Since mass in grams of one carbon-12 atom is its atomic mass 

            The time: the time involved in nuclear phenomena is of the order of 10-20s to million   or billion years. 

            Nuclear radius: various types of scattering experiments suggest that nuclei are roughly spherical and appear to have the same density. The data are summarized in the expression called Fermi model. 

                  

            This high density can explain why ordinary particles cannot go through the nucleus as highlighted by Rutherford experiments. The same density was only observed in neutron stars. The nuclear mass can be determined using a mass spectrometer.

            5.1.4 Working principle a mass spectrometer

            The figure below highlights the working principle of a typical mass spectrometer used to separate charges of different masses. It can be used to differentiate isotopes of a certain element.

                          

                                                                   Fig.5. 3: Bainbridge mass spectrometer

            Ions are formed in ionization chamber and accelerated towards the cathode. The beam passes through the cathode and is focused by the collimating slits S1 and S2. The beam is then passed through a velocity selector in which electric and magnetic fields are applied perpendicular to each other. The ion moves in straight line path for which both the forces acting on it are equal         

                                                                       qE=qvB                                                        (5.04) 

            The velocity of ion which passes un-deflected through the velocity selector is then given by 

                                                                        v=E/B                                                          (5.05) 

            The ions then reach the vacuum chamber where they are affected by the magnetic field (B'B' ) alone and then move in circular paths; the lighter ions having the larger path radius. If the mass of an ion is m, its charge q and its velocity v then

                                                                        qvB'=mv2/R                                                            (5.06)
                                                                        R=mv/qB'                                                                (5.07) 

            The radius of the path in the deflection chamber is directly proportional to the mass of the ion. The detection is done by photographic plate when the ions fall on it. The fig. 5.5 shows the recorded mass spectrum for a gas containing three isotopes. Note the wider line for the mass m1, showing its relatively greater abundance.

                                   

                                  Fig.5. 4: A recorded mass spectrum of a gas containing 3 isotopes

                            

                             

            5.2 MASS DEFECT AND BIDING ENERGY 

            5.2.1 Mass defect 

            Activity 5.2 Select the words in the following puzzle

            Observe the puzzle below. 

            1. Discover 8 different words related to particle Physics hidden in the puzzle below, and write them in your notebook. 

            2. Use them to formulate a meaningful sentence

                             

            3. Complete  the sentences below using the words you discovered in the puzzle 

                a. An …….is the SI unit of energy.

                b. On the atomic scale, the ………..is not the SI unit of mass. 

                c. The ………..of nucleons is greater than the mass of a nucleus. 

                d. The atom releases ………when its nucleus is formed from its constituent particles 

                e. The binding energy per nucleon gives an indication of the …………of the nucleus. 

                f. The surprising suggestion that energy and mass are equivalent was made by ……in 1905. 

            4. Discuss and explain the meaning of the following expression as used in physics           

                a.Mass defect

                c.Electronvolt  

                b.Biding energy

                d.Stable nuclides 

            The nucleus is composed of protons that are positively charged and neutrons that are neutral. The question is what is holding these particles together in this tiny space? 

            Experiences have demonstrated that the mass of a nucleus as a whole is always less than the sum of the individual masses of protons and neutrons composing that nucleus. 

                                                

            5.2.2 Einstein mass-energy relation

            In 1905, while developing his special theory of relativity, Einstein made the surprising suggestion that energy and mass are equivalent. He predicted that if the energy of a body changes by an amount of energy E, its mass changes by an amount m given by the equation

                                                                                   E=mc2                                                       (5.02) 

            Where c is the speed of light and m mass of a body Everyday examples of energy gain are much too small to produce detectable changes of mass.
                                             

              

            5.3 RADIOACTIVITY AND NUCLEAR STABILITY 

            Activity 5.3: Investigating radioactivity

            During the World War II, its final stage was marked by the atomic bombing on Nagasaki and Hiroshima towns in Japan (Fig.5.7). Observe the image and read the text provided below before answering the following questions.

                          

            In August 1945, after four years of world war, united States B-29 bomber, dropped the atomic bomb over the cities of Hiroshima on August 6th 1945. 70.000 people died in 9 seconds, and the city of Hiroshima was leveled. 3 days after as second bomb was dropped in Nagasaki, Japan with the same devastating results. The bombing killed over 129.000 people. 

            The bomb released cataclysmic load of energy. The ones who were close enough to see the blast lost their eyes. It was the last thing they ever saw. The bright light of what the blinded them. The black of their eyes, the retina, melted away. The radiation received by the body is equivalent today’s thousands of x-rays. The human body can’t absorb unlimited radiation. It falls apart because the cells are dying of radiation poisoning, if the radiation is intense enough, it looks like a urn. Layers of the skin begin to fall off. The body vital functioning began to slow down until it stops.

            1. Describe and discuss the phenomena happening on two images. 

            2. From the text, show that the atomic bomb of Hiroshima was very harmful to human body. 

            3. What are the types of radiations should be there? 

            4. Stable isotopes do not emit radiations. What is the name of materials which emit radiations? Describe them. 

            5. What are the possible main radioisotopes used to produce energy in figure above? 

            6. Which processes are used to generate such heavy energy? Describe any one of your choice

            Radioactivity is one of the dynamic properties of nuclei, in this process the system makes a transition from a high energy state to a low energy by emitting α and β-particles or γ-rays. This process happens naturally and is not affected by any external agent such as pressure, temperature or electric and magnetic fields. The α-particles are Helium nuclei and can be stopped by a piece of paper while β-particles are either electron or positron. There are high energetic particles and can pass through one cm thick aluminum sheet. γ-rays are electromagnetic radiations and can be stopped by several inches of lead.

            5.3.1 Radioactive decay of a single parent 

             If we consider the activity A of a radioactive sample which is the number of decay events in a unit time we obtain a similar expression for the radioactive decay law but expressed in terms of activity of the radioactive substance:

                    

            5.3.2 Characteristics of radioactive substances

            Radioactive substances (nuclides) present one or more of the following features 

            • The atom of radioactive elements are continually decaying into simpler atoms as a result of emitting radiation 

            • The radiations from radioactive elements produce bright flashes of light when they strike certain compounds. The compound fluoresce. For example, rays from radium cause zinc sulphide to give off light in the dark.  For this reason, a mixture of radium and zinc sulphide is used to make luminous paints. 

            • They cause ionization of air molecules. The radiations from radioactive substances knock out electrons from molecules of air. This leaves the gas molecules with a positive charge. 

            • Radiations from radioactive substances can penetrate the heavy black wrapping around a photographic film. When the film is developed, it appears black where the radiations struck the film. 

            • Radiations from radioactive substances can destroy the germinating power of plants seeds, kill bacteria or burn or kill animals and plants. Radiations can also kill cancers.

            A. Properties of emitted radiations 

            Some of their properties are summarized and shown in the table below: 

                                

            Notes:

            • A transmutation does not occur in gamma decay. When an alpha particles and beta particles are emitted, gamma rays are often emitted at the same time. When a radioisotope emits gamma rays, it become more stable because it loses energy. 

            • In both alpha and beta decay, the new element formed is called the daughter isotope.  

            • Gamma rays are like X-rays. Typical gamma rays are of a higher frequency and thus higher energy than X-rays.

            • Deviations of alpha, beta and gamma radiations due to electric field and magnetic field ( See Fig.5.9). It can be seen  unlike gamma-rays, alpha and  particles are affected by the presence of electric and magnetic fields since

                           

            These reactions occur in the core of a star and are responsible for the outpouring of energy from the star. The sum of the exact masses of the helium atom is less than the sum of exact masses of the four hydrogen atoms. This lost mass is released as energy. It is thought that the sun’s energy is produced by nuclear fusion.

            5.3.4 Radiation detectors 

            Activity 5.4: Smoke detector bellow

            Observe the diagram of a smoke detector bellow then answer to the questions that follow:

                 

            1. Name the components labeled A, B, C and D on the smoke detector above? 

            2. What is meant by smoke detector? 

            3. Describe a functioning of a smoke detector. 

            4. Design an inventory of other radiation detectors you know. Experiments in Nuclear and Particle Physics depend upon the detection of primary radiation/particle and that of the product particles if any. The detection is made possible by the interaction of nuclear radiation with atomic electrons directly or indirectly. 

            a. Classification of radiation detectors 

            There are a variety of other radioactive detectors that we may conveniently classify into two classes: Electrical and Optical detectors.

                                  

            Table5. 1 Classification of radiation detectors

            b. Working principle of an ionization chamber 

            Conventionally, the term “ionization chamber” is used exclusively to describe those detectors which collect all the charges created by direct ionization within the gas through the application of an electric field. Ionization chamber is filled with inert gases at low pressure. In the chamber there are two electrodes, namely, the cathode and the anode which are maintained at a high potential difference as shown on the figure below


             When radiation enters the chamber, it ionizes the gas atoms creating negative and positive charges. The negative charges or electrons are attracted by the anode while positive ions are attracted by the cathode; this produces the current in the outside circuit depending on the strength and the type of radiation. The current produced is quite small and dc amplified electrometers are used to measure such small currents.

            5.3.5 Checking my progress

            In the following exercises (1 to 4), choose the best answer and explain your choice 

            1. Which of the following is an electron?          

                   a. Neutrino      

                   c.  Photon

                   b. Gamma particle

                   d. Beta particle  
            2..Which of the following most accurately describe radioactive decay?

                 a. Molecules spontaneously break apart to produce energy

                 b. Atoms spontaneously break apart to produce energy beta decay, alpha decay and positron emission are all forms of radioactive decay. Energy is released because the atoms are converted to a more stable energy

                 c. Protons and neutrons spontaneously break apart to produce energy

                 d. Electrons spontaneously break apart to produce energy

            3. Which of the following is true concerning the ratio neutrons to protons in stable atoms?

                a. The ratio for all stable atoms is 1:1. 

                b. The ratio for small stable atoms is 1:1, and the ratio for large stable atom is greater than 1:1. As atomic weight goes up, the ratio of neutrons to protons for stable atoms increases up to as much as 1.8:1 ratio. 

                c. The ratio for large stable atom is 1:1, and the ratio for small stable atoms is greater than 1:1. 

                d. There is no correlation between the stability of the atom and its neutron to proton ratio.

            4. Polonium-218 undergoes one alpha decay and two beta decays to make 

                    a. Polonium-214 

                    c. Bismuth-214

                    b. Plomb-214

                    d. Plomb-210 

            5. a) Compare 

                (i) the charge possessed by alpha, beta and gamma radiations 

                 (ii) The penetrating power of these radiations

            6. a.What is meant by the term

                (i) radioactive decay?

                (ii) Half-life of a radioactive substance?

             b. A 32 g sample of radioactive material was reduced to 2 g in 96 days. What is its halflife? 

                How much of it will remain after another 96 days? 

            7. 212Be Decays to 208Th by α-emission in 34% of the disintegration and to212Ra by β-emission in 66% of the disintegration. If the total half value period is 60.5 minutes, find the decay constants for alpha and beta and the total emission. 

            8. If a radioactive material initially contains 3.0milligrams of Uranium 234U  , how much it will contain after 150,000 years? What will be its activity at the end of this time? 

            5.4 APPLICATION OF RADIOACTIVITY

            Activity 5.5: Use of nuclear energy to generate electricity

                                       

                                                         Fig.5. 12: Nuclear power plant functioning mechanism diagram. 

            Many people disagree to the use of nuclear power to generate our electricity, even though the safety record of nuclear industry is extremely good. Observe clearly the image diagram of the nuclear power plant (Fig.5.13) and answer to the questions that follow

             1. Why do you think people disagree to the use of nuclear power station?

             2. What are the main parts of the power plant station observed in Fig.5.13?

             3. Analyze and explain the steps of energy transformation from reactor to generator

             4. Write a brief explanation on the advantages and disadvantages of using nuclear energy as a source of electricity if any

             5. Use internet and your library or any other resources to find out about the other application of radionuclides in our daily life

            People would not have fear of radiations when controlled in certain manner. Radioisotopes and nuclear power process have been used and produced improvement in various sectors. These includes: consumer products, food and agriculture, industry, medicine  and scientific research, transport, water resources and the environment. The following are some descriptive examples among others.

            5.4.1 Industry 

            Different materials we use at home are manufactured in industry and made of different radioactive materials. The dosage of use of radioactive substance is thus controlled so that they are not harmful to human body. 

            Gamma radiation and beta radiation from radio-isotopes can be used to monitor the level of the material inside the container. The penetrating power of gamma rays is used to detect hidden flow in metal castings. Beta rays are used to measure the thickness of various flat objects (the mass absorbed by the object is proportional to its thickness).

            In the textile industries, irradiation with beta radiations fixes various chemicals onto cotton fibers. This produces for instance permanent press clothing. Again, radioactive materials can be used as tracers to investigate the flow of liquids in chemical factories.

                  

            If there is a sudden decrease in the amount of radiation reaching the detector, which will happen when the container is full, then this can be used as a signal to switch off the flow of substance into the container. A similar method is used to monitor the thickness of sheets of plastic, metal and paper in production.

            5.4.2 Tracer studies 

            Tracer techniques can be used to track where substances go to and where leaks may have occurred. Leaks in gas pipes or oil pipes can be detected by using this technique.

            Tracer techniques are also used in medicine to treat thyroid glands which can be underactive or over active. The activity of the thyroid gland can be monitored by the patient being injected with or asked to drink radioactive iodine. The radioactivity in the vicinity of the thyroid gland is then checked to see how much of the radioactive iodine has settled in the area around the gland.

            5.4.3 Nuclear power stations 

            Nuclear power stations control a large amounts of energy released when Uranium235undergoes nuclear fission. The energy released by this controlled chain reaction, is then used to produce electricity.

            5.4.4 Nuclear fusion

            In nuclear fusion, the nuclei of elements with a very low atomic number are fused together to make heavier elements. When this takes place, it is accompanied by a very large release of energy. In the sun, hydrogen nuclei are fusing together all the time to make helium nuclei.

                                                

                                                                     Fig.5. 14: A gamma camera assembly. 

            The photons emitted in the patients are detected by the photomultiplier tubes. A computer monitor displays the image computed from the photomultiplier signals. 

             1. Who is this person (a man or a woman)?

             2. Where is he?

             3. What does the image on the right represent?

             4. What do you think the patient is suffering from?

             5. Using the knowledge acquired in optics, what kind of light propagation observed there?

             6. Does the imaging use reflection or refraction? Why?

             7.  What should be the name of radiation being used in this imaging?

            5.4.8 Agricultural uses

            In agriculture, radionuclides are used as tracers for studying plants, insect and animals. For example, phosphorus-32 can be added to plant fertilizer.  Phosphorus is absorbed by plants and its distribution can be measured. 

            Radiation has been used in South American to detect and control the screw worm fly pest. A large number of the male of the species were exposed to gamma radiation. When the males were released back into the wild and mated with wild females, sterile eggs resulted and no new flies were born. 

            The points of photosynthesis in a leaf are revealed by growing it in air containing carbon-14. The presence of this radioactive nuclide in the leaf is the revealed by putting the leaf onto a photographic plate and letting it take its own picture.

            5.4.9 Checking my progress 

             1. Suggest different uses of radionuclides in (i) Medicine (ii) food and agriculture

             2. In our daily life, we are exposed to radiations of different types mainly in materials we use.

                 a. Make an inventory of all of the devices in your home that may have (contain) a radioactive substance

               . b. What is the origin of these radiations in the materials highlighted above?

                 c. Explain the purpose of radioactive material in the device.

                 d. Then make research to find out how the objects shown inFig.5.15 use radiation in their manufacture.

                                       

                                                                                                Fig.5. 15

            5.5 HAZARDS AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS OF WHEN HANDLING RADIATIONS 

            Activity 5.8: Investigating the safety in a place with radiations

                             
                                 Fig.5. 16: Radiation effects on human body according to the exposure. 

            The image above (Fig.5.16) shows different side effects of radiation on human body according to the exposure time taken. With reference to section 5.3 and activity 5.3, answer to the following questions:

              1. What are the dangers of radiations you may observe?

              2. Analyze measures should be taken for radiation users?

            5.5.1 Dangers of radioactivity 

                   • Both beta particles and gamma rays can pass easily in the skin and can easily destroy or even kill cells, causing illness.

                   • They can cause mutations in a cell’s DNA, which means that it cannot reproduce properly, which may lead to diseases such as cancer.

                    • Alpha particles cannot pass through the skin. However, they are extremely dangerous when they get inside your body. This can happen if you inhale radioactive material.

            5.5.2 Safety precautions when Handling Radiations 

            The precautions taken by workers who deal with radioactive materials are:

             • Wearing protective suits

             • Wearing radiation level badges

             • Checking the radiation level regularly

             • Using thick lead-walled containers for transporting radioactive materials

             • Using remote control equipment from behind thick glass or lead walls to handle radioactive material

             • They should be held with forceps and never touched with hands.

             • No eating, drinking or smoking where radioactive materials are in use

             • Wash your hands thoroughly after exposure of to any radioactive materials

             • Any cuts in the body should be covered before using radioactive sources

             • Arrange the source during experiments such that the radiation window points away from your body

             • There are ten golden rules for working safely with radioactivity.

                 

                 

                                                                            Table 5. 5
            5.6 END UNIT ASSESSMENT 

            5.6.1 Multiple choice questions

            5.6.1 Multiple choice questions 

            Instructions: Write number 1 to 5 in your notebook. Beside each number, write the letter corresponding to the best choice 

             1. Radionuclides 

                a. Are those nuclides having more neutrons than protons

                b. May emit X-rays.

                c. Decay exponentially

                d. May be produced in a cyclotron

             2. Concerning Compton Effect:

                a. There is interaction between a photon and a free electron.

                b. The larger the angle through which the photon is scatted, the more energy it loses. 

                c. The wavelength change produced depends upon the scattering material.

                d. High energy radiation is scatted more than lower energy radiations.

                e. The amount of scattering that occurs depends on the electron density of the scattering material. 

            3. Classical physics offered a satisfactory explanation for 

                a. The diffraction of electrons by crystals 

                b. The deflection of charged particles in an electric 

                c. The intensity spectrum of black body radiation

                d. The photoelectric effect e. Matter waves 

            4. When investigating β decay, the neutrino was postulated to explain 

                a. Conservation of the number of nucleons

                b. Counteracting the ionizing effect of radiation

                c. Conservation of energy and momentum

                d. The production of antiparticles 

                e. The energy to carry away the β particles.

            5. Gamma radiations differ from α and β emissions in that 

               a. It consist in photons rather than particles having nonzero rest mass

               b. It has almost no penetrating ability 

               c. Energy is not conserved in the nuclear decays producing it 

               d. Momentum is not conserved in the nuclear decays producing it 

               e. It is not produced in the nucleus

            6. The process represented by the nuclear equation  is     

            a. Annihilation   c. β decay         e. γ decay               b. α decay   d. pair production

            7. Write number (i) to (iii) in your note book. Indicate beside each number whether the corresponding statement is true (T) or false (F). If it is false, write a corrected version. 

              I. An alpha particle is also called a hydrogen nucleus

              II. The neutrino was suggested to resolve the problem of conserving energy and momentum in β decay.

              III. The amount of energy released in a particular α or β decay is found by determining the mass difference between the products and the parent. A mass-energy equivalence calculation then gives the energy.

              IV. The average biding energy per nucleon decreases with the increasing atomic mass number

            8. A radioactive source emits radiations alpha, beta and gamma a shown below:

                                 

                                                  Fig.5. 17 Absorption of radiation 

                       The main radiation(s) in the beam at X and Y are

                      
                  

                    

                     

                      

                    

                   

                   

                    

                   

                        

            •                    

              Key unit Competence 

              By the end of this unit, I should be able to differentiate optical fiber transmission and other transmitting systems.

              My goals 

              • Explain the functioning of optical fiber 

              • Explain attenuation in optical fiber 

              • Identify and explain the components of optical fiber system 

              • Solve problem related to attenuation giving answers in decibels 

              • Describe telecommunication system 

              • Describe functions of amplifiers in optical fiber transmission 

              • Distinguish optical fiber and other telecommunication systems

              Introductory activity

              Investigating the use of optical fiber in RWANDA 

              Rwanda plans to connect three million people to the World Wide Web as part of the “Internet for All” project. The project is a World Economic Forum initiative that aims to connect 25 million new Internet users in Kenya, Uganda, South Sudan and Rwanda by 2019.

              This goal will partly be achieved by addressing the challenges of affordability, digital skills gap, lack of local content and limited infrastructure, which are hindering growth in the use of Internet across the region (http://www. threastafrican.co.ke, 2017)

                                    

                                                            Fig.6. 1: The installation and use of optical fiber in Rwanda

              Following to the information provided above, answer to the following questions: 

              1. Observe the images A, B and C (Fig.6.1) and describe what you can see. 

              2. What are the uses of optical fiber in transmission of signals? 

              3. How do optical fibers function? In which field? 

              4. Discuss other applications of optical fibers.

              6.1 PRINCIPLES OF OPERATIONS OF OPTICAL FIBERS

              Activity 6.1: Total internal reflection in optical fiber.

                                 

                                             Fig.6. 2: The total internal reflection in the optical fiber 

              Given the illustration above (Fig.6.2), one can see different rays inside the optical fiber. As the angle of incidence in the core increases, as the angle of refraction increases more until it becomes right angle at a certain value of incidence angle called critical angle. 

              Discuss: 

                1. What do you understand by the term critical angle? 

                2. What causes the total internal reflection?

                3. Discuss different fields where total internal reflection can be useful.

              6.1.1 Definition 

              An optical fiber (fiber optics) is a medium for carrying information from one point to another in the form of light. It uses a flexible, transparent fiber made by drawing glass or plastic and has a diameter slightly thicker than that of a human hair. They are arranged in bundles called optical cables and can be used to transmit signals over long distances. 

              Fiber optics continues to be used in more and more applications due to its inherent advantages over copper conductors.

                

              An optical fiber is made of 3 concentric layers: 

              • Core: This central region of the optical fiber is made of silica or doped silica. It is the light transmitting region of the fiber.  

              • Cladding: This is the first layer around the core. It is also made of silica, but not with the same composition as the core. This creates an optical waveguide which confines the light in the core by total internal reflection at the core cladding interface.  

              • Coating: The coating is the first non-optical layer around the cladding. The coating typically consists of one or more layers of polymer that protect the silica structure against physical or environmental damage. 

                                      

              The light is guided down the core of the fiber by the optical cladding which has a lower refractive index. Remember that the refractive index is the ratio of the velocity of light in a vacuum to its velocity in a specified medium. Then light is trapped in the core through total internal reflection. The other outer parts that are the strength member and the outer jacket, serve as protectors.

              Connecting two optical fibers is done by fusion splicing or mechanical splicing. It requires special skills and interconnection technology due to the microscopic precision required to align the fiber cores. 

              6.1.2 Refractive index of light 

              When light falls at the interface (boundary) of two media, it is partially reflected and partially refracted. As it passes from one medium to another it changes its direction

                                                    

              The change in its direction is associated with the change in velocity. The ratio of the speed of light in the vacuum c (or air) and that of light in a certain medium v is called the absolute refractive index n.

                                                                                            n =  c/v                                                (6.01)

              6.1.3 Total internal reflection 

              When light passes from one a medium of higher index of refraction into a medium of lower refractive index the light bends away from the normal as indicated on Fig.6.6. A weak internally reflected ray is also formed and its intensity increases as the incident angle increases. 

              6.1.3 Total internal reflection

                                     

              Increasing the angle of incidence increases the angle of refraction and at a particular incidence, the angle of refraction reaches the 90°. This particular incident angle is called the critical angle θc . As the incident angle exceeds the critical angle, the incident beam reflects on the interface between the 2 media and return in the first medium. This effect is called total internal reflection.

              For any two media, using Snell’s law the critical angle is calculated using the expression  

                                                                  sin θc=n2/n1                                                            (6.02)

              where n1 and n2 are respectively the refractive indices of the first and second media.  θc increases when approaches  n1 

              The outer layer of glass, which is also known as the optical cladding, does not carry light but is essential to maintain the critical angle of the inner glass. The underlying main physics concept behind the functioning of an optical fiber is a phenomenon known as total internal reflection

              Application: 

              An optical fiber is basically made of 2 types of glass put together in a concentric arrangement so the middle is hollow. The inner circle of glass also called the Core consists of a glass of higher refractive index than the outside layer as indicated on fig.6.4.

              Any light entering the fiber will meet the cladding at an angle greater than the critical angle. If light meets the inner surface of the cladding or the core - cladding interface at greater than or equal to critical angle then total internal reflection (TIR) occurs. So all the energy in the ray of light is reflected back into the core and none escapes into the cladding. The ray then crosses to the other side of the core and, because the fiber is more or less straight, the ray will meet the cladding on the other side at an angle which again causes the total internal reflection. The ray is then reflected back across the core again and again until it reaches the end of the optical fiber. 

                                         

              Maximum angle of incidence 

              The maximum angle of incidence in air for which all the light is total reflected at the core-cladding is given by:
                                                                   (6.03)

                                  

                                   

                                   

                                  

              6.1.4 Checking my progress 

              1. Operation of optical fiber is based on: 

                  a. Total internal reflection 

                  b. Total internal refraction 

                  c. Snell’s law 

                 d. Einstein’s theory of reality

                 e. None of the above 

              2. When a beam of light passes through an optical fiber 

                 a. Rays are continually reflected at the outside(cladding) of the fiber 

                 b. Some of the rays are refracted from the core to the cladding 

                 c. The bright beam coming out of the fiber is due to the high refractive index of the core 

                 d. The bright beam coming out of the fiber is due to the total internal reflection at the core-cladding interface

                 e. All the rays of light entering the fiber are totally reflected even at very small angles of incidence 

              3. A laser is used for sending a signal along a mono mode fiber because 

                a. The light produced is faster than from any other source of light  

                b. The laser has a very narrow band of wavelengths

                c. The core has a low refractive index to laser light 

                d. The signal is clearer if the cladding has a high refractive index 

                e. The electrical signal can be transferred quickly using a laser 

              4. Given  that  the  refractive  indices  of  air  and  water  are  1  and  1,33,  respectively, find  the  critical angle. 

              5. The frequency of a ray of light is 6.0x1014 Hz and the speed of light in air is 3x108 m/s. the refractive index of the glass is 1.5. 

                a. Explain the meaning of refracting index 

                b. A ray of light has an angle of incidence of 30° on a block of quartz and an angle of refraction of 20°. What is the index of refraction of the quartz? 

              6. A beam of light passes from water into polyethylene (n = 1.5). If θi = 57.5°, 

                  what is the angle of refraction?

              7.
               a. What is the critical angle when light is going from a diamond (n= 2.42) to air?

               b. Using the answer to (a), what happens when:

                I. The angle of incidence is less than that angle?

                II. The angle of incidence is more than that angle?

              6.2 TYPES OF OPTICAL FIBERS 

              Activity 6.2:  Investigating the types of optical fiber. 

              Use search internet and discuss different types of optical fiber. Then, differentiate them according to their respective uses. There are three main types of Optical Fibers: Monomode (or single mode), Multimode and special purpose optical fibers.

              6.2.1 Monomode fibers 

              Those are Fibers that support a single mode and are called single-mode fibers (SMF). Single-mode fibers are used for most communication links longer than 1 000 m.
                    

              In the monomode fiber, the core is only about 8 μm in diameter, and only the straight through transmission path is possible, i.e. one mode. This type, although difficulty and expensive to make, is being used increasingly. For short distances and low bitrates, multimode fibers are quite satisfactory. 

              Following the emergence of single-mode fibers as a viable communication medium in 1983,   they   quickly   became   the   dominant   and   the   most   widely   used   fiber   type   within Telecommunications. Major reasons for this situation are as follows: 

              1. They exhibit the greatest transmission bandwidths and the lowest losses of the fiber transmission media. 

              2. They   have   a   superior   transmission   quality   over   other   fiber   types   because   of   the absence of modal noise. 

              3. They offer a substantial upgrade capability (i.e. future proofing) for future wide- bandwidth services using either faster optical transmitters or receivers or advanced transmission techniques (e.g. coherent technology,). 

              4. They are compatible with the developing integrated optics technology. 

              5. The above reasons 1 to 4 provide confidence that the installation of single mode fiber will provide a transmission medium which will have adequate performance such that it will not require replacement over its anticipated lifetime of more than 20 years. (John, 2009)

              6.2.2 Multimode fibers 

              In multimode fiber, light travels through the fiber following different light paths called “modes” as indicated on Fig.6.9. Those are fibers that support many propagation paths. A multi-mode optical fiber has a larger core of about 50 μm, allowing less precise, cheaper transmitters and receivers to connect to it as well as cheaper connectors.

                                  

              The propagation of light through a multimode optical fiber is shown on Fg. 6.9. However, a multi-mode fiber introduces multimode distortion, which often limits the bandwidth and length of the link. Furthermore, because of its higher dopant content, multi-mode fibers are usually expensive and exhibit higher attenuation. 

              There are two types of multi-mode optical fibers: multimode step-index and multimode graded index (see Fig.6.10)

              • In step-index multimode type, 

              the core has the relatively large diameter of 50μm and the refractive index changes suddenly at the cladding. The wide core allows the infrared to travel by several paths or modes. Paths that cross the core more often are longer, and signals in those modes take longer to travel along the fiber. Arrival times at the receiver are therefore different for
              radiation of the same pulse, 30ns km-1, being a typical difference. The pulse is said to suffer dispersion, 

              it means that it is spread out. 

              • In the graded index multimode type, the refractive index of the glass varies continuously from a higher value at the center of the fiber to a low value at the outside, so making the boundary between core and the cladding indistinct. Radiation following a longer path, travel faster on average, since the speed of light is inversely proportional to the refractive index. The arrival times for different modes are the about the same (to within 1ns km-1) and all arrive more or less together at the receiving end. Dispersion is thereby much reduced.

              6.2.3 Special-purpose optical fiber 

              Some special-purpose optical fiber is constructed with a non-cylindrical core and/or cladding layer, usually with an elliptical or rectangular cross-section. These include:  polarization-maintaining fiber  and fiber designed to suppress whispering gallery mode propagation.  

              Polarization-maintaining fiber is a unique type of fiber that is commonly used in fiber optic sensors due to its ability to maintain the polarization of the light inserted into it. 

              Photonic-crystal fiber is made with a regular pattern of index variation. It is often in the form of cylindrical holes that run along the length of the fiber. Such fiber uses diffraction effects in addition to total internal reflection, to confine light to the fiber’s core.

              6.2.4 Checking my progress

              1. Fiber optics is best known for its application in long-distance telecommunications. 

                 a.  True

                 b.  False 

              2. Choose the basic types of optical fiber: 

                 a.  Single-mode

                 b.  X-mode

                 c.  Microwave-mode

                 d.  Graded-index mode      

                 e.  Multi-mode 

                 f.  A and C      

                g.  B and D 

                h.  A and E 

              3. Single-mode fiber has the advantage of greater bandwidth capability.  It has the    disadvantage of: 

                a.  Being harder to bend 

                b.  Smaller mechanical tolerances in connectors and splices 

                c.  Being difficult to couple light into 

                d.  B and C 

                e.  None of the above

              4. Describe with the aid of simple ray diagrams: 

                a.  The multimode step index fiber; 

                b.  The single-mode step index fiber. 

                c.  Compare the advantages and disadvantages of these two types of fiber for use as an optical channel. 

              6.3 Mechanism of attenuation 

              Activity 6.3: Light transmission analysis in optical fiber

                              

                                             Fig.6. 11 The images to show the attenuation in optical fiber

              Observe the image clearly, and answer to the following questions: 

              1. Does all the light from the source getting to the destination? 

              2. What do you think is causing the loss in light transmission? 

              3. What can be done to minimize that loss in the optical fibers above?

              Attenuation in fiber optics, also known as transmission loss, is the reduction in intensity of the light beam (or signal) as it travels through the transmission medium. Over a set distance, fiber optic with a lower attenuation will allow more power to reach its receiver than a fiber with higher attenuation.        

              Attenuation can be caused by several factors both extrinsic and intrinsic: 

              Intrinsic attenuation is due to something inherent to the fiber such as impurities in the glass during manufacturing. The interaction of such impurities with light results in the scattering of light or its absorption. 

              Extrinsic attenuation can be caused by macro bending and microlending. A bent imposed on an optical fiber produce a strain in that region of the fiber and affects its refractive index and the critical angle of the light ray in that area. Macrobending that is a large-scale bent and microbending which is a smallscale bent and very localized are external causes that result in the reduction of optical power. 

              Attenuation coefficients in fiber optics usually are expressed decibels per kilometer (dB/km) through the medium due to the relatively high quality of transparency of modern optical transmission media.  It is observed that the attenuation is a function

              6.3.1 Light scattering and absorption 

              In the light transmission of signals through optical fibers, attenuation occurs due to light scattering and absorption of specific wavelengths, in a manner similar to that responsible for the appearance of color. 

              a.  Light scattering 

              Scattering losses

                 

              The propagation of light through the core of an optical fiber is based on total internal reflection of the light wave. Rough and irregular surfaces, even at the molecular level, can cause light rays to be reflected in random directions as it is illustrated on Fig.6.12. This is called diffuse reflection or scattering, and it is typically characterized by wide variety of reflection angles.


              Light scattering depends on the wavelength of the light being scattered. Thus, limits to spatial scales of visibility arise, depending on the frequency of the incident lightwave and the physical dimension (or spatial scale) of the scattering center, which is typically in the form of some specific micro-structural feature. Since visible light has a wavelength of the order of one micrometer (one millionth of a meter) scattering centers will have dimensions on a similar spatial scale. Thus, attenuation results from the incoherent scattering of light at internal surfaces and interfaces.

              b. Light absorption 

              Material absorption is a loss mechanism related to the material composition and fiber fabrication process. This results in the dissipation of some transmitted optical power as heat in the waveguide. Absorption is classified into two basic categories: Intrinsic and extrinsic absorptions. (John, 2009)

              • Intrinsic absorption: is caused by basic fiber material properties. If an optical fiber is absolutely pure, with no imperfections or impurities, ten all absorption will be intrinsic. Intrinsic absorption in the ultraviolet region is caused bands. Intrinsic absorption occurs when a light particle (photon) interacts with an electron and excites it to a higher energy level.

              6.3.2 Measures to avoid Attenuation 

              The transmission distance of a fiber-optic communication system has traditionally been limited by fiber attenuation and by fiber distortion. 

              • Repeaters: Repeaters convert the signal into an electrical signal, and then use a transmitter to send the signal again at a higher intensity than was received, thus counteracting the loss incurred in the previous segment. They mostly used to be installed about once every 20 km.

              • Regenerators: Optical fibers link, in common with any line communication system, have a requirement for both jointing and termination of the transmission medium. When a communications link must span at a larger distance than existing fiber-optic technology is capable of, the signal must be regenerated at intermediate points in the link by optical communications repeaters called regenerators.An optical regenerator consists of optical fibers with special coating (doping). 

              The doped portion is pumped with a laser. When the degraded signal comes into the doped coating, the energy from the laser allows the doped molecules to become lasers themselves. The doped molecules then emit a new strong light signal with the same characteristics as the incoming weak signal. Basically, the regenerator is a laser amplifier for the incoming signal. 

              • Optical Amplifiers: Another approach is to use an optical amplifier which amplifies the optical signal directly without having to convert the signal into the electrical domain. It is made by doping a length of fiber with the rareearth mineral erbium and pumping it with light from a laser with a shorter wavelength than the communications signal (typically 980 nm). Amplifiers have largely replaced repeaters in new installations.

              6.3.3 Checking my progress 

                1. True or False: One of the reasons fiber optics hasn’t been used in more areas has been the improvement in copper cable such as twisted pair.

                2. True or False: With current long-distance fiber optic systems using wavelength-division multiplexing, the use of fiber amplifiers has become almost mandatory.

               3. Fiber optics has extraordinary opportunities for future applications because of its immense bandwidth.

                    a. True 

                    b. False 

               4. a. What do we mean by attenuation in optical fibers? 

                   b. State two ways in which energy is lost in optical fibers. 

                   c. If a fiber loses 5% of its signal strength per kilometer, how much of its strength would be left after 20 km?

              6.4 OPTICAL TRANSMITTER AND OPTICAL RECEIVER 

              Activity 6.4: Investigating the signal sources and signal receiver for optic fibers

              With the basic information you know about the functioning process of optical fiber, answer to the following questions. 

              1. Where does the light that is transmitted into the optical fiber core medium come from? 

              2. What are the type compositions of the light signal propagating into optical fiber?

              3. Discuss and explain the function principle of signal generators and signal receivers of light from optical fibers.

              The process of communicating using fier-optics involves the following basic steps: 

               1. Creating the optical signal involving the use of a transmitter,  usually from an electrical signal.

               2. Relaying the signal along the fier, ensuring that the signal does not becometoo distorted or weak.

               3. Receiving the optical signal.

               4. Converting it into an electrical signal

                                     

              6.4.1 Transmitters 

              The most commonly used optical transmitters are semiconductor devices such as  light-emitting diodes  (LEDs) and  laser diodes. The difference between LEDs and laser diodes is that LEDs produce incoherent light, while laser diodes produce coherent light. 

              For use in optical communications, semiconductor optical transmitters must be designed to be compact, efficient and reliable, while operating in an optimal wavelength range and directly modulated at high frequencies (see Fig.6.13: Transmitter block). 

              In its simplest form, a LED is a forward-biased  p-n junction, emitting light through spontaneous emission, a phenomenon referred to as electroluminescence. The emitted light is incoherent with a relatively wide spectral width of 30–60 nm. LED light transmission is also inefficient, with only about 1% of input power, or about 100 microwatts, eventually converted into launched power which has been coupled into the optical fiber. However, due to their relatively simple design, LEDs are very useful for low cost applications. 

              6.4.2 The Optical Receivers 

              The main component of an optical receiver is a photodetector (photodiode) which converts the infrared light signals into the corresponding electrical signals by using photoelectric effect before they are processed by the decoder for conversion back into information. The primary photo detectors for telecommunications are made from Indium gallium arsenide (see Fig.6.13). The photodetector is typically a semiconductor-based photodiode. Several types of photodiodes include p-n photodiodes, p-i-n photodiodes, and avalanche photodiodes. Metal-semiconductor-metal (MSM) photodetectors are also used due to their suitability for circuit integration in regenerators and wavelength-division multiplexers.

              1. Circle the three basic components in a fiber optic communications system. 

                  a. Telescope 

                  b. Transmitter 

                  c. Receiver

                  d. Surveillance satellites                                         

                  e.  Maser fiber                                      

                  f.  Optical fiber                                      

                  G. Alternator 

              2. Information (data) is transmitted over optical fiber by means of: 

               a. Light  

               b. Radio waves

               c. Cosmic rays           

               d. Acoustic waves  

               e.  None of the above 

              3. Connectors and splices add light loss to a system or link. 

               a.  True 

               b.  False 

              4. Do fibers have losses?

              6.5. USES OF OPTICAL FIBERS 

              Activity 6.5: Applications of fiber optics in telecommunication and in medicine 

              Use the internet or the library to investigate the applications of optical fiber in medicine and telecommunication systems.

              6.5.1. Telecommunications Industry 

              Optical fibers offer huge communication capacity. A single fiber can carry the conversations of every man, woman and child on the face of this planet, at the same time, twice over. The latest generations of optical transmission systems are beginning to exploit a significant part of this huge capacity, to satisfy the rapidly growing demand for data communications and the Internet.

              The main advantages of using optical fibers in the communications industry are: 

              • A much greater amount of information can be carried on an optical fiber compared to a copper cable. 

              • In all cables some of the energy is lost as the signal goes along the cable. The signal then needs to be boosted using regenerators. For copper cable systems these are required every 2 to 3km but with optical fiber systems they are only needed every 50km.

              • Unlike copper cables, optical fibers do not experience any electrical interference.  Neither will they cause sparks so they can be used in explosive environments such as oil refineries or gas pumping stations.

              • For equal capacity, optical fibers are cheaper and thinner than copper cables and that makes them easier to install and maintain.

              6.5.2 Medicine Industry 

              The advent of practicable optical fibers has seen the development of much medical technology. Optical fibers have paved the way for a whole new field of surgery, called laproscopic surgery (or more commonly, keyhole surgery), which is usually used for operations in the stomach area such as appendectomies. Keyhole surgery usually makes use of two or three bundles of optical fibers. A “bundle” can contain thousands of individual fibers”. The surgeon makes a number of small incisions in the target area and the area can then be filled with air to provide more room.

              One bundle of optical fibers can be used to illuminate the chosen area, and another bundle can be used to bring information back to the surgeon. Moreover, this can be coupled with laser surgery, by using an optical fiber to carry the laser beam to the relevant spot, which would then be able to be used to cut the tissue or affect it in some other way.

              6.5.3 Checking my progress

              The basic unit of digital modulation is:

               a. Zero

               b. One   

               d.     A and B  

               e.     None of the above

              6.6 ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF OPTICAL FIBERS

              Activity 6.6Advantages and disadvantages of optical fibers 

              Use search internet or your library to investigate the advantages and disadvantages of fiber optics. Although there are many benefits to using optical fibers, there are also some disadvantages. Both are discussed below:

              6.6.1 Advantages 

              • Capacity: Optical fibers carry signals with much less energy loss than copper cable and with a much higher bandwidth. This means that fibers can carry more channels of information over longer distances and with fewer repeaters required.

              • Size and weight: Optical fiber cables are much lighter and thinner than copper cables with the same bandwidth. This means that much less space is required in underground cabling ducts. Also they are easier for installation engineers to handle. 

              Security: Optical fibers are much more difficult to tap information from undetected; a great advantage for banks and security installations. They are immune to electromagnetic interference from radio signals, car ignition systems, lightning etc. They can be routed safely through explosive or flammable atmospheres, for example, in the petrochemical industries or munitions sites, without any risk of ignition. 

              Running costs: The main consideration in choosing fiber when installing domestic cable TV networks is the electric bill. Although copper coaxial cable can handle the bandwidth   requirement over the short distances of a housing scheme, a copper system consumes far more electrical power than fiber, simply to carry the signals.

              6.6.2 Disadvantages

               • Price: In spite of the fact that the raw material for making optical fibers, sand, is abundant and cheap, optical fibers are still more expensive per metre than copper. Having said this, one fiber can carry many more signals than a single copper cable and the large transmission distances mean that fewer expensive repeaters are required. 

              Special skills: Optical fibers cannot be joined together (spliced) as an easily as copper cable and requires additional training of personnel and expensive precision splicing and measurement equipment.

              6.6.3 Checking my progress 

              1. List two advantages of using optical fiber. __________________________ 

              2. The replacement of copper wiring harnesses with fiber optic cabling will increase the weight of an aircraft.  

                     1. True 

                     2. False

              6.7. END UNIT ASSESSMENT

              1. a. An endoscope uses coherent and non−coherent fiber bundle 

              I. State the use of the coherent bundle and describe its arrangement of fibers.

              II. State the use of the non−coherent bundle and describe its arrangement of fibers.  

               b. Each fiber has a core surrounded by cladding.  Calculate the critical angle at the core−cladding interface. 

              Refractive index of core = 1.52

              Refractive index of cladding = 1. 

              2. a. Fig.6.9 shows a ray of light travelling through an individual fiber consisting of cladding and a core. One part has a refractive index of 1.485 and the other has a refractive index of 1.511.   

                                           

                                                          Fig.6. 9: Light transmission in optical fiber.

              I. State which part of the fiber has the higher refractive index and explain why.

              II. (ii)     Calculate the critical angle for this fiber.  

              (b) The figure below shows the cross-section through a clad optical fiber which has a core of refractive index 1.50. 

                                          

                                                                                                                Fig.6. 10 

              Complete the graph below to show how the refractive index changes with the radial distance along the line ABCD in the figure above.

                         
                                               Fig.6. 11: Axes for the half life decay curve

              1.

                  a. What do we mean by attenuation in optical fibers? 

                  b. State two ways in which energy is lost along the length of an optical fiber.

                  c. If a fiber loses 5% signal strength per km, how much strength would be left after 20 km? 

              2. Estimate the length of time it would take a fiber optic system to carry a signal from the UK to the USA under the Atlantic. (Take c = 2 x 108 m/s in the cable. Estimate the length of the cable under the sea.


                a. Estimate the length of time it would take a microwave signal to travel from the UK to the USA a satellite Enk. (Geosynchronous satellites orbit at a height of about 36 000 Ian above the Earth’s surface. 

                b. Which would give less delay in a telephone conversation?


              • Key unit Competence 

                By the end of the unit I should be able to construct and analyze block diagram of telecommunication systems. 

                My goals 

                • Identify parts of a block diagram of telecommunication system.  

                • Differentiate oscillator, modulator and amplifier.  

                • Outline the function of a microphone and antenna.  

                • Describe terms applied in telecommunication systems  

                • Construct, analyse and judge block diagrams of a telecommunication system.  

                • Realise that parts of a telecommunication system are dependent 

                Introductory activity 

                Investigating the function of wireless microphone 

                Materials: 

                • Wireless microphone set 

                • Amplifier and mixer  

                • Connecting wires 

                • Speaker 

                Procedure: Connect the full sound system such that the signal will be transmitted to the speakers using wireless microphone. 

                Questions: 

                1. How your voice is getting to the speakers? 

                2. Where else this system is used? 

                3. What are advantages and disadvantages of communication?

                7.1 OPERATING PRINCIPLE OF MICROPHONE 

                Activity 7.1: Investigating the function of a microphone

                Take the case of two people talking on telephone (see Fig.7.1). Observe the image above and answer to the following questions:

                                                       

                                                               Fig.7. 1 People talking on telephone

                1. Discuss the functioning process of a telephone. 

                2. Differentiate the functions of a microphone from that of a speaker.

                Telecommunication in real life is the transmission of signals and other types of data of any nature by wire, radio, optical or other electromagnetic systems of communication. Telecommunication occurs when the exchange of information between communicating participants includes the use of signs or other technologically based materials such as telephone, TV set, radio receiver, radio emitter, computer, and so on. All can be done either mechanically, electrically or electronically.

                The use of microphones began with the telephone in the nineteenth century. The requirements were basically those of speech intelligibility, and the carbon microphone, developed early in that art, is still used in telephones today. 

                Particles of carbon are alternately compressed and relaxed by the diaphragm under the influence of sound pressure, and the resulting alternation of resistance modulates the current proportionally to the change in resistance. Carbon microphones are noisy; they have limited dynamic range and produce high levels of distortion. 

                However, none of these defects is really serious in its application to telephony.

                Operating principle of microphones 

                A microphone converts sound vibrations into electrical entity. Basically a microphone has a diaphragm which moves when sound pressure pushes it. This movement can be converted into proportional voltage using several possible transducers.

                                      

                A transducer is a device which receives electrical, mechanical or acoustic waves from one medium and converts them into related waves for a similar or different medium. Thus, it can be said that a microphone is a transducer that converts acoustical sound energy into electrical energy. Its basic function is therefore to convert sound energy into electrical audio signals which can be used for further processing. Microphones are classified based on construction and directivity.

                7.2 CHANNELS OF SIGNAL TRANSMISSION 

                Activity 7.2: Investigating signal transmission

                Basing on the activity 7.1, explain and discuss how the voices are transmitted from our mouth to telephone and then to the receiver’s telephone

                An audio frequency (acronym: AF) or audible frequency is characterized as a periodicvibration whose frequency is audible to the average human. The SI unit of frequency is the hertz (Hz). It is the property of sound that most determines pitch. 

                The generally accepted standard range of audible frequencies is 20Hz to 20 kHz, although the range of frequencies that individuals hear is greatly influenced by environmental factors. Frequencies below 20 Hz are generally felt rather than heard, assuming the amplitude of the vibration is great enough. Frequencies above 20 kHz can sometimes be sensed by young people. High frequencies are the first to be affected by hearing loss due to age and/or prolonged exposure to very loud noises. 

                Modulation is the process of superimpose to a low frequency signal (original signal) a high frequency signal (carrier signal) for transmission. The resulting signal is a modulated or radio signal.

                7.2.1 Amplitude modulation (AM) 

                It is a type of modulation, where the amplitude of the carrier wave is changed in accordance with the intensity of the signal. However, the frequency and the phase shift of the modulated wave remains the same. 

                                

                Note that the amplitudes of both positive and negative half-cycles of carrier wave are changed in accordance with the signal.  For instance, when the signal is increasing in the positive sense, the amplitude of carrier wave also increases. On the other hand, during negative half-cycle of the signal, the amplitude of carrier wave decreases.  Amplitude modulation is done by an electronic circuit called modulator.

                7.2.2 Frequency modulation (FM). 

                It is a type of modulation, where the frequency of the carrier wave is changed in accordance with the intensity of signal.  The amplitude and the phase shift of the modulated wave remain the same. The frequency variations of carrier wave depend upon the instantaneous amplitude of the original signals. The carrier frequency increases and decreases respectively to its positive and negative peak values as the voltage of the original signal seem to approach its peak values. 

                                        

                7.2.3 Short wave (SW) 

                A short wave is any wave whose frequency ranges between 300 kHz and 3 MHz. In transmission, these waves are used for very long distance communication as their bands can be reflected or refracted from the ionosphereby an electrically charged layer with atoms in the atmosphere.

                                                       

                The short waves directed at an angle into the sky can be reflected back to Earth at great distances, beyond the horizon. This called sky wave or skip propagation. These waves are used for radio broadcasting of voice and music to shortwave listeners over very large areas; sometimes entire continents or beyond. They are also used for military communication, diplomatic communication, and two-way international communication by amateur radios enthusiasts for hobby.

                7.2.4 Medium wave (MW)

                Medium wave (MW) is the part of the medium frequency (MF) radio band used mainly for AM radio broadcasting. It is the original radio broadcasting band, in use since the early 1920’s.  It istypically used by stations serving a local or regional audience. At night, medium wave signals are no longer absorbed by the lower levels of the ionosphere, and can often be heard hundreds or even thousands of miles away. 

                              

                For Europe the MW band ranges from 526.5 kHz to 1606.5 kHz, using channels spaced every 9 kHz, and in North America an extended MW broadcast band ranges from 525 kHz to 1705 kHz, using 10 kHz spaced channels.

                7.2.5 Checking my progress 

                1. In transmission, the range of short waves are between 

                    a. Radio wave and microwave 

                    b. X-rays and gamma rays 

                    c. Infrared and visible light d. Infrared and ultraviolet
                2. Where Short waves can be used? 

                3. Explain what is meant by Medium wave (MW) 

                4. Distinguish between Amplitude modulation and frequency modulation

                7.3 CARRIER WAVE AND MODULATOR 

                7.3.1 Concept of carrier wave modulation 

                Activity 7.3: Modulation techniques

                              

                                                                      Fig.7. 6: Radio wave transmission 

                Observe the mechanism above (Fig.7.6) and answer to the following questions 

                1. Analyze the provided figure and explain the transmission process used there. 

                2. What are applications of such a system shown in the above figure? 

                Modulation  is the process of varying the characteristics of carrier signal with the modulating signal or modulation is defined as the superimposition of low frequency baseband signal (modulating signal) over high frequency carrier signal by varying different parameters of the carrier signals (see Fig.7.6). Based on the types of parameters that are varied in proportion to the baseband (low frequency) signal, modulation is of different types.

                In digital modulation, the message signal is converted from analog into digital.  In digital modulation techniques, the analog carrier signal is modulated by discrete signal. The carrier wave is switched on and off to create pulses such that signal is modulated.  

                Low frequency signal (Baseband) communication is not commonly used for distance communication. Low frequency baseband signals, having low energy, if transmitted directly will get distorted. So baseband signal must be modulated with high frequency signal to increase the range of transmission. 

                7.3.2 Checking my progress 

                1. In………transmission, the carrier signal modulated so that its amplitude varies with the changing amplitudes of the modulating signal 

                     a. AM          

                      b.  PM

                      c.   FM    

                      d.   None of the above? 

                2. Distinguish between analog signal and digital signal? 

                3. What is meant by carrier wave in telecommunication? 

                4. What is the application of a carrier wave in a telecommunication system?

                7.4 OSCIALLATOR, RADIO FREQUENCY AMPLIFIER AND POWER AMPLIFIER 

                Activity 7.4: Investigating what is an oscillator and a radio frequency amplifier

                Make an intensive research on the properties and function of an oscillator and radio frequency amplifier. According to your findings, answer to the following questions:

                 1. Explain a radio frequency amplifier and state its importance in telecommunication?

                 2. What do you understand by an oscillator in telecommunication system?

                      Discus its importance?

                 3. Describe other uses of oscillator and radio frequency amplifier.

                7.4.1 Oscillator 

                Oscillators are electronic circuits that produce a periodic waveform on its output with only the DC supply voltage as an input. The output voltage can be either sinusoidal or non-sinusoidal, depending on the type of oscillator, thus, the outputs signals can be sine waves, square waves, triangular waves, and saw tooth waves.

                                     

                The oscillation in any circuit will depend on the following properties:

                 • Amplification of the used amplifier

                 • A frequency determining device (receiver/ transmitter)

                  • Signal regeneration (Positive feedback)

                Factors which may fluctuate the operating frequency

                 • Long time of operation

                 • Heat that is generated along the operation

                 • Operating point of the active elements

                 • Frequency dropper elements (capacitors, inductors)

                 • Change in total opposition faced by the alternating current (impedance) 

                Oscillators may be classified in three ways, including: 

                   a. The design principle used where we have a positive and a negative feedback oscillators,

                   b. The frequency range of the signal over which they are used:

                       • Audio Frequency (AF) oscillators (frequency range is 20 Hz to 20 kHz)

                       • Radio Frequency (RF) oscillators (frequency range is 20 kHz to 30 MHz) 

                       • Video Frequency oscillators (frequency range is dc to 5 MHz) 

                       • High Frequency (HF) oscillators (frequency range is 1.5 MHz to 30 MHz)

                       • Very High Frequency (VHF) oscillators (frequency range is 30 MHz to 300 MHz)

                   c. The nature of generated signals where we have: 

                        • Sinusoidal Oscillators: These are known as harmonic oscillators and are generally LC tuned-feedback or RC tuned-feedback type oscillator that generates a sinusoidal waveform which is of constant amplitude and frequency.

                        • Non-sinusoidal Oscillators: These are known as relaxation oscillators and generate complex non-sinusoidal waveforms that changes very quickly from one condition of stability to another such as square-wave, triangular-wave or sawtooth-wave type waveforms.

                                          

                The oscillators have a variety of applications. In some applications we need voltages of low frequencies, in others of very high frequencies. For example to test the performance of a stereo amplifier, we need a signal of variable frequency in the audio range (20 Hz-20 KHz). Next to amplifiers, oscillators are the most important analog circuit block. Oscillators can be found in almost every imaginable electronic system. For example all radio receiving systems must have a local oscillator.

                All transmitting systems require oscillators to define the carrier frequency. Similarly, most digital systems are clocked and require a master clock oscillator to operate. Signal sources, which are essential for testing electronic systems, are also precise oscillators whose frequency and amplitude can be accurately set according to the requirement.

                7.4.2 Radio frequency amplifier 

                An amplifier is an electronic device which can increase the amplitude or the power of the input signal to its input parts, without the needs of modifying the form of that signal. Mostly, these devices are used in telecommunication, especially in receivers. Any amplifier has an active element, more often transistors, though there may exist also resistors, inductors and capacitors

                Classes of amplifiers 

                There exist two classes: Capacitor coupled amplifiers and transformer coupled amplifiers. The two are used in multistage amplifiers, that is when we connect two stage amplifiers using a capacitor and when we connect two stages amplifiers using a transformer, we get a capacitor coupled amplifier and a transformer coupled amplifier respectively. 

                Characteristics of RF amplifier 

                1. It may require or not a wide bandwidth signal to amplify 

                2. The output signal from the RF amplifier may or not be linear 

                3. They require to operate at a narrow bandwidth 

                4. They can use filters to reduce bandwidth 

                5. To tune the circuit, the resonant frequency is set to

                All electronic devices have an inductive reactance and capacitive reactances. The latter are vary as the frequency fluctuates. Normally, as the frequency increases, the inductive reactance increases but capacitive reactance decreases. Then the circuit will be called self-resonate at point, where the two characteristics mentioned above become equal. 

                In signal processing, we need to realize as many operations as possible so that we arrive to a signal that fits the transmission standards. The signal to be modulated is referred to as a baseband signal. The carriersignal needs to be a higher frequency than the baseband. A RF amplifier is a device which amplifies the baseband signal. However, devices such as Oscillators, Mixers, Multipliers and frequency synthesizers can be used to meet the above conditions.

                7.4.3 Power Amplifier 

                Signals are amplified in several stages (Fig.7.10). The initial stages are small signal amplifiers, they are designed to give good voltage gain, so they are called voltage amplifiers. At the final stage, the signal becomes large, the large-signal amplifier is called power amplifier, as it is designed for good power gain.

                                           

                The Fig.7.11 shows that the power amplifiers are classified according to the conduction angle they produced. Conduction angle measures the portion of the input cycle that is reproduced at the output of a power amplifier. If the conduction angle is 360°, which means that all of the input cycle is reproduced, the amplifier is called class A amplifier.

                                    

                Every amplifier has a DC equivalent circuit and an AC equivalent circuit. Because of this, it has two load lines : a Dc load line and an AC load line. 

                7.4.4 Checking my progress

                1. State the classifications of oscillators according to Frequency Band of the Signals 

                2. Explain what is mean by Oscillator 

                3. The figure is about transmission of signals in telecommunication. Study it carefully and label it.

                                      

                7.5 ANTENNAS

                Activity 7.5: Defining types of antennas

                Observe clearly the images on the fig. 7.13 below and answer the questions that follow:
                        

                                                        Fig.7. 11 Different types of antenna

                1. Describe the different the types of antenna shown in the Fig.7.13 above. 

                2. Discuss other different types of antenna you know. 

                3. Discuss and explain the function principle of an antenna.

                An antenna or aerial is an electrical device connected (often through a transmission line) to the receiver or transmitter which converts electric power into radio waves, and vice versa. It is usually used with a radio transmitter or radio receiver. In transmission, a radio transmitter supplies an oscillating radio frequency electric current to the antenna’s terminals, and the antenna radiates the energy from the current as electromagnetic waves (radio waves). In reception, an antenna intercepts some of the power of an electromagnetic wave in order to produce a tiny voltage at its terminals, which is fed to a receiver to be amplified. 

                Antennas are essential components of all equipment which are used in radio. They are used in broadcasting systems, broadcast television systems, two-way radio systems, communications receiver’s systems, radar systems, cell phones systems, and satellite communications systems, garage door openers systems, wireless microphones systems, Bluetooth enabled devices systems, wireless computer networks systems, baby monitors systems, and Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) tags systems on merchandise etc. 

                7.5.1 Types of antennas 

                There are a very large variety of antennas used in telecommunication. Here we can discuss at least four types of antenna among others. 

                • Wire antennas 

                The wire antennas are dipole, monopole, loop antenna, helix and are usually used in personal applications, automobiles, buildings, ships, aircrafts and super crafts.

                                

                • Aperture antennas 

                These are horn antennas and waveguide opening and they are usually used in aircrafts and space crafts because they are flush-mounted. 

                     

                • Reflector antennas 

                These are parabolic reflectors and corner reflectors and they are high gain antennas usually used in radio astronomy, microwave communication and satellite tracking.

                                                     

                4 Array antennas 

                These are also called Yagi-Uda antennas or micro-strip patch arrays or aperture arrays, slotted waveguide arrays.  They are suitable for very high gain applications with added advantage, such as, controllable radiation pattern.

                                                            

                7.5.2 Checking my progress 

                  1. What is meant by an antenna in telecommunication system? 

                  2.  State and explain at least two types of antenna

                7.6 BLOCK DIAGRAMS OF TELECOMMUNICATION

                Activity 7.6: Investigating communication block

                Given the system below, discuss the block of communication system provided in the illustration below.

                                

                           Fig.7. 16: Block-diagram of communication system with input and output transducers

                Information: Information is any entity or form that resolves uncertainty or provides the answer to a question of some kind. It is thus related to data and knowledge, as data represents values attributed to parameters, and knowledge signifies understanding of real things or abstract concepts. 

                Message: A message is a term standing for information put in an appropriate form for transmission. Each message contains information. A message can be either analog message (a physical time variable quantity usually in smooth and continuous form) or a digital message (anordered sequence of symbols selected from finite set of elements) as shown in Fg.7.19

                       • Analog message: a physical time-variable quantity usually in smooth and continuous form.

                       • Digital message: ordered sequence of symbols selected from finite set of elements.

                A signal is a mathematical function representing the time variation of a physical variable characterizing a physical process and which, by using various models, can be mathematically represented. 

                In telecommunication, the message is also known as a signal and the signal is transmitted in an electrical or voltage form. ( i.e Signal ≈ Message) 

                          

                COMPARISON OF AN ANALOG SIGNAL TO A DIGITAL SIGNAL 

                As discussed in the previous section, we can have the summary of differences between analog signal and digital signal (see Table 7.2)
                          

                SOME ELEMENTS OF BLOCK DIAGRAM OF TELECOMMUNICATION 

                 1. Transmission channel which is the electric medium that bridges the distance from source to destination 

                 2. The receiver to convert the received signal in a form appropriate for the output transducer after amplifying, filtering, demodulating and decoding it

                 3. Output transducer to convert the output electrical signal the desired message form

                 4. Modulation is defined as the process by which some characteristics (i.e. amplitude, frequency, and phase) of a carrier are varied in accordance with a modulating wave.

                 5. Encoding is the process of coding the message and changes it in the language understandable by the transmitter. This operation is realized at the transmitting end

                 6. Demodulation is the reverse process of modulation, which is used to get back the original message signal. Modulation is performed at the transmitting end whereas demodulation is performed at the receiving end

                 7. Decoding is the reverse process of encoding to retrieve the original message and make it human understandable message. It is realized at the receiving end

                 8. Antennas which are aerials used to transmit and receive the signals.

                 9. The oscillators which are the sources of carrier signals which are used to modulate and help the original signal to reach the destination

                 10. The signal normally, must be raised at a level that will permit it to reach its destination. This operation is accomplished by amplifiers

                         

                7.6.1 Simple radio transmitter 

                A radio transmitter consists of several elements that work together to generate radio waves that contain useful information such as audio, video, or digital data. The process by which a radio station transmits information is outlined in Fig. 7.21.

                 

                 • Power supply: Provides the necessary electrical power to operate the transmitter.

                 • The audio (sound) information is changed into an electrical signal of the same frequencies by, say, a microphone, a laser, or a magnetic read write head. This electrical signal is called an audio frequency (AF) signal, because the frequencies are in the audio range (20 Hz to 20 000 Hz).

                 • The signal is amplified electronically in AF amplifier and is then mixed with a radio-frequency (RF) signal called its carrier frequency, which represents that station. AM radio stations have carrier frequencies from about 530 kHz to 1700 kHz. Today’s digital broadcasting uses the same frequencies as the pre-2009 analog transmission.

                • The Modulator or Mixer adds useful information to the carrier wave. The mixing of the audio and carrier frequencies is done in two ways. 

                       • In amplitude modulation (AM), the amplitude of the high-frequency carrier wave is made to vary in proportion to the amplitude of the audio signal, as shown in Fig.7.3. It is called “amplitude modulation” because the amplitude of the carrier is altered (“modulate” means to change or alter).

                      • In frequency modulation (FM), the frequency of the carrier wave is made to change in proportion to the audio signal’s amplitude, as shown in Fig.7.4. The mixed signal is amplified further and sent to the transmitting antenna (Fig.7.13.C), where the complex mixture of frequencies is sent out in the form of EM waves.

                      • Amplifier: Amplifies the modulated carrier wave to increase its power. The more powerful    the amplifier, the more powerful the broadcast. In digital communication, the signal is put into digital form which modulates the carrier. A television transmitter works in a similar way, using FM for audio and AM for video; both audio and video signals are mixed with carrier frequencies.

                7.6.2 Simple radio receiver 

                A radio receiver is the opposite of a radio transmitter. It uses an antenna to capture radio waves, processes those waves to extract only those waves that are vibrating at the desired frequency, extracts the audio signals that were added to those waves, amplifies the audio signals, and finally plays them on a speaker.

                Now let us look at the other end of the process, the reception of radio and TV programs at home. A simple radio receiver is graphed in Fig. 7.22. The EM waves sent out by all stations are received by the antenna. 

                               

                The signalantennadetect and send the radio waves,to the receiver are very small and contain frequencies from many different stations. The receiver uses a resonant LC circuit to select out a particular RF frequency (actually a narrow range of frequencies) corresponding to a particular station. 

                A simple way of tuning a station is shown in Fig.7.23. When the wire of antenna is exposed to radio waves, the waves induce a very small alternating current in the antenna.

                                                                 

                A particular station is “tuned in” by adjusting the capacitance C and/or inductance L so that the resonant frequency of the circuit equals that of the station’s carrier frequency.

                R.F. Amplifier: A sensitive amplifier that amplifies the very weak radio frequency (RF) signal from the antenna so that the signal can be processed by the tuner.

                R.F. Tuner: A circuit that can extract signals of a particular frequency from a mix of signals of different frequencies. On its own, the antenna captures radio waves of all frequencies and sends them to the RF amplifier, which dutifully amplifies them all. Unless you want to listen to every radio channel at the same time, you need a circuit that can pick out just the signals for the channel you want to hear. That’s the role of the tuner.

                The tuner usually employs the combination of an inductor (for example, a coil) and a capacitor to form a circuit that resonates at a particular frequency. This frequency, called the resonant frequency, is determined by the values chosen for the coil and the capacitor. This type of circuit tends to block any AC signals at a frequency above or below the resonant frequency. 

                You can adjust the resonant frequency by varying the amount of inductance in the coil or the capacitance of the capacitor. In simple radio receiver circuits, the tuning is adjusted by varying the number of turns of wire in the coil. More sophisticated tuners use a variable capacitor (also called a tuning capacitor) to vary the frequency.

                7.6.3 Wireless Radio Communication 

                Let us now discuss the basic principles of wireless radio communications. We shall mainly concentrate on the principle of amplitude modulation and demodulation. 

                The simplest scheme of wireless communication would be to convert the speech or music to be transmitted to electric signals using a microphone, boost up the power of the signal using amplifiers and radiate the signal in space with the air of an antenna. This would constitute the transmitter. At the receiver end, one could have a pick-up antenna feeding the speech or music signal to an amplifier and a loud speaker. (See Fig.7.24)

                                               

                The above scheme suffers from the following drawbacks: 

                I. EM waves in the frequency range of 20 Hz to 20 kHz (audio-frequency range) cannot be efficiently radiated and do not propagate well in space. 

                II. Simultaneous transmission of different signals by different transmitters would lead to confusion at the receiver.

                In order to solve these problems; we need to devise methods to convert or translate the audio signals to the radio-frequency range before transmission and recover the audio-frequency signals back at the receiver. Different transmitting stations can then be allotted slots in the radio-frequency range and a single receiver can then tune into these transmitters without confusion. 

                The frequency range 500 kHz to 20 MHz is reserved for amplitude-modulated broadcast, which is the range covered by most three band transistor radios. The process of frequency translation at the transmitter is called modulation. The process of recovering the audio-signal at the receiver is called demodulation. A simplified block diagram of such a system is shown in the below figure.

                          

                7.6.4 Checking my progress

                   1. What is the importance of power amplifier in simple radio transmitter. 

                   2. What do you understand by the following terms.  

                       a. Analog message

                       b. Digital message 

                   3. Draw a circuit diagram of a simple radio receiver

                7.7 END UNIT ASSESSMENT 

                7.7.1 Multiple choices 

                      1. One of the following is used for satellite communication 

                          a.  Radio waves 

                          b.  Light waves

                          c.  Microwaves  

                          d.  All of these

                       2. Amplitude –modulated radio waves are received  by a tuned radio-frequency ( trf) Receiver. The receiver has            a suitable detector circuit in order to

                          a. Amplifier the carrier waves

                          b. Amplifier the audio-frequencies carried

                          c. Rectifier the carrier waves

                          d. detect the carrier waves

                          e. Transfer the audio-frequencies to the radio-frequency amplifier 

                7.7.2 Structured questions 

                      3. What do you understand by the following terms?

                          a. Amplifier

                          b. Modulator 

                      4.   What is meant by telecommunication system?

                      5.  Draw a labeled diagram showing the elements of radio transmitter
                7.7.3 Essay question 

                      6. Recently, the government of Rwanda decided to replace analog system of communication by digital system of           communication. Debate about this government policy
                      7.  Explain briefly positive impact of telecommunication in development of a country like Rwanda.

                • Key unit Competence 

                  By the end of the lesson, I should be able to analyse the nature of particle and their interactions

                  My goals

                    • The key varieties of fundamental subatomic particles and how they were discovered.

                    • Distinguish between fundamental particles and composite particles

                    • Distinguish between particles and antiparticles

                    • Describe how antimatter can be used as a source of energy

                    • State some applications for elementary particles

                    • Compare matter and antimatter

                    • The four ways in which subatomic particles interact with each other.

                    • Analyze the structure of protons, neutrons, and other particles can be explained in terms of quarks

                  Introductory activity 

                  Investigating the elementary particles discovery

                  In the study of matter description and energy as well as their interactions; the fascinating thing of discovery is the structure of universe of unknown radius but still to know the origin of matter one need to know about small and smallest composites of matter. The smallest particle was defined to be electron, proton, and neutron. But one can ask:

                    1. Are electron, proton and neutron the only particle that can define the origin of matter?

                    2. What are other particles matter is composed of?

                    3. Describe and discuss how particles interact with energy to form matter.

                  8.1 ELEMENTARY PARTICLES.

                  8.1.1 Introduction 

                  Activity 8.1: Investigate the presence of smaller particles

                  Use internet and retrieve the definition and the information about elementary particles, and then answer to the following questions.

                   1. What does elementary particle physics talk about?

                   2. What are the elementary particles found through your research?

                   3. Discuss and explain the use of knowledge about the elementary particles.

                  Particle physics, also known as high-energy physics, is the field of natural science that pursues the ultimate structure of matter. 

                  The protons and neutrons are collectively called hadrons, were considered as elementary particles until 1960. We now know that they are composed of more fundamental particles, the quarks. Electrons remain elementary to this day. Muons and τ-leptons, which were found later, are nothing but heavy electrons, as far as the present technology can tell, and they are collectively dubbed leptons

                  Quarks and leptons are the fundamental building blocks of matter. The microscopic size that can be explored by modern technology is nearing . The quarks and leptons are elementary at this level (Nagashima, 2013).

                  Particle physics is the study of the fundamental constituents of matter and their interactions. However, which particles are regarded as fundamental have changed with time as physicists’ knowledge has improved. Modern theory called the standard model attempts to explain all the phenomena of particle physics in terms of the properties and interactions of a small number of particles of three distinct types (see Fig.8.1):

                  • Two families of fermions (of spin ½): leptons and quarks 

                  • One family of bosons (of spin 1)

                                      

                  I, II and III represent the first, second and the third generations. In addition, at least one spin-0 particle, called the Higgs boson, is postulated to explain the origin of mass within the theory, since without it all the particles in the model are predicted to have zero mass (see Fig.8.1).

                  All the particles of the standard model are assumed to be elementary; i.e. they are treated as point particles, without internal structure or excited states. The most familiar example of a lepton is the electron (the superscript denotes the electric charge), which is bound in atoms by the electromagnetic interaction, one of the four fundamental forces of nature. A second well-known lepton is the electron neutrino, which is a light, neutral particle observed in the decay products of some unstable nuclei (the so-called β-decays). The force responsible for the β-decay of nuclei is called the weak interaction.

                  8.1.2 Checking my progress

                     1. Particles that make up the family of Hadrons are:

                         a. Baryons and mesons

                         c. Protons and electrons

                         b. Leptons and baryons 

                         d. Muons and Leptons
                     2. Using the elementary particles, Complete the following sentences 

                        I. One family of bosons of spin 1 called__________which act as ‘force carriers’ in the theory

                       II. Two fermions of spin 1/2 called_________and ________ 

                     3. The first antiparticle found was the

                             a.  Positron              b.  Hyperons        c. Quark     d. baryon
                     4. Explain what is meant by particle physics?

                  8.2 CLASSIFICATION OF ELEMENTARY PARTICLES. 

                  Activity 8.2:  Classes of elementary particles 

                  Based on the previous introduction section, reread the text and the answer to the following questions.
                   1. What are the types of elementary particles?

                   2. What properties are based on to classify elementary particles?

                  There are three properties that describe an elementary particle ‘’mass,’’ ‘’charge’’ and ‘’spin’’. Each property is assigned as number value. These properties always stay the same for an elementary particle.

                  • Mass (m): a particle has mass if it takes energy to increase its speed or to accelerate it. The values are given in MeV/C2. This comes from special relativity, which tells us that energy equals mass times the square of the speed of light. E=m×c2 All particles with mass are affected by gravity even particles with no mass like photon

                  • Electriccharge (Q): particles may have positive, negative charge or none. If one particle has a negative charge and another particle has a positive, the two particles are attracted to each other. If particles have a similar charge, they repel each other. At a short distance this force is much stronger than the force of gravity which pulls all particles together. An electron has a charge -1 and a proton has a charge +1. A neutron has average charge 0. Normal quarks have charge of 2/3 or -1/3

                  • Spin: the angular momentum or constant turning of particles has a particular value, called its spin number. Spin for elementary particle is 0, 1 or 1/2 . The spin property only donates the presence of angular momentum.

                  8.2.1 Classification of particles by mass 

                  The most basic way of classifying particles is by their mass. The heaviest particles are the hadrons and the lightest one is the leptons.

                                          

                  As seen the diagram above hadrons group is divided into baryons and mesons. Baryons are the heaviest particles and are followed by mesons. 

                  Hadrons are composite particles made of quarks held together by the strong force in a similar way as molecules are held together by electromagnetic force. They are subjected to the strong nuclear force and are not fundamental particles as they are made up of quarks.

                                • Baryons are composite sub-atomic particle made up of 3 quarks (tri-quarks are distinct from mesons which are composed of one quark and one antiquark). Baryon comes from Greek word which means “heavy”. The protons are only stable baryons; all other baryons eventually decay into proton.

                       Ex: Protons and neutrons  

                                • Mesons are hadrons sub-atomic particles made up of one quark and one antiquark bound together by strong interaction. Ex: Pion and kaon Each pion has quark and one anti-quark therefore is a meson. It is the lightest meson and generally the lightest hadrons. They are unstable. 

                  Leptons do not interact via the strong force. They carry electric charge also interact via the weak nuclear force. They include electron, muons, tau and three the types of neutrino: the electron neutrino (νE), the muon neutrino (νμ) and the tau neutrino

                  In summary, leptons are subjected to the weak nuclear force and they do not feel the strong nuclear force. 

                  Examples: Electron, muons and neutrino.

                  8.2.2 Classification of particles by spin. 

                  The spin classification determines the nature of energy distribution in a collection of particles. Particles of integer spin obey Bose-Einstein statistics whereas those of half-integer spin behave according to Fermi-Dirac statistics as shown in the following chart

                         

                  All fundamental particles are classified into fermions and bosons. Fermions have half-integer spin while bosons have full integer spin. Electrons and nucleons are fermions with spin ½. The fundamental bosons have mostly spin 1. This includes the photon. The pion has spin 0, while the graviton has spin 2.  There are also three particles, the W+, W− and Z0 bosons, which are spin 1.  They are the carriers of the weak interactions.

                  Fermions are particles which have half-integer spin and therefore are constrained by the Pauli Exclusion Principle (see Section 8.4). It includes electrons, protons and neutrons.

                  The fact that electrons are fermions is foundational to the buildup of the periodic table of elements since there can be only one electron for each state in an atom (only one electron for each possible set of quantum numbers). The fermion nature of electrons also governs the behavior of electrons in a metal where at low temperatures all the low energy states are filled up to a level called the Fermi energy. This filling of states is described by Fermi-Dirac statistics.

                  8.2.3 Checking my progress

                   1. How can elementary particles be classified?

                   2. Elementary particles which are made up of one quark and one anti-quark are called

                      a. Protons      . b. Neutrons     c.   Baryons         d.   Mesons     e.   Leptons

                   3. The Sub-atomic particle made up of 3 quarks are called

                      a. Leptons          b. Pion       c.    kaon            d.    Baryons

                   4. What do you understand by the term elementary particle?

                  8.3 ANTI PARTICLE AND PAULI’S EXCLUSION PRINCIPLE 

                  8.3.1 Concept of particle and antiparticle

                   Activity 8.3: 

                  Discuss the following terms:

                    3. Particle

                    4. Antiparticle

                  There are two important points about pair production. The first is that you need to collect energy to produce the electron-positron pair. You need the equivalent rest mass of energy that is the amount of energy contained in the both particle and antiparticle when at rest. The energy converted to mass is ‘lost’ or fully ‘’bound’’ until the particle is annihilated and the energy can be recovered. The second thing is that it needs a correct environment. The process does not occur unless certain conditions are present.

                  Viewing the phenomena as a creative process we can say a threshold amount of energy is sacrificed in a correct context to manifest a pair of particle with a physical mass. It can be said something was created out of nothing. That is before the interaction, no particles with mass existed. After interaction, there were two particles with mass. Hence something was created out of nothing. But this can be said only because of the perspective taken when viewing the process. 

                  For every charged particle of nature, whether it is one of the elementary particles of the standard model, or a hadron, there is an associated particle of the same mass, but opposite charge, called its antiparticle

                  This result is a necessary consequence of combining special relativity with quantum mechanics. This important theoretical prediction was made by Dirac and follows from the solutions of the equation he first wrote down to describe relativistic electrons

                  8.3.2 Pauli’s exclusion principle, 

                  Pauli’s exclusion principle is a quantum mechanical principle which states that: “Two or more identical fermions (particles with half-integer spin) cannot occupy the same quantum state simultaneously.” 

                  In case of electrons in atoms it can be stated as follows: it is impossible for two electrons of a poly-electron atom to have the same values of the four quantum numbers: 

                  The principle quantum number (n), the angular momentum quantum number (l), the magnetic quantum number (ml) and the spin quantum number (ms). For example, if two electrons reside in the same orbital and if their ms must be different and thus like electrons must have opposite half integer spin projections of 1/2 and-1/2.

                  This principle was formulated by Austrian physicist Wolfgang Pauli in 1925 for electrons, and later extended to all fermions with his spin–statistics theorem of 1940. Particles with an integer spin, or bosons, are not subject to the Pauli Exclusion Principle: any number of identical bosons can occupy the same quantum state, for instance, photons produced by a laser and Bose–Einstein condensate.

                  The Pauli Exclusion Principle describes the behavior of all fermions (particles with “halfinteger spin”), while bosons (particles with“ integer spin”) are subject to other principles. Fermions include elementary particles such as quarks, electrons and neutrinos. Additionally, baryons such as protons and neutrons (subatomic particles composed from three quarks) and some atoms (such as helium-3) are fermions, and are therefore described by the Pauli Exclusion Principle as well.

                  8.3.3 Checking my progress

                   1. What do you understand by antiparticle?

                   2.  State Pauli’s exclusion principle?

                   3.  Why Pauli’s exclusion Principle is known as exclusion? 

                  8.4 FUNDAMENTAL INTERACTIONS BY PARTICLE EXCHANGE

                  Activity 8.4 Fundamental interaction 

                  Using internet, discusses the fundamental interactions in terms of exchange particles, then find the relation between the following concepts.

                   1. Gravitational forces

                   2. electroweak force,

                   3. Strong force and

                   4. Weak forces.

                  8.4.1 Forces and Interactions 

                  Physicists have recognized three basic forces: 

                   • The gravitational force is an inherent attraction between two masses. Gravitational force is responsible for the motion of the planets and Stars in the Universe. It is carried by Graviton. By Newton’s law of gravitation, the gravitational force is directly proportional to the product of the masses and inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them. Gravitational force is the weakest force among the fundamental forces of nature but has the greatest large−scale impact on the universe. Unlike the other forces, gravity works universally on all matter and energy, and is universally attractive 

                   • The electric force is a force between charges

                   • The magnetic force, which is a force between magnets or between magnetic body and ferromagnetic body.

                  In the 1860s, the Scottish physicist James Clerk Maxwell developed a theory that unified the electric and magnetic forces into a single electromagnetic force. Maxwell’s electromagnetic force was soon found to be the “glue” holding atoms, molecules, and solids together. It is the force between charged particles such as the force between two electrons, or the force between two current carrying wires. It is attractive for unlike charges and repulsive for like charges. The electromagnetic force obeys inverse square law. It is very strong compared to the gravitational force. It is the combination of electrostatic and magnetic forces. 

                  The discovery of the atomic nucleus, about 1910, presented difficulties that could not be explained by either gravitational or electromagnetic forces. The atomic nucleus is an unimaginably dense ball of protons and neutrons. But what holds it together against the repulsive electric forces between the protons? There must be an attractive force inside the nucleus that is stronger than the repulsive electric force. This force, called the strong force, is the force that holds the protons and neutrons together in the nucleus of an atom. It is the strongest of all the basic forces of nature. It, however, has the shortest range, of the order of 10−15 m. This force only acts on quarks. It binds quarks together to form baryons and mesons such as protons and
                  neutrons. The strong force is mediated or carried by Gluons. Quarks carry electric charge so they experience electric and magnetic forces. 

                  In the 1939, physicists found that thenuclear radioactivity called beta decay could not be explained by either the electromagnetic or the strong force. Careful experiments established that the decay is due to a previously undiscovered force within thenucleus. The strength of this force is less than either the strong force or the electromagnetic force, so this new force was named the weak force. Weak nuclear force is important in certain types of nuclear process such as β-decay. This force is not as weak as the gravitational force. The weak force acts on both leptons and quarks (and hence on all hadrons). The weak force is carried by W+, W- and Z. Leptons – the electrons, muons and tau – are charged so they experience electric and magnetic forces.

                  Of these, our everyday world is controlled by gravity and electromagnetism. The strong force binds quarks together and holds nucleons (protons & neutrons) in nuclei. 

                  The weak force is responsible for the radioactive decay of unstable nuclei and for interactions of neutrinos and other leptons with matter. 

                  By 1940, the recognized forces of nature (fundamental forces)were four:

                    • Gravitational forces between masses,

                    • Electromagnetic forces resulting from the combination of electric and magnetic fields,

                    • Strong force (nuclear force) between subatomic particles,

                    • Weak forces that arise in certain radioactive decay processes. 

                  By 1980, Sheldon Glashow, Abdus Salam, and Steven Berg developed a theory that unifies electromagnetism and weak force into electroweak force. Hence, our understanding of the forces of nature is in terms of three fundamental forces:

                    • The gravitational force,

                    • The electroweak force,

                    • The strong force. 

                          

                    • W boson: short-lived elementary particle; one of the carriers of the weak nuclear force 

                    • Z boson: short-lived elementary particle; one of the carriers of the weak nuclear force

                    • Graviton: the hypothetical particle predicted to carry the gravitational force

                  All the forces of nature should be capable of being described by single theory. But only at high energies should be the behavior of the forces combines, this is called unification.

                  We can compare the relative strengths of the electromagnetic repulsion and the gravitational attraction between two protons of unit charge using the above equations.

                                 

                                 
                                

                  8.5 UNCERTAINTY PRINCIPLE AND PARTICLE CREATION 

                  8.5.1 The concept of uncertainty principle

                  Activity 8.5: Investigation of particle creation and position. 

                  Basing on the knowledge and skills obtained from the previous sections of this unit, use internet to fid the meaning of the particle creation. 

                     a. Is it possible to know the exact location of an elementary particle?

                     b. Discuss and explain your fidings

                  The discovery of the dual wave–particle nature of matter forces us to re-evaluate the kinematic language we use to describe the position and motion of a particle. 

                  In classical Newtonian mechanics we think of a particle as a point. We can describe its location and state of motion at any instant with three spatial coordinates and three components of velocity. But because matter also has a wave aspect, when we look at the behaviour on a small enough scale comparable to the de Broglie wavelength of the particle we can no longer use the Newtonian description. Certainly no Newtonian particle would undergo diffraction like electrons do. 

                  To demonstrate just how non Newtonian the behaviour of matter can be, let’s look at an experiment involving the two-slit interference of electrons (Fig.8.4). 

                  We aim an electron beam at two parallel slits, just as we did for light. (The electron experiment has to be done in vacuum so that the electrons don’t collide with air molecules.) 

                              

                  What kind of pattern appears on the detector on the other side of the slits? 

                  The answer is: exactly the same kind of interference pattern we saw for photons. Moreover, the principle of complementarily, tells us that we cannot apply the wave and particle models simultaneously to describe any single element of this experiment. Thus we cannot predict exactly where in the pattern (a wave phenomenon) any individual electron (a particle) will land. We can’t even ask which slit an individual electron passes through. If we tried to look at where the electrons were going by shining a light on them that is, by scattering photons off them the electrons would recoil, which would modify their motions so that the two-slit interference pattern would not appear. 

                  Just as electrons and photons show the same behaviour in a two-slit interference experiment, electrons and other forms of matter obey the same Heisenberg uncertainty principles as photons do: 

                  Heisenberg uncertainty principle for position and momentum is given by

                       

                  8.5.2 Checking my progress

                  1. The idea of uncertainty is used in many contexts; social, economic and scientific. People often talk about uncertain times, and when you perform a measurement you should always estimate the uncertainty (sometimes called the error). In physics the Heisenberg Uncertainty relation has a very specific meaning.

                    a. Write down the Heisenberg uncertainty relation for position and momentum.

                    b. Explain its physical significance.

                    c. Does the Heisenberg uncertainty principle need to be considered when calculating the uncertainties in a typical first year physics experiment? Why or why not?

                    d. Discuss the following statement: the uncertainty principle places a limit on the accuracy with which a measurement can be made. Do you agree or disagree, and why?

                   2. An electron is confined within a region of width 11 5 10 m −× (Roughly the Bohr radius)

                     a.  Estimate the minimum uncertainty in the component of the electron’s momentum.

                     b.  What is the kinetic energy of an electron with this magnitude of momentum? Express your    answer in both joules and electron volts.

                  8.6 MATTER AND ANTIMATTER (PAIR PRODUCTION AND ANNIHILATION) 

                  Activity 8.6: Describing the matter and antimatter

                  Use internet to describe the following concepts:
                    1. matter and give examples of  matter particles

                    2. antimatter and give examples of antimatter particles

                    3. Pair production

                    4. Annihilation

                  8.6. 1 Introduction 

                  Matter is a substance that has mass and takes up a space by having a volume. This include atoms and anything made up of these but no other energy phenomena or wave such as light or sound. 

                  Everything around you is made up of matter and is composed of particles including the fundamental fermions (quarks, leptons, antiquarks and antileptons) which generally are matter particles and antimatter particles. 

                  Antimatter is a material composed of the antiparticle to the corresponding particle or ordinary particles. In theory a particle and its antiparticle have the same mass as one another but opposite electric charge and other differences in quantum numbers. 

                  Neutrons have antineutrons, electrons have positrons and neutrons have antineutrons as their respective antimatter. It was once thought that matter would neither be created nor destroyed. We know that energy and mass are interchangeable.

                  8.6.2 Pair production and annihilation 

                  Pair production is a crucial example that photon energy can convert into kinetic energy as well as rest mass energy. Schematic diagram about the process of pair production is shown in Fig.8.5. The high-energy photon that has energy fh loses its entire energy when it collides with nucleus. Then, it makes pair of electron and positron and gives kinetic energy to each particle.

                             

                  Annihilation: When a particle collides with its antiparticle, the two annihilate each other with their mass being entirely converted into energy by the process called ‘’Annihilation’’ 

                  These particles and anti-particles can meet each other and annihilate one another (See Fig.8.6). . In each case the particle and its antiparticle annihilate each other, releasing a pair of high energy gamma photons.

                         

                  In this example, a proton and an anti-proton meet each other and annihilate, producing high energy gamma rays in the form of photons. Rest mass, charge, momentum and energy are conserved.

                  They can also be produced from a high energy photon, this is called pair production.

                   8.6.3 Application of antimatter 

                  Antimatter as a form of antiparticle of sub atomic particles has a variety of applications:

                    • Positron emission tomography can be used to potentially treat cancer.

                    • Stored antimatter can be used for interplanetary and inter stellar travel.

                    • Antimatter reactions have practical applications in medical energy.

                    • Antimatter has been considered as a trigger mechanism for nuclear weapons because whenever antimatter meets its corresponding matter the energy is released by annihilation.

                  8.6.4 Checking my progress 

                    1. Antimatter as a form of sub atomic particles

                      a. Electron

                      b. proton  

                      c. matter 

                      d. antiparticle

                      e. none of them is correct

                   2. The process in which a particle and antiparticle unite annihilate each other and produce one or      more photons is called………

                   3. What happens when matter and antimatter collide?

                   4. Compare matter and antimatter

                  8.7 END UNIT ASSESSMENT

                  8.7.1 Multiple choices 

                    1. The positron is called the antiparticle of electron, because it

                       a. Has opposite charge and Annihilates with an electron

                       b. Has the same mass

                       c. Collides with an electron

                       d. Annihilates with an electron

                  2. Beta particles are

                      e. Neutrons

                      f. Protons

                      g. Electrons

                      h. Thermal neutrons

                  3. If gravity is the weakest force, why is it the one we notice most?

                     a. Our bodies are not sensitive to the other forces.

                     b. The other forces act only within atoms and therefore have no effect on us.

                     c. Gravity may be “very weak” but always attractive, and the Earth has enormous mass. The strong and weak nuclear forces have very short range. The electromagnetic force has a long range, but most matter is electrically neutral.

                     d. At long distances, the gravitational force is actually stronger than the other forces.

                     e. The other forces act only on elementary particles, not on objects our size.

                  8.7.2 Structured questions 

                  4. According to the classification of elementary particles by mass. Complete the following figure
                                               

                  5.
                      I.  State two differences between a proton and a positron. 

                     II.  A narrow beam of protons and positrons travelling at the same speed enters a uniform magnetic field. The path of the positrons through the field is shown in Fig.8.7. Sketch on this figurethe path you would expect the protons to take.        

                                                          

                                                                         Fig.8. 5 Particles in magnetic field
                                 III.  Explain why protons take a different path to that of the positrons.

                     6. A positron with kinetic energy 2.2 MeV and an electron at rest annihilate each other. Calculate the average energy of each of the two gamma photons produced as a result of this annihilation. 

                  8.7.3 Essay question 

                    7. Describe briefly the following particle-terms terms: π -meson, muon, neutrino, antiparticle,      hadrons and lepton.

                  •               

                    Key unit Competence 

                    By the end of this unit, I should be able to organize the properties and basic principles of quarks. 

                    My goals

                      • List types of quarks, identify quarks, antiquarks and hadrons (baryons and mesons)

                      • Define baryon number and state the law of conservation of baryon number.

                      • Interpret the baryon number and apply the law of conservation of baryon number

                      • State colors of quarks and gluons.

                      • Explain how color forms bound states of quarks.

                      • Formulate the spin structure of hadrons (baryon and mesons) 

                    Introductory activity 

                    In the study of matter description and energy as well as their interactions; the fascinating thing of discovery is the structure of universe of infinite size but still there is a taskto know the origin of matter. The smallest particle was defined to be electron, proton, and neutron. But one can ask:

                           1. What particles are components of matter?

                           2. Describe and discuss how particles interact with energy to form matter.

                    9.1 INTRODUCTION 

                    Activity 9.1: Investigating about elementary particles

                    Considering the knowledge and skills obtained from unit 8, about the study of elementary particles, discuss and explain the following questions:

                       1. Discuss the major groups of elementary particles 

                       2. Explain and analyze the family of quarks and their interactions.

                       3. Why should we learn aboutelementary particles?

                    Particle physics is the field of natural science that pursues the ultimate structure of matter. This is possible in two ways. One is to look for elementary particles, the ultimate constituents of matter at their smallest scale, and the other is to clarify what interactions are acting among them to construct matter as we see them. The exploitable size of microscopic objects becomes smaller as technology develops. What was regarded as an elementary particle at one time is recognized as a structured object and relinquishes the title of “elementary particle” to more fundamental particles in the next era. This process has been repeated many times throughout the history of science (Nagashima, 2013).

                    In the 19th century, when modern atomic theory was established, the exploitable size of the microscopic object was  and the atom was “the elementary particle”. Then it was recognized as a structured object when J.J. Thomson extracted electrons in 1897 from matter in the form of cathode rays. Its real structure (the Rutherford model) was clarified by investigating the scattering pattern of α-particles striking a golden foil (See Fig.9.1).

                    Fig.9. 1: Scattering pattern of α-particles striking a golden foil. In 1932, Chadwick discovered that the nucleus, the core of the atom, consisted of protons and neutrons. In the same year, Lawrence constructed the first cyclotron. In 1934 Fermi proposed a theory of weak interactions. In 1935 Yukawa proposed the meson theory to explain the nuclear force acting among them. 

                    It is probably fair to say that the modern history of elementary particles began around this time. The protons and neutrons together with their companion pions, which are collectively called hadrons, were considered as elementary particles until 1960. We now know that they are composed of more fundamental particles, the quarks. Electrons remain elementary to this day. 

                    Muons and τ-leptons, which were found later, are nothing but heavy electrons, as far as the present technology can tell, and they are collectively dubbed leptons. Quarks and leptons are the fundamental building blocks of matter. The microscopic size that can be explored by modern technology is nearing  10−19m . 

                    The quarks and leptons are elementary at this level (Nagashima, 2013). Some composite particles as stated by (Hirsch, 2002) are summarized in the tables below

                    9.1.2 Checking my progress

                       1. Each hadron consists of a proper combination of a few elementary components called

                           a. Photons.         b. Vector bosons.    c.   Quarks.   d.   Meson-baryon pairs.

                      2. Which of the following is not conserved in a nuclear reaction?

                           a. Nucleon number.   b. Baryon number.              c.   Charge   d.   All of the above are c. Conserved. 

                      3. The first antiparticle found was the 

                          a. Positron.     b. Hyperon.           c.    Quark.     d.    Baryon.

                      4. The proton, neutron, electron, and the photon are called

                          a. Secondary particles.   b. Fundamental particles     c.    Basic particles.  d.    Initial particles.

                      5. The exchange particle of the electromagnetic force is the 

                          a. Gluon.       b. Muon.    c.    Proton.     d.    Photon.

                      6. Particles that are bound by the strong force are called

                         a. leptons.    b. hadrons.      c. muons.     d. electrons

                      7. At the present time, the elementary particles are considered to be the

                          a. Photons and baryons.  b.     Baryons and quarks. c. Leptons, quarks and bosons   d.     Baryons and leptons.

                      8. The electron and muon are both 

                         a. Jadrons.      b. Leptons.        c.      Baryons.      d.     Mesons.

                      9. Particles that make up the family of hadrons are

                         a. Baryons and mesons.      b. Leptons and baryons.  c.     Protons and electrons.     d.     Muons and leptons. 

                     10.  Is it possible for a particle to be both: 

                         a. A lepton and a baryon?  b. A baryon and hadron?   c.     A meson and a quark?   d.     A hadron and a lepton?  

                     11. Distinguish between 

                         a. fermions and bosons  

                         b. leptons and hadrons  

                        c. mesons and baryon number 

                     12. Which of the four interactions (strong, electromagnetic, weak, gravitational) does an electron, neutrino, proton take part in?

                    9.2 TYPES OF QUARKS

                    Activity 9.2: Investigating quark particles 

                    Use search internet and find the explanation about quarks and types of quarks

                    Aquark is a type of elementary particle and a fundamental constituent of matter. Quarks combine to form composite particles called hadrons, the most stable of which are protons and neutrons, the components of atomic nuclei. Due to a phenomenon known as color confinement, quarks are never directly observed or found in isolation; they can be found only within hadrons, such as baryons (of which protons and neutrons are examples) and mesons. For this reason, much of what is known about quarks has been drawn from observations of the hadrons themselves (Douglass, PHYSICS, Principles with applications., 2014). 

                    Quarks have various intrinsic properties, including electric charge, mass, color charge, and spin. Quarks are the only elementary particles in the Standard Model of particle physics to experience all four fundamental interactions, also known as fundamental forces (electromagnetism, gravitation, strong interaction, and weak interaction (see section 8.5), as well as the only known particles whose electric charges are not integer multiples of the elementary charge. 

                    There are six types of quarks, known as flavors: up, down, strange, charm, top, andbottom (see Fig. 9.2). Up and down quarks have the lowest masses of all quarks. The heavier quarks rapidly change into up and down quarks through a process ofparticle decay (the transformation from a higher mass state to a lower mass state). Because of this, up and down quarks are generally stable and the most common in the universe, whereas strange, charm, bottom, and top quarks can only be produced in high energy collisions (such as those involving cosmic rays and in particle accelerators). For every quark flavor there is a corresponding type of antiparticle, known as an antiquark, that differs from the quark only in that some of its properties have equal magnitude but opposite sign (Nagashima, 2013).

                                                       

                    Checking my progress

                      1. A proton is made up of 

                         a. One up quark and two down quarks

                         b. An up quark and down antiquark

                         c. Two up quarks and a down quark 

                         d. Strange quark and an anti-strange quark

                       2. Particles that are un affected by strong nuclear force are

                          a. Protons    b. Leptons    c.     Neutrons   d.     Bosons

                       3. Particle which explains about mass of matter is called 

                          a. Higgs boson   b. Protons     c.     Leptons     d.    Neutrons

                       4. Describe the types and the characteristics of the quarks as well as their interaction properties.

                    9.3 BARYON NUMBER, LEPTON NUMBER AND THEIR LAWS OF CONSERVATION 

                    Activity 9.3: Investigating about particle numbers

                    Use search internet and retrieve the meaning of the following property of elementary particles.

                          • Baryon numbers and

                          • Lepton 

                    One of the important uses of high energy accelerators is to study the interactions of elementary particles with each other. As a means of ordering this sub-nuclear world, the conservation laws are indispensable. The law of conservation of energy, of momentum, of angular momentum, and of electric charge is found to hold precisely in all particle interactions.

                    A study of particle interactions has revealed a number of new conservation laws which (just like the old ones) are ordering principles. They help to explain why some reactions occur and others do not. For example, the following reactions have never been found to occur: 

                                                      

                    Even though charge, energy, and so on are conserved (p with bar over means an antiproton and  allow means the reaction does not occur). To understand why such a reaction does not occur, physicists hypothesized a new conservation law, the conservation of baryon number.

                    Thus the law of conservation of baryon number states that: “Whenever a nuclear reaction or decay occurs, the sum of baryon numbers before the process must equal the sum of the baryon numbers after the process.”

                    Baryon number is a generalization of nucleon number, which is conserved in nuclear reaction and decays. All nucleons are defined to have baryon number B=+1 , and all antinucleons (antiprotons, antineutrons) have . All other types of particles, such as photons, mesons, and electrons and other leptons have B=0.

                            

                           

                        

                    9.4 SPIN STRUCTURES OF HADRONS (HADRONS AND MESONS)

                    Activity 9.5: Investigating the structure of elementary particles 

                    Use search internet and find the structure of elementary particles: Hadrons and mesons. Discuss and explain your findings in a brief summary about structure of hadrons.

                    There are hundreds of hadrons, on the other hand, and experiments indicate they do have an internal structure. In 1963, M. Gell-Mann and G. Zweig proposed that none of the hadrons, not even the proton and neutron, are more fundamental, point like entities called, somewhat whimsically, quarks. Today, the quark theory is well accepted, and quarks are considered the truly elementary particles, like leptons. The three quarks originally proposed we labeled u, d, s and have the names up, down and strange. The theory today has six quarks, just as there are six leptons based on presumed symmetry in nature, 

                    The other three quarks are called charmed, bottom and top (see Fig.9.2). The theory names apply also to new properties of each (quantum numbers c, t, b) that distinguish the new quarks from the old quarks (see Table 9.1below), and which (like strangeness) are conserved in strong, but not weak, interactions. All quarks have spin 1/2 and an electric charge of either+2/3e or -1/2e (that is, a fraction of the previously thought smallest charge e). Antiquarks have opposite sign of electric charge Q, baryon number B, strangeness S, charm c, bottomness b, and topness t. 

                             

                                 

                           

                                                                     Table 9. 3 Properties of  some baryons

                    After the quark theory was proposed, physicists began looking for those fractionally charged particles, but direct detection has not been successful. Current models suggest that quarks may be so tightly bound together that they may not ever exist singly in the free State. 

                    But observations of very high energy electrons scattered off protons suggest that protons are indeed made up of constituents. 

                    Today, the truly elementary particles are considered to be the six quarks, the six leptons and the gauge bosons that carry the fundamental forces. See Table 9.4 where the quarks and leptons are arranged in three “generations.” Ordinary matter-atoms made of protons, neutrons, and electrons are contained in the “first generation”. Theothers are thought to have existed in the very early universe, but are seen by us today at powerful accelerators or in cosmic rays. All of the hundreds of hadrons can be accounted for by combinations of the six quarks and six antiquarks.

                                  

                    Note that the quarks and leptons are arranged into three generations each. 

                    Example 9.1 1.

                    Find the baryon number, charge, and strangeness for the following quark combinations, and identify the hadrons particle that is made up of these quark combinations:

                          

                         

                    9.5 COLOR IN FORMING OF BOUND STATES OF QUARKS.

                    Activity 9.6: Investigating the bound state of an atom

                    Take the case of an electronic configuration of hydrogen atom. Make the illustration and then contrast the interaction between electron and proton and bound state of elementary particles.

                    9.6.1 Bound state of quarks

                    In the hydrogen atom configuration, the proton is located at centre while electron moves around it at a speed of about 1% the speed of light. The proton is heavy while the electron is light (See Fig.9.3)

                                            

                    This is the simplest example of what physicists call a “bound state”. The word “state” basically just meaning a thing that hangs around for a while, and the word “bound” meaning that it has components that are bound to each other, as spouses are bound in marriage.

                    The inside of the proton itself is more like a commune packed full of single adults and children: pure chaos.  It too is a bound state, but what it binds is not something as simple as a proton and an electron, as in hydrogen, or even a few dozen electrons to an atomic nucleus, as in more complicated atoms such as gold, but zillions (meaning “too many and too changeable to count usefully”) of lightweight particles called quarks, antiquarks and gluons. It is impossible to describe the proton’s structure simply, or draw simple pictures, because it’s highly disorganized.  All the quarks and antiquarks and gluons (see Fig.9.4) inside are rushing around as fast as possible, at nearly the speed of light (Strassler, 2011).

                                                            

                    Fig.9. 4 Snapshot of a proton: Imagine all of the quarks (up, down, and strange: u, d, s), antiquarks (u, d, s with a bar on top), and gluons (g) zipping around near the speed of light, banging into each other, and appearing and disappearing (Strassler, 2011) 

                    You may have heard that a proton is made from three quarks but this is not true. In fact there are billions of gluons, antiquarks, and quarks in a proton. 

                    9.6.2 Color in forming of bound states of quarks.

                    In the standard model of Quantum Chromodynamics (QCD) and the electroweak theory (Giancoli D. C., Physics: principals with application, 2005), not long after the quark theory was proposed, it was suggested that quarks have another property (or quality) called color, or ‘color charge’ (analogous to electric charge). The distinction between the six quarks (u, d, s, c, b, t) was referred to as flavors.

                    According to the theory, each of the flavors of quark can have three colors, usually designated red, green and blue. These are the three primary colors which, when added together in equal amounts, as on a TV screen, produce white. Note that the names ‘color’ and ‘flavor’ have nothing to do with our sense, but are purely whimsical as are other names, such as charm, in this new field.The antiquarks are colored antired, antigreen and antiblue. Baryons are made up of three quarks, one of each color. Mesons consist of quark-antiquark pair of a particular color and its anticolor. Both baryons and mesons are thus colorless or white. 

                    Originally, the idea of quark color was proposed to preserve the Pauli exclusion principle. Not all particles obey the exclusion principle. Those that do, such as 

                    6.3 Colour as component of quarks and gluons 

                    Activity 9.7: Investigating the origin of color 

                    When a metal like iron is heated red-hot, one can observe the change in color. As the energy increases, as the color changes. Use the same experiment and discuss on the following questions

                     1. As the color changes in the metal, what are the scientific reasons behind that?

                     2. Explain the matter−energy interaction and their consequences

                     3. What is color in the field of elementary particles?

                    The attractive interactions among quarks are mediated by massless spin  bosons called gluons in much the same way that photons mediate the electromagnetic interaction or that pions mediated the nucleon–nucleon force in the old Yukawa theory (Nagashima, 2013).

                    Particles were classified into two categories: 

                    Quarks and leptons have an intrinsic angular momentum called spin, equal to a halfinteger (1/2) of the basic unit and are labeled as fermions. Fermions obey the exclusion 

                    principle on which the Fermi-Dirac distribution function is based. This would seem to forbid a baryon having two or three quarks with the same flavor and same spin component. To avoid this difficulty, it is assumed that each quark comes in three varieties, which are called color: red, green, and blue. The exclusion principle applies separately to each color. Particles that have zero or integer spin are called bosons.  Bosons do not obey the exclusion principle and have a different distribution function, the Bose-Einstein distribution.

                      • A baryon always contains one red, one green, and one blue quark, so the baryon itself has no net color. 

                      • Each gluon has a color–anticolor combination (for example, blue–antired) that allows it to transmit color when exchanged, and color is conserved during emission and absorption of a gluon by a quark. 

                      • The gluon-exchange process changes the colors of the quarks in such a way that there is always one quark of each color in every baryon. The color of an individual quark changes continually as gluons are exchanged

                    Similar processes occur in mesons such as pions:

                       • The quark–antiquark pairs of mesons have canceling color and anticolor (for example, blue and antiblue), so mesons also have no net color. Suppose a pion initially consists of a blue quark and an antiblue antiquark.

                       • The blue quark can become a red quark by emitting a blue–antired virtual gluon.

                    The gluon is then absorbed by the antiblue antiquark, converting it to an antired antiquark (Fig. 9.8). Color is conserved in each emission and absorption, but a blue– antiblue pair has become a red–antired pair. Such changes occur continually, so we
                    have to think of a pion as a superposition of three quantum states:

                        • Blue–antiblue,

                        • Green–antigreen, and

                        • Red–antired. 

                    In terms of quarks and gluons, these mediating virtual mesons are quark–antiquark systems bound together by the exchange of gluons.

                                

                    Fig.9. 5 (a) A pion containing a blue quark and an antiblue antiquark. (b) The blue quark emits a blue–antired gluon, changing to a red quark. (c) The gluon is absorbed by the antiblue antiquark, which becomes an antired antiquark. The pion now consists of a red–antired quark–antiquark pair. The actual quantum state of the pion is an equal superposition of red–antired, green antigreen, and blue–antiblue pairs.

                    9.6.4 Checking my understanding

                    1. Label the illustration below and analyze the interaction between its particles

                                        

                                                           Fig.9. 6 Illustration diagram
                         1. Define and describe the following key concept:

                             I. Color charge:

                             II. Gluons 

                             III. Quantum chromodynamics 

                        2. Which one of the following sets of color combinations is added in color vision in TV’?
                            a. Red, green and blue  c.     White. red and yellow b. Orange, back and violet  d.     Yellow, green and blue 

                        3. What are the color composition of a. Gluons b. Meson c. Baryon

                    9.6 END UNIT ASSEMENT 

                     9.7.1 Multiple choices 

                    1. A proton is made up of 

                       a. One up quark and two down quarks 

                       b. An up quark and down antiquark

                       c. Two up quarks and a down quark

                       d. Strange quark and an antistrange quark

                    2. Particles that are unaffected by strong nuclear force are

                       a. Protons

                       b. Neutrons 

                       c. Teptons 

                       d. Bosons

                    3. Particle which explains about mass of matter is called

                       a. Higgs boson   b. Leptons   c.     Protons    d.    Neutrons

                    4. A conservation law that is not universal but applies only to certain kinds of interactions is conservation of: 

                       a. Lepton number   b. Baryon number      c. Spin      d.  Charge    e.     Strangeness 

                    5. In quantum electrodynamics (QED), electromagnetic forces are mediated by

                       a. the interaction of electrons.

                       b. hadrons.

                      c. D. the weak nuclear interaction.

                      d. action at a distance.

                      e. E. the exchange of virtual photons. 

                    6. Conservation laws that describe events involving the elementary particles include the conservation of energy.

                        a. All of these are correct.

                        b. electric charge.

                        c.  baryon and lepton numbers.

                        d. linear and angular momentum.

                    7. The conservation law violated by the reaction is the
                        conservation of 

                        a. Charge.    

                        b. Energy.  

                        c. Linear momentum.

                        d. Lepton number and baryon number.

                        e. Angular momentum.

                    8. Particles that participate in the strong nuclear interaction are called 

                        a. Neutrinos

                        b. Hadrons

                        c. Leptons

                        d. Electrons

                        e. Photons

                    9.7.2 Structured questions 

                    9. In the table cross-word below, find at least fifteen names associated to elementary particles. Among them, select ones that represents quarks, leptons or radiations.

                         

                    10.a. Making massive particles: Relatively massive particles like the proton and neutron are made of combinations of three quarks.

                      I. What is the charge on the combination uuu?

                      II. What is the charge on the combination uud?

                     III. What is the charge on the combination udd?

                     IV. What is the charge on the combination ddd


                    •    

                      X rays are today most used at hospitals in radiology service for imaging purpose. 

                      Key unit Competence 

                      By the end of the unit, I should be able to analyze and evaluate the effects of X-rays. 

                      My goals

                       • Explain the production of X-rays

                       • State the properties of X-rays.

                       • Explain the origin and characteristic features of an x-ray spectrum.

                       • Outline the applications of X-rays in medicine, industries, and scientific research 

                       • Solve problems involving accelerating potential and minimum wavelength of X-rays. 

                       • Recognize how the intensity and quality of X-rays can be controlled. 

                       • Appreciate the use of X-rays in medicine and industry 

                      Introductory activity 

                      When a person goes to the hospital with pain in her/his chest, or with an internal fracture of the bone, physicians do normally recommend the patient to pass by radiology service. Hence try to answer the following questions:
                        1. Why do physicians recommend patients to pass by radiology service?

                        2. Radiology means that there are radiations. Discuss different types of radiations that are found in there?

                        3. Discuss the production of X-ray radiations.

                        4. What are the positive and negative effects of X-ray radiation on the human body?

                      10.1 PRODUCTION OF X-RAYS AND THEIR PROPERTIES 

                      Activity 10.1: Investigating the production of  X-rays 

                      Read the following text and answer the questions that follow. 

                      Discovery of X-rays: Becquerel’s discovery wasn’t the only important accidental one. In the previous year W.C. Roentgen unexpectedly discovered X-rays while studying the behavior of electrons in a high-voltage vacuum tube. In that instance, a nearby material was made to fluoresce. Roentgen named them X- rays because he didn’t know what they were.

                      Within twenty years of this discovery, diffraction patterns produced using X-rays on crystal structures had begun to show the finer structure of crystals while, at the same time, giving evidence that X-rays had a wave nature. Since then, X-ray radiation has become an indispensable imaging tool in medical science. 

                      Questions:

                       1. What do you understand by X-rays?

                       2. How are X-rays produced?

                       3. Where are X-rays used? 

                      10.1.1 X-ray production 

                      X-rays are produced when fast moving electrons strike matter (see Fig.10.1). They were first produced in 1895 by Wilhelm Rontgen (1845-1923), using an apparatus similar in principle to the setup shown in Fig.10.1. Electrons are emitted from the heated cathode by thermionic emission and are accelerated toward the anode (the target) by a large potential difference V . The bulb is evacuated (residual pressure 10-7 atm or less), so that the electrons can travel from the cathode to the anode without colliding with air molecules. It was observed that when V is a few thousands volts or more, a very penetrating radiation is emitted from the anode surface.

                                            

                      The above figure is an illustration of the Coolidge tube which is the most widely used device for the production of X-rays. The electrons are produced by thermionic effect from filament, which is the cathode of the tube, heated by an electric current. These electrons are accelerated towards a metal target that is the anode due to the high potential voltage between the cathode and the anode. 

                      The target metals are normally Tungsten or Molybdenum and are chosen because they have high melting point and higher atomic weights. The accelerated electrons interact with both electrons and nuclei of atoms in the target and a mysterious radiation is emitted. This radiation was referred to as X-rays. 

                      About 98% of the energy of the incident electron is converted into heat that is evacuated by the cooling system and the remaining 2% come out as X-rays.

                      10.1.2 Types of X-rays 

                      Sometimes X-rays are classified according to their penetrating power. Two types are mentioned:

                       • Hard X-rays:  those are X-rays on upper range of frequencies or shorter wavelength. They have greater energy and so they are more penetrating.

                       • Soft X-rays: they are X-rays on lower range of frequencies or longer wavelength. They have lower energy and they have very low penetrating power. The Fig.10.2 below shows the relative location of the different types of X-rays.

                      Hard X-rays are produced by high accelerating potential. They have high penetrating power and short wavelength while soft X-rays are produced by lower accelerating potential, have relatively low penetrating power and relatively long wavelength.

                              

                      10.1.3 Properties of X-rays 

                      Activity 10.2: Understanding the pros and cons of X-rays 

                      Make intensive research on the production and the properties of X-rays, then write a report about your findings.

                      The following are the main properties of X-rays:

                         a. X-rays can penetrate through most substances. However, their penetrating power is different.

                         b. X-ray can produce fluorescence in different substances.

                         c. X-rays can blacken photographic plate. The degree of blackening depends upon the intensity of x-rays incident upon the plate. Thus, X-ray intensity can be measured with the help of photographic plates.

                         d. X-rays ionize the gas through which they travel. The ionizing power depends on the intensity of the x-ray beam. Thus, X-ray intensity can also be measured by measuring their ionizing power.

                         e. X-rays are not deflected by electric or magnetic fields. This proves that unlike cathode rays or positive rays they are not a beam of charged particles.

                         f. X-rays travels on a straight lines like ordinary light.

                         g. X-ray are both reflected and refracted.

                         h. X-rays can be diffracted with the help of crystalline substances. They can also be polarized. 

                      From the above characteristics it can be seen that X-rays have the properties that are common to all electromagnetic radiations. 

                      10.1.4 Checking my progress 

                      1. Describe the process by which X-rays are produced.

                       2. Discuss and describe the types of X-rays?

                       3. What is the meaning of the X in X-ray?

                       4.  How are X-rays diffrent from other electromagnetic radiations?

                      10.2 THE ORIGINS AND CHARACTERISTIC FEATURES OF AN X-RAY SPECTRUM

                      Activity 10.3 investigating the X-ray spectrum 

                      During the production of X-rays, a high voltage must be applied across the x rays tube to produce enough acceleration of electrons towards the target. Search internet, then discuss and explain the relationship between the applied

                      10.2.1 Variation of the X-ray intensity with wavelength 

                      Depending on the accelerating voltage and the target element, we may find sharp peaks superimposed on a continuous spectrum as indicated on Fig.10.3. These peaks are at different wavelengths for different elements; they form what is called a characteristic x-ray spectrum for each target element.

                                      

                      X-rays of different wavelengths are emitted from X-ray tube. If the intensity is measured as a function of the wavelength and the variation is plotted graphically then a graph of the nature shown on the figure above is obtained.The graph has the following features:

                          a. Minimum wavelength

                          b. Continuous spectrum

                          c. Characteristic peaks

                      10.2.2 Origin of the continuous spectrum 

                      It is known that when charged particles such as electrons are accelerated or decelerated they emit electromagnetic radiation of different frequencies. In doing so a part of their kinetic energy is transformed in the energy of the emitted radiation. Electrons inside the x-ray tube decelerate upon hitting the target and as a result they emit electromagnetic radiations with a continuous distribution of wavelength starting from a certain minimum wavelength. This mechanism of producing electromagnetic radiation from an accelerated or decelerated electron is called bremsstrahlung.

                           

                                    

                      For a transition between K and L-shells. Thus the energy of the emitted photon depends on the binding energies in the K and L shells and hence the x-ray spectral lines have definite frequencies and wavelengths which are characteristic of the target atom.

                      For a given target material more than one spectral lines are observed as transitions may occur between different energy levels.  

                                          

                      The X-ray lines originating from the transition between the different electron levels are usually labelled by the symbols α, β, γ, etc.

                       From L-level to K-level transition produces Kα-line

                       From M-level to K-level transition produces Kβ –line

                       From M-level to L-level transition produces Lα –line

                       From N-level to L- level transition produces Lβ –line

                      10.2.4 Checking my progress

                      1. What is the characteristic of X-ray characteristic peak radiation?

                      2. How is X-ray continuum produced via bremsstrahlung?

                      3. X-rays are generated when a highly accelerated charged particle such aselectrons collide with target material of an X-ray tube. The resulting X-rays have two characteristics: the continuous X-rays (also called white X-rays) and characteristic X-rays peaks. The wavelength distribution and intensity of continuous X-rays are usually depending upon the applied voltage and a clear limit is recognized on the short wavelength side.

                         a. Estimate the speed of electron before collision when applied voltage is 30kV and compare it with the speed of light in vacuum.

                         b. In addition, establish the expression of the shortest wavelength limit   λmin of X-rays generated with the applied voltage V. it is obtained when the incident electron loses all its energy in a single collision.

                       10.3 APPLICATIONS AND DANGERS OF X-RAYS 

                      Activity 10.4: Investigation of X-rays uses and dangers

                       1. Using the historical background of X-ray discovery, what are the uses of X-rays in real life?

                       2. Discuss the dangers that X-rays may cause when they are used in a wrong way.

                      X-rays have many practical applications in medicine and industry. Because X-ray photons are of such high energy, they can penetrate several centimetres of solid matter. Hence they can be used to visualize the interiors of materials that are opaque to ordinary light, such as broken bones or defects in structural steel. 

                      10.3.1 In medicine

                          

                      X-ray imaging utilizes the ability of high frequency electromagnetic waves to pass through soft parts of the human body largely unimpeded. For medical applications, parts of the human body are exposed to moderated X-rays intensity and images are produced in similar way as light on a photographic plate or digital recorder to produce a radiograph (See Fig.10.7). 

                      By rotating both source and detector around the patient’s body a “slice” image can be produced in what is called computerized tomography (CT). Although CT scans expose the patient to higher doses of ionizing radiation the slice images produced make it possible to see the structures of the body in three dimensions.

                      In 1895, the Dutch Wilhelm Roentgen (See Fig.10.8) discovered that light energy could be used to take photographs through substances such as paper, cloths and wood. Roentgen also discovered that this invisible form of light energy, called X-rays could be used to take the pictures of structures inside the body as shown in Fig. below. Bone tissue appears clearly on an X-rays. 

                      The object to be visualized is placed between an X-ray source and an electronic detector (like that used in a digital camera) or a piece of photographic film (Fig.10.8 or Fig.10.8B). The darker area in the recorded images by such a detector, the greater the radiation exposure. Bones are much more effective X-ray absorbers than soft tissue, so bones appear as light areas. A crack or air bubble allows greater transmission and shows as a dark area.

                             

                      A widely used and vastly improved x-ray technique is computed tomography; the corresponding instrument is called a CT scanner. The x-ray source produces a thin, fan-shaped beam that is detected on the opposite side of the subject by an array of several hundred detectors in a line. Each detector measures absorption along a thin line through the subject. The entire apparatus is rotated around the subject in the plane of the beam, and the changing photon-counting rates of the detectors are recorded digitally. A computer processes this information and reconstructs a picture of absorption over an entire cross section of the subject.

                      In the middle 1970, CT (Computer Tomography) scanning machines were introduced in human medicine.

                      X-rays are also used in the following:  • Killing of cancerous cells • Radiography is also used in industry for examining potentially damaged machinery to ascertain the cause of damage and to verify castings or welded joints • X-rays are used to study the structure of crystals (crystallography). • When a handgun is fired, a cloud of gunshot residue (GSR) is ejected from the barrel. The x-ray emission spectrum of GSR includes characteristic peaks from lead (Pb), antimony (Sb), and barium (Ba). If a sample taken from a suspect’s skin or clothing has an x-ray emission spectrum with these characteristics, it indicates that the suspect recently fired a gun. 

                      10.3.2 Examining luggage cargo and security.

                          

                      X-rays are being used in airports to examine luggage for weapons or bombs. Note that the metal detector that you walk through in the airport does not X-ray you. It uses magnetic waves to detect metal objects. X-rays are also being used to examine cargo luggage for illegal or dangerous material as in Fig.10.9

                      10.3.3 In industry

                                 

                      They can be used to detect structural problems and cracks in metals that cannot be seen from the outside. X-rays are used on commercial airplanes, bridges metals and pipe lines, to make sure there are no stress fractures or other dangerous cracks in the material. 

                      10.3.4 In scientific research

                       • X-ray diffraction provides one of the most important tools for examining the three-dimensional (3D) structure of biological macromolecules and cells.

                        • They are also used in crystallography, where X-ray diffraction and scattered waves show the arrangement of atoms in the crystal.

                              
                      The array of spots formed on the film is called a Laue pattern and show the atom structure of the crystal. 

                      10.3.5 Dangers of X-rays

                      • X rays cause damage to living tissues. As X-ray photons are absorbed in tissues, their energy breaks molecular bonds and creates highly reactive free radicals (such as neutral H and OH), which in turn can disturb the molecular structure of proteins and especially genetic material. Young and rapidly growing cells are particularly susceptible, which is why X-rays are useful for selective destruction of cancer cells.

                        • Because X-rays can kill living cells, they must be used with extreme care. When improperly used they can cause severe burns, cancer, leukemia, and cataracts. They can speed aging, reduce immunity to disease, and bring about disastrous changes in the reproductive cells. 

                        • Lead screens, sheets of lead-impregnated rubber, and leaded glass are used to shield patients and technicians from undesired radiation.

                        • The effect of X-ray radiations is cumulative. That is, many minor doses over a number of years is equivalent to a large dose at one time.

                        • Unnecessary exposure to x-rays should be avoided. MRI (Magnetic Resonance Imaging) uses magnets and sound energy to form pictures of the internal organs without exposing patients to harmful X-rays.

                        • When they are used in hospitals, the sources should be enclosed in lead shields.

                         • A careful assessment of the balance between risks and benefits of radiation exposure is essential in each individual case.

                      10.3.6 Safety precaution measures of dangers caused by X-rays 

                      Medical and dental X-rays are of very low intensity, so that the hazard is minimized. However, X-ray technicians who go frequently behind the lead shield while operating X-rays need to be protected because of the frequency of exposure. A person can receive many medical or dental X-rays in a year with very little risk of getting cancer from it. In fact, exposure to natural radiation such as cosmic rays from space poses a greater risk.

                      The following are some of the precautions:

                        I. Protective suits and wears such as gloves and eye glasses made of lead are used always when handling these radiations. These shields protect the workers from X-ray exposure.

                       II.  Workers who operate equipment’s that use X-rays must wear special badges which detect the amount of radiation they are exposed to.

                       III. Food and drinks are not allowed in places where X-radiations are present.

                       IV. Experiments that involve these radiations (X-rays) substances should be conducted in a room surrounded by thick concrete walls or lead shields.

                       V. Equipment that use X-rays should be handled using remote-controlled mechanical arms from a safe distance.

                      10.3.7 Checking my progress

                         1. How do we create different X-ray images in medicine?

                         2. What are the dangers that may be caused by using excessive dose of X-rays?

                      10.4 PROBLEMS INVOLVING ACCELERATING POTENTIAL AND MINIMUM WAVELENGTH. 

                      10.4.1 Accelerating potential and minimum wavelength 

                      Activity 10.5 Calculation of accelerating potential in X-ray tube

                      An x-rays tube operates at 30 kV and the current through it is 2.0 mA. Calculate: 

                      a. The electrical power output

                      b. The number of electrons striking the target per second.

                      c. The speed of the electrons when they hit the target

                      d. The lower wavelength limit of the X-rays emitted.

                      When a high voltage with several tenso fk Vis applied between two electrodes, the high-speed electrons with sufficient kinetic energy is drawn out from the cathode and collides with the anode. The electrons rapidly slow down and lose kinetic energy. Since the slowing down patterns(method of losing kinetic energy) varies with electrons, continuous X-rays with various wavelength are generated. When an electron loses all its energy in a single collision, the generated X-ray has the maximum energy(orthe shortest wavelength ).The value oft he shortestwavelengthlimitcanbeestimatedfromtheacceleratingvoltageVbetween electrodes.

                           

                      Typical X-ray wavelengths are 10-12 m  to 10-9m  . X-ray wavelength can be measured quite precisely by crystal diffraction techniques. X-ray emission is the inverse of the photoelectric effect. In photoelectric emission there is a transformation of the energy of a photon into the kinetic energy of an electron, in X-ray production there is a transformation of the kinetic energy of an electron into energy of a photon.

                      In X-ray production we usually neglect the work function of the target and the initial kinetic energy of the boiled off electrons because they are very small in comparison to the other energies.
                       
                       . X-ray wavelength can be measured quite precisely by crystal diffraction techniques. X-ray emission is the inverse of the photoelectric effect. In photoelectric emission there is a transformation of the energy of a photon into the kinetic energy of an electron, in X-ray production there is a transformation of the kinetic energy of an electron into energy of a photon. In X-ray production we usually neglect the work function of the target and the initial kinetic energy of the boiled off electrons because they are very small in comparison to the other energies.
                      Example Electrons in an X-ray tube accelerate through a potential difference of 10.0 kV before striking a target. If an electron produces one photon on impact with the target, what is the minimum wavelength of the resulting X- rays? (Answer using both SI units and electron volts.
                      Answer To produce an x-ray photon with minimum wavelength and hence maximum energy, all of the electron’s kinetic energy must go into producing a single x-ray

                           


                       Constructive interference occurs only when the path difference between rays scattered from parallel crystal planes would be an integer number of wavelengths of the radiation. When the crystal planes are separated by a distance d, the path length difference would be 2dsin θ. 

                                   

                         

                      10.5 END UNIT ASSESSMENT

                      10.5.1 Multiple choices

                        1. Choose the letter that best matches the true answer: I. X-rays have

                            a. Short wavelength  b. high frequency  c. Both A and B  d.     Longest wavelength

                         I. If fast moving electrons rapidly decelerate, then rays produced are 

                            a. Alpha rays   c. beta rays b. x-rays   d. gamma rays 

                         II. Energy passing through unit area is

                            a. Intensity of x-ray  c.     wavelength of x-ray b. Frequency of x-ray  d.     Amplitude of x-ray

                         IV.  X-rays are filtered out of human body by using 

                            a. Cadmium absorbers c. Copper absorbers b. Carbon absorbers  d. Aluminum absorbers 

                          V. Wavelength of x-rays is in range 

                             a. 10-8 m to 10-13 m  c. 10-10 m to 10-15 m b. 10-7 m to 10-14 m   d. 102 m to 109

                      10.5.2 Structured questions 

                       2. A plot of x-ray intensity as a function of wavelength for a particular accelerating voltage and a particular target is shown in Fig.10.5. 

                                      
                                               Fig.10. 5Characteristics of x rays spectrum
                        a. There are two main components of this x-ray spectrum: a broad range of x-ray energies and a couple of sharp peaks. Explain how each of these arises.

                        b. What is the origin of the cut-off wavelength min λ of the Fig.10.5 shown below? Why is it an important clue to the photon nature of x-rays?

                        c. What would happen to the cut-off wavelength if the accelerating voltage was increased? What would happen to the characteristic peaks? Use a sketch to show how this spectrum would look if the accelerating voltage was increased.

                        d. What would happen to the cut-off wavelength if the target was changed, keep the same accelerating voltage? What would happen to the characteristic peaks? Use a sketch to show how the spectrum would look if some other target material was used, but the accelerating voltage was kept the same

                       3. Electrons are accelerated from rest through a p.d of 10 kV in an x ray tube. Calculate:

                          I. The resultant energy of the electrons in eV.

                         II. The wavelength of the associated electron waves. (1.23x10-11m) 

                        III. The maximum energy and the minimum wavelength of the x ray radiation generated

                             

                      4. MonochromaticX-rayofwavelength 1.2x 10-10m are incidentonacrystal. The1st order diffraction maximum is observed at when theangle between the incident beam and the atomicplaneis120. Whatistheseparationoftheatomicplanesresponsibleforthediffraction? 

                      5. An x-ray operates at 30 kV and the current through it is 2.0 mA. Calculate:

                         I. The electrical power output

                         II. The number of electrons striking the target per second.

                         III. The speed of the electrons when they hit the target

                         IV. The lower wavelength limit of the x-rays emitted.

                       6. An x-ray machine can accelerate electrons of energies 4.8x10-15J . The shortest wavelength of the x- rays produced by the machine is found to be 4.1x10-11 m  Use this information to estimate the value of the plank constant.

                      7. The spacing between Principal planes of  Nacl crystal is  2.82A0 . It is found that the first order Bragg diffraction occurs at an angle of 100. What is the wavelength of the x rays? 

                      8. What is the kinetic energy of an electron with a de Broglie wavelength of 0.1 nm. Through what p.d should it be accelerated to achieve this value? Assume e, me, h. 

                      9. You have decided to build your own x-ray machine out of an old television set. The electrons in the TV set are accelerated through a potential difference of 20 kV. What will be the ƛmin for this accelerating potential? 

                      10. A tungsten target (Z = 74) is bombarded by electrons in an x-ray tube.  The K, L, and M atomic x-ray energy levels for tungsten are -69.5, -11.3 and -2.30 keV, respectively. 

                       a. Why are the energy levels given as negative values? 

                       b. What is the minimum kinetic energy of the bombarding electrons that will permit the production of the characteristic K α and K β lines of tungsten? 

                       c. What is the minimum value of the accelerating potential that will give electrons this minimum kinetic energy? 

                       d. What are the Kα and Kß wavelengths? 

                      11. Using the following illustration figure Fig.10.6, label each part marked by letter from A to H and explain the function of each part A, B, C, D, E, F and H.
                                          

                                                                            Fig.10. 6 X ray tube illustration

                      •                

                        Key unit Competence 

                        By the end of this unit I should be able to analyze the application of LASER. 

                        My goals 

                         • Define a laser beam

                         • Explain the stimulated emission of light

                         • Explain the spontaneous emission of light

                         • Analyse the mechanism to produce LASER beam

                         • Explain laser properties

                         • Explain and describe monochromatic and coherent sources of light 

                         • Analyse a LASER light as a source of coherent light.

                          • Explain the principle and uses of Laser.

                          • Outline applications of LASER

                          • Analyse applications and dangers of LASER beam

                          • Analyse precautional measures of the negative effects of Laser.

                        Introductory activity 

                        A man has tied all forms of advancements from traditional methods of solving problems to advanced methods by use of different technologies. Among other technological advancements, discovery of Laser that is a part of visible light under electromagnetic waves has had a great impact in solving many of our problems.

                          a. What do you understand by Electromagnetic waves?

                          b. Discuss at least four (4) characteristics of Electromagnetic waves

                          c. In your own words, discuss how these electromagnetic waves are produced.

                          d. Are all kinds of these electromagnetic waves have the same energy? If Yes why? If No, why not?

                          e. Basing on what you know about these electromagnetic waves, what could be positive uses of these waves. Also discuss negative effects of electromagnetic waves.

                          f. How are electromagnetic waves related to LASERS?

                        11.1 CONCEPT OF LASER 

                        Activity 11.1

                            a. From your own understanding, explain how a LASER light is produced.

                            b. Does production, need source of energy like electricity. Explain your reasoning.

                            c. In energy levels, particles are either in ground or excited states. Is laser formed when particles or                 electrons are in ground or excited states? 

                                Explain your reasoning.

                        The acronym LASER stands for Light Amplifier by Stimulated Emission of Radiation. This expression means that the light is formed by stimulating a material’s electrons to give out the laser light or radiation.

                        The laser is a device that uses the ability of some substances to absorb electromagnetic energy and re-radiate it, as a highly focused beam of monochromatic and synchronized wavelength radiation. In 1953 Charles H. Townes, with graduate students James P. and Herbert J., produced the first Microwave Amplifier by Stimulated Emission of Radiation (MASER), as a device operating in the same way as a laser, but amplifying microwave radiations. 

                        This system could release stimulated emissions without falling to the ground state, and thus maintaining a population inversion. A laser is a device that emits light through a process of optical amplification based on the stimulated emission of electromagnetic radiation. That is, the laser is a light source that produces a beam of highly coherent and very nearly monochromatic light because of cooperative emission from many atoms.

                        11.1.1 Absorption, Spontaneous emission and Stimulated emission 

                        Activity 11.2 1. Using scientific explanations

                        Explain the meaning of the following terms

                          I. Absorption

                          II. Stimulated emission

                         III. Spontaneous emission

                        2. Electrons can jump from excited to ground state; does it absorb or radiate energy. 

                            Explain your reasoning.

                        3. Write an equation that would be used to calculate the energy radiated by an electron when it jumps from     one energy level to another. 

                            Explain each term used in the equation.

                        4. What do you understand by the term population inversion?

                        a.  Absorption 

                        During the process of absorption, a photon from the source is destroyed and the atom which was at the ground state is promoted to the excited state. 

                                                            

                        If no is the  number of atoms per unit volume in the ground state with energy Eg, then the number of atoms per unit volume in the excited state of energy Eex at temperature T, will depend on both the thermal energy and the difference between the energy levels and is given by

                        b. Spontaneous emission. 

                        An atom or an electron can move from one energy level to another. A photon is released when an electron moves from a higher energy level to a lower energy level. The release of photon (a particle of light) is called spontaneous emission. 

                        At the excited state, an atom will drop to a lower level by emitting a photon of radiation in a process called spontaneous emission. It emits the photon spontaneously after an average time τ called the spontaneous lifetime of the level. This time depends on the atomic species; some levels have long lifetime measured in seconds, whereas others are relatively short on the order of nanoseconds or less. This lifetime determines the ability of the emitting atom to store energy and will affect the efficiency of sources.

                        C. Stimulated emission 

                        Stimulated emission occurs when a photon strikes an atom that is excited state and makes the atom emit another photon
                        In stimulated emission (Fig. 11.3), each incident photon encounters a previously excited atom. A kind of resonance effect induces each atom to emit a second photon with the same frequency, direction, phase, and polarization as the incident photon, which is not changed by the process. For each atom there is one photon before a stimulated emission and two photons after—thus the name lightamplification. Because the two photons have the same phase, they emerge together as coherent radiation.

                        In this case the energy difference between the two levels is emitted in the form of electromagnetic wave that adds to the incident one. This is the phenomenon of stimulated emission. 

                        There is a fundamental difference between the spontaneous and stimulated emission processes because in spontaneous emission one photon is emitted and in stimulated emission both incident and emitted photons are observed.

                        11.1.2 Laser principle 

                        The principle of operation remains the same though there is a wide range of lasers. Laser action occurs in three stages: photon absorption, spontaneous emission, and stimulated emission. The particle of the material, which undergoes the process of excitation, might be an atom, molecule, or ion depending on the laser material. This principle is based on the principle of stimulated emission of radiation, the theory that was discussed by Einstein in 1917.The whole concept was discussed in the previous section.

                        The photon emitted during stimulated emission has the same energy as the incident photon and it is emitted in the same direction as the latter, thus, getting two coherent photons. If these two coherent photons are incident on other two atoms in E2, then it will result in emission of two more photons and hence four coherent photons of the same energy are emitted. The process continues leading to doubling of the present number of photons.

                              

                        If the process is made to go on chain, we ultimately can increase the intensity of coherent radiation enormously. In figure above, such amplification of the number of the coherent photons due to stimulated emission is shown.

                        The necessary condition for this type of amplification of light intensity by stimulated emission of radiation is that number of atoms in the upper energy state E2 must be sufficiently increased.

                        11.1.3 Population inversion 

                        Population inversion: This is the process of increasing excited electrons in higher energy levels. 

                        This is the redistribution of atomic energy levels that takes place in a system so that action can occur.

                                              

                        There are different methods of achieving population inversion in atomic states that is essential requirement to produce laser beam. Normally, most of the atoms in a medium are in the ground state of energy E0. There are four different methods of making these atoms to excited states. 

                            I. Excitation with the help of photons. If the atoms are exposed to an electromagnetic radiation of high frequency, then there is selective absorption of energy and thus atoms are raised to excited state. 

                           II. Excitation by electrons. This method is used in some gas lasers. Electrons are released from the atoms due to high voltage electric discharge through a gas. These electrons are then accelerated to high velocities due to high electric field inside a discharge tube. When they collide with neutral gas atoms, a fraction of these atoms are raised to excited state

                                              

                           III. Inelastic collision between atoms. If a gas contains two different two different kinds of atoms X and Y, then during electric discharge through the gas some of the atoms are raised to excited state.

                          IV. Excitation by chemical energy. Sometimes, an atom or a molecule can be a product of a chemical reaction and can be produced in its excited state. An example is hydrogen combining with fluorine to form hydrogen fluoride HF that is in excited state.

                        11.1.4 Laser structure 

                        Activity 11.3 

                        From what you know about LASER, what could be the components of laser  Are all parts on laser Light Similar? Explain your reasoning.
                                 

                                              Fig.11. 6: General structure of Laser 

                        In general case laser system consists of three important parts: Active medium or amplifying medium, the energy source referred to as the pump or pump source and the optical resonator consisting of mirrors or system of mirrors.

                        Pumping Mechanism. 

                        Pumping is the process of supplying energy to the laser medium to excite to the upper energy levels. To have this mechanism, it depends on the existence of interactions between light from pump source to constituents of active medium. Usually, pump sources can be: electrical discharges, flash lamps, arc lamps, light from another laser, chemical reactions and even explosive devices. Most common lasers use electrical or optical pumping. The type of pump source used depends essentially on the gain medium.

                        Active Medium The active medium is the major determining factor of the wavelength of operation, and other properties of the laser. The gain medium is excited by the pump source to produce a population inversion, and it is where the spontaneous and stimulated emission of photons take place, leading to the phenomenon of optical gain or amplification. The gain medium may be a solid crystal like a ruby, a liquid dye, gases like CO2 or He-Ne or semiconductors. The gain medium for some lasers like gas lasers is closed by a window under the Brewster’s angle to allow the beam to leave the laser tube. 

                        Optical resonator or Optical cavity 

                        The optical resonator or optical cavity is a system of two parallel mirrors placed around the gain medium that provide reflection of the light beam. Light from the medium produced by the spontaneous emission is reflected by the mirrors back into the medium where it may be amplified by the stimulated emission. Mirrors are required for most lasers to increase the circulating power within the cavity to the point where gains exceed losses, and to increase the rate of stimulated emission. One of the mirrors reflects essentially 100% of the light, while the other less than 100% and transmits the remainder. Mirrors can be plane, spherical or a combination of both. Here represented are the common cavities configuration that can be used:
                                             

                        11.1.5 Checking my progress

                             1. What do you understand by the term LASER? 

                             2. Write in full the acronym L.A.S.E.R 

                             3. In your own words, explain how laser light is produced.

                             4. Explain the meaning of population inversion and discuss how an atom can be put into excited state.

                             5. What is the energy of the laser light that propagates with a frequency of 1010 Hz in gaseous medium.          (Given that the plank’s constant  h=6.67x10-34J.s ).     

                             6. a. What are the three major components of laser?              

                                 b. Using diagrams, explain all the types of optical cavity.

                        11.2 PROPERTIES OF LASER LIGHT

                        Activity 11.4 

                               a. Using the ideas about electromagnetic radiations, what are characteristics of laser light?

                               b. Do you think all different kinds of laser light have the same properties? 

                                   Give reasons to support your answer.

                        The laser light is not like any other light emitted by usual sources found in nature.  This special light emitted by the laser, has three properties according to its usefulness in many applications: Coherence, Monochromaticity and Collimation or Directionality.

                                                   

                        11.2.1 Coherence 

                        Coherence is the most interesting property of laser light. All photons emitted, are exactly in the same phase, they are all crest and valley at the same time. It is brought about by the mechanism of the laser itself in which photons are essentially copied. The good temporal coherence is essentially for Interferometry like in Holography. Coherence is not trivial and is brought about by the amplification mechanism of the laser.

                        11.2.2 Monochromaticity 

                        Monochromaticity is the ability of the laser to produce light that is at one wavelength λ. It is a requirement for coherence since photons of different wavelengths cannot be coherent. When white light is dispersed through a prism, you note that it is composed of an infinite number of wavelengths of light covering the entire visible
                        spectrum as well as into the UV and IR regions. However, no light source is perfectly monochromatic. Lasers tend to be relatively monochromatic and this depends on the type of laser. Monochromatic output, or high frequency stability, is of great importance for lasers being used in Interferometry. 

                        11.2.3 Collimation or Directionality 

                        Collimation or directionality is the property of laser light that allows it to stay in one direction at the strait line, confined beam for large distances. This property makes it possible to use the laser as a level in construction or to pinpoint speeders on a highway. This highly directional laser light is determined by the mechanism of the laser itself.

                                 

                        11.2.4 Checking my progress

                             1. Choose the correct group of terms that are properties of laser light.  

                                 a. Coherent, unpolarized, monochromatic, high divergence

                                 b. Monochromatic, low divergence, polarized, coherent

                                 c. Polychromatic, diffuse, coherent, focused 

                                 d. Monochromatic, birefringent, nonpolarized, coherent

                             2. Which of the following properties of laser light enables us to use it to measure distances with great              precision?

                                 a. All the light waves emitted by the laser have the same direction

                                 b. The light waves are coherent

                                 c. The light waves are monochromatic

                                 d. The individual waves effectively work like a single wave with very large amplitude.

                             3. Explain how coherence, monochromatic and collimation are interconnected.

                             4. All light in laser light are produced and found to be in the same phase. How does this help in the                  formation of 3D images?

                             5. Laser light can be used as a level. Which special feature that makes it be used

                        11.3 APPLICATIONS AND DANGERS OF MISUSE OF LASER 

                        11.3.1 Applications of lasers.

                        Activity 11.5

                           

                             a. Having studied LASERS, where do you think in real life LASERS are helpful? 

                             b. From your experience, have you ever used LASER light?

                             c. Other than using it by yourself, what are other places where laser light is applied

                        There are many interesting uses for lasers, depending on the special characteristic being applied. Laser Diodes are used in a wide range of applications. Partial lists of those applications include: 

                              I. They are used in common consumer devices such as DVD players, bar code scanners; CD ROM drivers; laser disc and other optical storage drivers; laser printers and laser fax machines; sighting and alignment scopes; measurement equipment; free space communication systems; pump source for other lasers; high performance imagers; and typesetters. CD players have lasers. Light from the laser in CD player reflects off patterns on CD’s surface. The reflected light is converted to a sound wave.

                              II. Laser beams can be used in diverse fields of science and technology. Like in the control of motion of moving objects like aircrafts or missiles. This method thus makes it possible for a missile to hit a certain target.

                              III. Because of high directional property, lasers are used to measure distances accurately. A laser beam is sent and the time taken for it to be reflected back is measured. Using this idea, the distance can thus be measured.

                              IV. Because laser beam can be focused into a small spot, it can thus be used to cut minute holes onto a material.

                               V. The very high intensity of laser beam means that the amplitude of the corresponding electromagnetic wave is very large. So it is possible to investigate the non linear optical properties of different materials with the help of laser light.

                              VI. Lasers are also used in industry for cutting materials such as metal and cloths. and welding materials 

                              VII.  Doctors use lasers for surgery and various skin treatments 

                              VIII. They are used in military and law enforcement devices for marking targets and measuring range and speed.

                                IX.   Laser lighting displays use laser light as an entertainment medium.

                                 X.   Lasers also have many important applications in scientific research .

                        In a tabular way, we can have a summary of different types of lasers and their applications. 

                        The following are types of lasers and their Applications 


                        11.3.2 Dangers of lasers 

                        Activity 11.6 

                           a. Laser light is used in many areas like industries, offices, airports and many other places. Do you think long exposure of laser light is harmful?

                           b. Why do you think so?

                           c. What makes these lasers harmful if mis-used? 

                               Give a scientific reasoning

                        You should be careful when dealing with lasers, because they can have a negative impact when exposed to your body. Among other negative effects, some of them are discussed below .

                               I. If directly exposed to our skin, it burns the skin

                              II. When absorbed by skin, Laser light reacts with body cells causing cancer.

                             III. Because of their high energy, it affects eyes if exposed to them

                             IV. Lasers can affect cells of a human being. This leads to mutation

                        Because of the negative effects of lasers, care must be taken to avoid all the risks of being affected by lasers.

                        11.3.3 Precaution measures to avoid negative effects of lasers

                        Activity 11.7

                                   

                               a. Observe the picture above clearly. Using scientific reasoning explain why the people performing the activity above are putting on protective wear as shown.

                               b. Building on what you have discussed in a) above, what precautional measures can you take to avoid negative effects of LASERS if at all you were working in a place exposed to them.

                        The following are some of the measures one can take to avoid the negative effects of lasers.

                              I. For any one working in places where there are incidences of being exposed to laser light, one should wear protective clothes, glasses and shoes so that there is no direct exposure of these radiations on to the body. 

                              II. One should minimize the time of working with lasers.

                             III. Areas that are exposed to these radiations should be warning signs and labels so that one can be aware of places/areas where laser light is used.

                             IV. Safe measures like Use of remote control should be used to avoid direct exposure of these radiations (LASER light).

                             V. People should be given trainings on how to handle lasers.

                             VI. There should also access restrictions to laboratories that use laser

                        11.3.4 Checking my progress

                               1. Discuss all the negative effects of laser light.

                               2. Using vivid examples, explain how one can prevent him or herself of all dangers caused by laser light. 

                               3. We have seen that laser light is good and at the same time bad. Using your personal judgement, which side outweighs the other. Give scientific reasons.

                              4. Depending on your judgement in (3) do you think man should continue using laser light?

                        11.4 END UNIT ASSESSMENT

                        11.4.1 Multiple choice 

                        Copy the questions below to your exercise and chose the best alternative that answers the question.
                              1. What does the acronym LASER stand for? 

                                  a. Light Absorption by Stimulated Emission of Radiation

                                  b. Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation

                                  c. Light Alteration by Stimulated Emission of Radiation

                               2. The acronym MASER stands for?

                                    a. Microwave Amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radiation 

                                    b. Molecular Absorption by Stimulated Emission of Radiation

                                    c. Molecular Alteration by Stimulated Emission of Radiation

                                    d. Microwave amplification by Stimulated Emission of Radio waves

                                3. What is one way to describe a Photon? 

                                    a. Solid as a rock

                                    b. A wave packet 

                                    c. A torpedo

                                    d. Electromagnetic wave of zero energy

                                4. Which of the following determines the color of light?

                                    a. Its intensity

                                    b. Its wavelength

                                     c. Its source

                                     d. Some information missing

                                 5. Among the three examples of laser listed below, which one is considered “eye safe”?

                                      a. Laser bar-code scanners

                                      b. The excimer laser

                                      c. Communications lasers 

                                      d. YAG

                                  6. Why are lasers used in fiber optic communications systems

                                      a. The government has mandated it

                                      b. They can be pulsed with high speed data

                                      c. They are very inexpensive

                                      d. They are not harmful

                                 7. Lasers are used in CDs and DVDs. What type of laser is used in these players?

                                       a. Semiconductor

                                       b. YAG

                                       c. Alexandrite

                                       d. All the above

                                  8. The best reason why lasers used in “Laser Printers” is

                                       a. They can be focused down to very small spot sizes for high resolution

                                       b. They are cheap

                                       c. They are impossible to damage

                                       d. They are locally available

                                  9. As wavelength gets longer, the laser light can be focused to… 

                                     a. Larger spot sizes

                                     b. Smaller spot sizes 

                                     c. Large and small spot sizes

                                     d. None of the above

                                10. Among the following, which color of laser has the shortest wavelength?

                                     a. Yellow 

                                     b. Red

                                     c.      Blue    

                                     d.     Green 

                                11. What property of laser light is used to measure strain in roadways?

                                     a. Intensity

                                     b. Power

                                     c. Coherence

                                     d. All the above

                               12. What is the type of laser used most widely in industrial materials processing applications?

                                     a. Dye Laser 

                                     b. Ruby Laser

                                     c.      YAG laser  

                                     d.      Carbon Dioxide Laser     

                               13. Why are lasers used for cutting materials

                                     a. It never gets dull  

                                     b. Accuracy

                                     d. It has a small “heat affected zone”

                                     e. Smoother cuts c. Repeatability

                                     f. All of the above

                               14. The Excimer laser produces light with what wavelength?

                                      a. Visible

                                      b. Ultraviolet

                                      c. Infrared 

                                      d. All the above.

                               15. Most lasers are electrically inefficient devices. 

                                    a. True

                                    b. False 

                              16. Chemical lasers use………………. to produce their beams. 

                                    a. Excessive amounts of electrical power  

                                     b. Small amounts of electrical power

                                     c. No electrical power 

                                     d. Other lasers

                              17. What type of laser could cause skin cancer if not used properly?

                                    a. Red semiconductor laser

                                    b. Excimer laser

                                    c.     Blue semiconductor

                                    d.     YAG laser.

                        11.4.2 Structured questions 

                               18. a. What do you understand by term LASER?

                                     b. Depending on the nature and what laser is made of, Laser is classified into different types.                            Discuss at least 5 types of lasers. 

                               19 The following are basic characteristics of laser light. With clear explanation, what does each imply               as connected to laser light.

                                   a. Coherence

                                   b. Monochromaticity

                                   c. Collimation\

                               20. a. With the aid of diagram Explain the meaning of the following terms 

                                         I. Spontaneous Absorption of light

                                         II. Stimulated Emission

                                        III. Spontaneous Emission

                                        IV. Population inversion 

                                     b. Laser light have been employed in different areas. This has helped man in solving different                          problems. 

                                         What are some of the areas where laser light is employed.

                                      c. Though laser light is very important in different activities, it can also cause harm if mis-used In                       what ways is laser light harmful.


                        • Key unit Competence
                          By the end of the unit the learner should be able to analyze the processes in medical imaging.
                           
                          Learning objectives:

                            • Outline specific purposes of imaging techniques
                            • Explain the effects of various imaging techniques for particular purposes.
                            • Explain the basic functioning principles of major medical imaging techniques
                            • Identify advantages and disadvantages of medical imaging techniques

                          Introductory activity: Investigation on the use of medical imaging techniques:

                                 
                                              fig.12. 1: Medical imaging techniques

                          Years ago, the only way to get information from inside of human bodies was through surgery. In modern medicine, medical imaging has undergone major advancements and this ability to obtain information about different parts of the human body has many useful clinical applications.

                          Using information provided on the above pictures, answer to the following questions: 
                             1. Observe the image A, B, and C (Fig.12.1) and describe what is happening. 
                             2. Suggest the technique that is being used for each image? 
                             3. Explain the working principle of the mentioned techniques in question 2?

                          12.1 X-RAY IMAGING. 

                          12.1.1 Interaction of X-rays with matter.

                           a. Introduction In unit 


                          10, we learnt that X-rays are electromagnetic radiation produced by focusing a beam of high energy electron on a target material in x-ray tube.  Since the major part of the energy of the electrons is converted into heat in the target (only about 1% will appear as X-rays), the target material should have a high melting point and good heat conduction ability. To get a high relative amount of X-ray energy, the anode material should be of high atomic number. Tungsten is the dominating anode material and is in modern X-ray tubes often mixed with Rhenium. 

                          In X-ray diagnostics, radiation that is partly transmitted through and partly absorbed in the irradiated object is utilized. An X-ray image shows the variations in transmission caused by structures in the object of varying thickness, density or atomic composition. 
                                    

                          Activity 12.1: Exploration of x-ray image 
                          Analyze the figure below answer to the following questions:
                                         
                                       Fig.12.3 procedure of X-ray image formation
                           1. What do the letters A, B, C, D and E stand for?
                           2. Explain the process used from A to E.
                           3. Explain how radiology differ from radiography.

                          b. Attenuation and Absorption of X-rays 

                          There are principally two interaction processes that give rise to the x-ray attenuation (variation in photon transmission) through the patient which is the basis of X-ray imaging. These are photoelectric absorption and scattering processes.
                                   
                          A photon which has experienced an interaction process has either been absorbed or has changed its energy and/or direction of motion. A photon that changes its direction of motion is called a scattered photon. For monoenergetic x-ray photons, the number of photons that experience such interactions and therefore removed from the primary beam when this is incident on a thin layer of material is proportional to the number of incident photons (N) and the thickness of the layer (dx) following the expression : 
                                                                
                          where µ is a constant of proportionality called the linear attenuation coefficient. Integrating the above equation will result in 
                                                         
                          where  is the initial number of photons in the incident beam. It can be seen that the incident beam photons (or the beam energy) is attenuated exponentially as the X-rays travel through the material. The different interaction processes involved, that are absorption, coherent and incoherent scattering and pair production, add their contributions to the total linear attenuation coefficient

                          C. Contrast 

                          The contrast is a measure of the difference in radiation transmission or other parameters between two adjacent areas in a radiographic image.  Contrast plays an important role in the ability of a radiologist to perceive image detail.
                                                                             
                          where ε1and ε2 are energies of the monoenergetic X-ray photons per unit area reaching the detector and therefore absorbed in the detector without and with the contrasting detail respectively. In the case where the film is used as image receptor, the signal is obtained in terms of the optical density. The image contrast is then usually defined as the optical density difference beside and behind the contrasting detail.
                          In such situation where monoenergetic photons are considered and no scattered radiation is reaching the detector, the absorbed energy in the detector can be written as

                          The contrast is then proportional to the difference in the linear attenuation coefficients and the thickness of the contrasting detail. Therefore, when scattered radiation is neglected in the process, the contrast is independent of the thickness d of the object but also it does not depend on where in the object the contrasting detail is situated. 
                          The ability of conventional radiography to display a range of organs and structures may be enhanced by the use of various contrast materials, also known as contrast media. The most common contrast materials are based on barium or iodine. Barium and iodine are high atomic number materials that strongly absorb X-rays and are therefore seen as dense white on radiography. 

                          12.1.2   X-rays ImagingTechniques 

                          a. Conventional Radiography 

                          X-rays are able to pass through the human body and produce an image of internal structures. The resulting image is called a radiograph, more commonly known as an ‘X-ray’ or ‘plain film’. The common terms ‘chest X-ray’ and ‘abdomen X-ray’ are widely accepted and abbreviated to CXR and AXR.
                          As a beam of X-rays passes through the human body, some of the X-rays photons are absorbed or scattered producing reduction or attenuation of the beam with the internal human structure acting as contrasting details. 
                          Therefore tissues of high density and/or high atomic number cause more X-ray beam attenuation and are shown as lighter grey or white on radiographs. Less dense tissues and structures cause less attenuation of the X-ray beam, and appear darker on radiographs than tissues of higher density. The figure below shows the typical conventional radiograph of a human body.
                                                  
                          Fig.12.6: The five principal radiographic densities. This radiograph of a benign lipoma (arrows) in a child’s thigh demonstrates the five basic radiographic densities: (1) air; (2) fat; (3) soft tissue; (4) bone; (5) metal. (David A Disle (2012) Imaging for students. Fourth Edition. (Page 1)) 
                          Five principal densities are easily recognized on this plain radiograph due to the increase in their densities: 
                            1. Air/gas appears as black, e.g. lungs, bowel and stomach 
                            2.  Fat is shown by dark grey, e.g. subcutaneous tissue layer, retroperitoneal fat 
                            3. Soft tissues/water appears as light grey, e.g. solid organs, heart, blood vessels, muscle and fluid-filled organs such as bladder
                            4.  Bone appears as off-white
                            5. Contrast material/metal: bright white.

                          In the past, X-ray films were processed in a darkroom or in freestanding daylight processors. In modern practice, radiographic images are produced digitally using one of two processes, computed radiography (CR) and digital radiography (DR). 
                          DR uses a detector screen containing silicon detectors that produce an electrical signal when exposed to X-rays. This signal is analyzed to produce a digital image. Digital images obtained by CR and DR are sent to viewing workstations for interpretation. Images may also be recorded on X-ray film for portability and remote viewing.
                                        
                          The image given by a computer radiography may be reviewed and reported on a computer workstation. This allows various manipulations of images as well as application of functions such as measurements of length and angles measurements. 
                           The relative variance of the shadows depends upon the density of the materials within the object or body part. Dense, calcium – rich bone absorbs X-rays to a higher degree than soft tissues that permit more X-rays to pass through them, making X-rays very useful for capturing images of bone.
                          In projection radiography, there is much room for adjusting the energy level of the X-rays depending on the relative densities of the tissues being imaged and also how deep through a body the waves must travel in order to achieve the imaging.

                           • Images of bones (for instance, to examine a fracture or for diagnostic measures related to bone conditions like osteoarthritis or certain cancers) require highenergy X-rays because of the high density of bone.
                           • Images of soft tissues like lungs, heart and breasts (both chest X-rays and mammography are very common diagnostic applications of X-rays) require relatively less energy from the X-rays in order to penetrate properly and achieve excellent images.
                           • In order to achieve these different energies, technologists use X-ray generators of different voltages and equipped with anodes made of different metals.

                          b. Mammography

                          Activity 12.2 

                          One day a girl suffering from the breast tells her mother about the problem. And her mother advises her to go to the hospital to consult a doctor.
                                  a. Think of the problem that girl may have.
                                  b. Try to explain what may be the cause of that problem.
                                  c. If you are a doctor how can you detect such problem?
                                  d. Which advise can you give to other people who are not suffering from that problem in order to prevent it?

                          Mammography is a specialized medical imaging that uses low-dose X-rays to investigate the internal structure of the breast. A mammography exam, called a mammogram, helps in the early detection and diagnosis of women’s breast diseases such as breast cancer before even experiencing any symptom. Below is a typical mammography test showing the presence of abnormal areas of density, mass, or calcification that may indicate the presence of cancer.       

                          Mammography:(a) the breast is pressed between two plates x-rays are used to takes pictures of breast tissues,(b)photographic image of breast tissues, (c)Breast with cancer. 
                          A mammography unit is a rectangular box that houses the tube in which X-rays are produced. The unit is used exclusively for X-ray exams of the breast, with special accessories that allow only the breast to be exposed to the X-rays. Attached to the unit is a device that holds and compresses the breast and positions it so images can be obtained at different angles.

                          In conventional film and digital mammography, a stationery X-ray tube captures an image from the side and an image from above the compressed breast. Breast tomosynthesis, also called three-dimensional (3-D) mammography and digital breast tomosynthesis (DBT), is an advanced form of breast imaging where multiple images of the breast from different angles are captured and reconstructed (“synthesized”) into a three-dimensional image set. In this way, 3-D breast imaging is similar to computed tomography (CT) imaging in which a series of thin “slices” are assembled together to create a 3-D reconstruction of the body.

                          c. Computer tomography scan (ct scan) 

                          a. CT terminology 

                          In 1970s, a revolutionary new X-ray technique was developed called Computer tomography (CT), which produce an image of a slice through the body. The word tomography comes from the Greek: tomos =slice, graph= picture.) 

                          A computed tomography scan also known as CT scan, makes use of computerprocessed combinations of many X-ray measurements taken from different angles to produce cross-sectional (tomographic) images (virtual “slices”) of specific areas of a scanned object, allowing the user to see inside the object without cutting it. Other terms include computed axial tomography (CAT scan) and computer aided tomography. 

                          The term “computed tomography” (CT) is often used to refer to X-ray CT, because it is the most commonly known form but many other types of CT exist. 

                          CT is an imaging technique whereby cross-sectional images are obtained with the use of X-rays. In CT scanning, the patient is passed through a rotating gantry that has an X-ray tube on one side and a set of detectors on the other. Information from the detectors is analysed by computer and displayed as a grey-scale image. Owing to the use of computer analysis, a much greater array of densities can be displayed than on conventional X-ray films.

                          This allows accurate display of cross-sectional anatomy, differentiation of organs and pathology, and sensitivity to the presence of specific materials such as fat or calcium. As with plain radiography, high- density objects cause more attenuation of the X-ray beam and are therefore displayed as lighter grey than objects of lower density. 

                          b. Principle behind of computer tomography scan (CT scan). Computer Tomography is shown in below figure: a thin collimated beam of X- ray(“ to collimate” means to “make straight”) passes through the body to a detector that measures the transmitted intensity. Measurements are made at a large number of points as the source and detector are moved past the body together. The apparatus is rotated slightly about the body axis and again scanned; this is repeated at 1st intervals for  180 . The intensity of the transmitted beam for the many points of each scan, and for each angles, are sent to a computer that reconstructs the image of the slice. Note that the imaged slice is perpendicular to the long axis of the body. For this reason, CT is sometimes called computerize axial tomography.

                          The use of single detector would require a few minutes for many scans needed to form a complete image. Much faster scanner use a fan beam in which passing through the entire cross section of the body are detected simultaneously by many detectors.The x-ray source and the detectors are rotated about the patient and an image requires only few seconds to be seen. This means that rays transmitted through the entire body are measured simultaneously at each angle where the source and detector rotate to take measurements at different angles.


                          CT images of internal organs, bones, soft tissue, and blood vessels provide greater clarity and more details than conventional X-ray images, such as a chest X-Ray.

                          Function of CT scan
                           • A motorized table moves the patient through a circular opening in the CT imaging system.
                           • While the patient is inside the opening, an X-ray source and a detector assembly within the system rotate around the patient. A single rotation typically takes a second or less. During rotation the X-ray source produces a narrow, fan-shaped beam of X-rays that passes through a section of the patient’s body.
                           • Detectors in rows opposite the X-ray source register the X-rays that pass through the patient’s body as a snapshot in the process of creating an image. Many different “snapshots” (at many angles through the patient) are collected during one complete rotation.
                           • For each rotation of the X-ray source and detector assembly, the image data are sent to a computer to reconstruct all of the individual “snapshots” into one or multiple cross-sectional images (slices) of the internal organs and tissues.

                          Note that, it is advisable to avoid unnecessary radiation exposure; a medically needed CT scan obtained with appropriate acquisition parameter has benefits that outweigh the radiation risks. 

                          12.1.3 Checking my progress

                             1. Outline the advantage and disadvantages CT scan
                             2.  Explain the types of x-ray imaging used in mammography.
                             3. In mammography exams, is the breast compression necessary?
                                 Why
                             4. A beam of X-rays passes through the human body of tissues with different        densities; explain the production of X-rays on less dense tissues
                          12.2 ULTRASONIC IMAGING
                           

                          12.2.1 Basics of Ultra sound and its production 

                          Activity 12.3
                           
                           1. Distinguish ultrasound from infrasound?
                           2. Where do you think ultrasound may be applied in daily life?
                           3. Advise on how ultrasound be used in medicine?

                          Sound can refer to either an auditory sensation in the brain or the disturbance in a medium that causes this sensation. Hearing is the process by which the ear transforms sound vibrations into nerve impulses that are delivered to the brain and interpreted as sounds. Sound waves are produced when vibrating objects produce pressure pulses of vibrating air. The auditory system can distinguish different subjective aspects of a sound, such as its loudness and pitch.

                          Pitch is the subjective perception of the frequency, which in turn is measured in cycles per second, or Hertz (Hz). The normal human audible range extends from about 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz, but the human ear is most sensitive to frequencies of 1 000 Hz to 4 000 Hz. Loudness is the perception of the intensity of sound, related to the pressure produced by sound waves on the tympanic membrane. The pressure level of sound is measured in decibels (dB), a unit for comparing the intensity of a given sound with a sound that is just perceptible to the normal human ear at a frequency in the range to which the ear is most sensitive. On the decibel scale, the range of human hearing extends from 0 dB, which represents the auditory threshold, to about 130 dB, the level at which sound becomes painful.

                          12.2.2 Interaction of sound waves with different structure inside the body 
                          a. Introduction 

                          Ultrasound imaging uses ultra-high-frequency sound waves to produce crosssectional images of the body. Ultrasound is actually sound with a frequency in excess of 20 kHz, which is the upper limit of human hearing. Typical ultrasound frequencies used for clinical purposes are in the 2 MHz to 10 MHz range.

                          Different tissues in a human or animal body alter the ultra sound waves in different ways. Some waves are reflected directly while others scatter the waves before they return to the transducer as echoes. The reflected ultrasound pulses detected by the transducer need to be amplified in the scanner or ultrasonic probe. The echoes that come from deep within the body are more attenuated than those from the more superficial parts and therefore required more amplification. 
                           When echoes return to the transducer, it is possible to reconstruct a two dimensional map of all the tissues that have been in the beams. The information is stored in a computer and displayed on a video (television) monitor. Strong echoes are said to be of the high intensity and appear as brighter dots on the screen.

                          b. Reflection of ultrasound 

                          When the pulse of ultrasound is sent into the body and meets a boundary between two media, of different specific acoustic impedance Z, the sound wave needs to change gear in order to continue. If the difference in Z across the boundary is large 
                          the wave cannot easily adjust: there is an “acoustic mismatch”. Most of the wave is reflected and a strong echo is recorded. The fraction of intensity reflected back  to that incident  at the normal incidence, is known as the intensity of reflection coefficient α 
                                        

                          Ultrasounds are high-frequency sound waves above the human ear’s audible range: that is with frequency sound waves greater than 20 kHz. In fact, the frequencies used in medicine are much higher than this, typically between 1 MHz and 15 MHz. like all sound waves, ultrasound consists of longitudinal, elastic or pressure waves, capable of traveling through solids, liquids and gases. This makes them ideal for penetrating the body, unlike transverse mechanical waves, which cannot travel to any great extent through fluids.

                          c. Attenuation of ultrasound 

                          The attenuation of the waves describes the reduction in its intensity as they travel through a medium. This loss is due to a number of factors:
                            • The wave simply “spreads out” and suffers an “inverse square law type” reduction in intensity.
                            • The wave is scattered away from its original direction
                            • The wave is absorbed in the medium.

                          The amount of absorption of ultrasound beam in a medium is described by the absorption coefficient α , which is intensity level per unit length. It is expressed in decibels per cm and it firstly depends on the type of medium the wave is propagating into. As example whilst water absorbs very little ultrasound, bone is a strong absorber, putting it at risk, for example, during high- power ultrasound therapy. 

                          Secondly, higher frequencies suffer greater absorption. In fact if the frequency is doubled, the absorption increases by the factor of four. This has very important consequences when choosing the best frequency at which to image the body. If the selected frequency is too high, the ultrasound will not be able to penetrate to the regions under investigation.  

                          12.2.3 Ultrasonic imaging techniques 

                          The basic component of the ultrasound probe is the piezoelectric crystal. Excitation of this crystal by electrical signals causes it to emit ultra-high-frequency sound waves; this is the piezoelectric effect. The emitted ultrasound waves are reflected back to the crystal by the various tissues of the body. These reflected sound waves also called the “echoes” act on the piezoelectric crystal in the ultrasound probe to produce an electric signal, again by the piezoelectric effect. It is this electric signal which is analysed by a computer produces a cross-sectional image.
                                                     
                          The process of imaging is the same as the echo-locating sonar of a submarine or a bat. The observer sends out a brief pulse of ultrasound and waits for an echo. The pulse travels out, reflects off the target and returns. The ultrasound machine uses pulses because the same device acts as both transmitter and receiver. If it continually sent out sounds, then the receiver would not hear the much softer echo over the louder transmission.

                          The duty cycle of the ultrasound imager is the amount of time spent transmitting compared to the total time of transmitting and listening. Sonar is an acronym for Sound Navigation and Ranging. It relies on the reflection of ultrasound pulses. A short pulse of ultrasound is directed towards the object interest, which then reflects it back as an echo. The total time  between transmission of pulse and reception of an echo is measured, often using a cathode ray oscilloscope (CRO). The sonar principle is used to estimate the depth of a structure, using
                                             
                          Where tis the time taken to go and back and v is the velocity of ultrasound in the medium. The factor of 2 is necessary because the pulse must travel “there and back” An ultrasound beam structure is directly into the body. The reflection or echoes from different body structure are then detected and analyzed, yielding information about the locations. For example if the time delays between the reception of echo pulse1 and 2 (Fig.12.7 below) is t, then the diameter of the baby’s head can be found using the above formula.

                                           
                          During an investigation using ultrasound, the time delay for an echo to return from a structureis 10.5 s µ If the average velocity of ultrasound in the eye is 1510 m/s. Calculate the depth of the structure. 
                                   
                          a. Doppler ultrasonic 

                          An object travelling towards the listener causes sound waves to be compressed giving a higher frequency; an object travelling away from the listener gives a lower frequency. The Doppler effect has been applied to ultrasound imaging. Flowing blood causes an alteration to the frequency of sound waves returning to the ultra sound probe. This frequency change or shift is calculated allowing quantization of blood flow. The combination of conventional two-dimensional ultra sound imaging with Doppler ultra sound is known as Duplex ultra sound.

                                               
                          Fig.12.11: Duplex ultra sound. The Doppler sample gate is positioned in the artery (arrow) and the frequency shifts displayed as a graph. Peak systolic and end diastolic velocities are calculated and also displayed on the image in centimeters per second.
                          As ultrasound imaging uses sound waves to produce pictures of inside of the body. It is used to help diagnose the cause of pain, swelling and infection in the body’s internal organs and to examine a baby in pregnant woman and the brain and hips in infants. It is also used to help guide biopsies, diagnose heart conditions and assess damage after a heart attack. 
                          Ultrasound examinations do not use ionizing radiation (x-rays), there is no radiation exposure to the patient. Because ultrasound image are captured in real time, they can show the structure and movement of the body’s internal organs, as well as blood flowing through blood vessels.

                          b. Advantages and Disadvantages of ultrasounds 

                          The advantages of ultrasound over other imaging modalities include:
                            • Lack of ionizing radiation.
                            • Relatively low cost
                            • It is noninvasive (of medicine procedures not involving the introduction of instruments into the body)
                            • Quick procedure
                            • Good for examining soft tissues.
                            • Portability of equipment.

                          Some disadvantages of ultrasound include: 

                           • It is highly operator dependent as it relies on the operator to produce and interpret images at the time of examination
                           • Not as much details as X-rays and MRI
                           • It cannot be used in areas that contain gas (such as lungs)
                           • Doesn’t pass through bones.
                           • Can be wrong in detecting physical abnormalities. 

                          12.2.4 Checking my progress 

                           1. Explain how ultrasound imaging is used?
                           2. Who take the decision to scan or not to scan in normal pregnancy?
                           3. What are the risks and side effects to the mother or baby during ultrasound? 4. If an ultrasound is done at 6 to 7 weeks and a heartbeat is not detected, does

                          12.3 SCINTIGRAPHY (NUCLEAR MEDICINE) 

                          Activity 12.4

                            a. What do you understandby ‘radionuclide imaging’?
                            b. What is a radionuclide scan used for?
                            c. Compare radionuclide scan with mammography scan?

                          12.3.1 Physics of scintigraphy and terminology
                           

                          Scintigraphy refers to the use of gamma radiation to form images following the injection of various radiopharmaceuticals. The key word to understanding of scintigraphy is radiopharmaceutical. ‘Radio’ refers to the radionuclide, i.e. the emitter of gamma rays.
                           The most commonly used radionuclide in clinical practice is technetium, written in this text as mTc 99 , where 99 is the atomic mass, and the ‘m’ stands for metastable. Metastable means that the technetium atom has two basic energy states: high and low energy states. As the technetium transforms from the high-energy state to the low-energy state, it emits a quantum of energy in the form of a gamma ray, which has energy of 140 keV. Other commonly used radionuclides include gallium citrate


                          12.3.2 Basic functioning of radionuclide scan 

                          Activity12.6
                           
                          For radionuclide imaging, it is advisable for the patient to consume a small quantity of radionuclide, or it is injected into a vein in your arm. a. How long does it take? b. What is the purpose of those radionuclide chemicals? c. Assuming the patient has already consumed the radionuclide for him/ her to be scanned and wants to take another scan on another part of the body, will the patient be required to take another dose of the nuclide? d.  You as a student, what advice can you give to a patient who develops allergies after taking the radio nuclear chemical?

                          A radionuclide scan is a way of imaging bones, organs and other parts of the body by using a small dose of a radioactive chemical. There are different types of radionuclide chemical. The one used depends on which organ or part of the body need to be scanned.

                          A radionuclide (sometimes called a radioisotope or isotope) is a chemical which emits a type of radioactivity called gamma rays. A tiny amount of radionuclide is put into the body, usually by an injection into a vein. Sometimes it is breathed in, or swallowed, or given as eye drops, depending on the test. 

                          Gamma rays are similar to X-rays and are detected by a device called a gamma camera. The gamma rays which are emitted from inside the body are detected by the gamma camera, are converted into an electrical signal and sent to a computer. The computer builds a picture by converting the differing intensities of radioactivity emitted into different colors or shades of grey. 

                          However, radionuclide imaging techniques do not depict structural anatomy like ultrasound, X-ray computed tomography (XCT) or conventional radiographs. It is the only established noninvasive technique available to investigate organ physiology, although recently Nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) imaging technique has shown its capability to probe organ physiology and anatomy without ionizing radiation. 

                          Radionuclide scans do not generally cause any after effects. Through the natural process of radioactive decay, the small amount of radioactive chemical in your body will lose its radioactivity over time. Although the levels of radiation used in the scan are small, patients may be advised to observe special precautions. 

                          12.3.3 Limitations and disadvantages of scintigraphy 

                          The main advantages of scintigraphy are its high sensitivity and the fact that the functional information is provided as well as anatomical information. However it has some disadvantages that are listed below:
                            I. Generally poor resolution compared with other imaging techniques.
                            II. Radiation risks due to the administered radionuclide
                           III. Can be invasive, sometimes requiring an injection into the bloodstream 
                           IV. Disposal for radioactive waste, including that from patients, requires special procedures.
                           V. Relatively high costs associated with radiotracer production and administration.

                          12.3.4 Checking my progress 

                          Choose the correct answers
                           1. Scintigraphy refers to the use of: 
                               a.  Gamma radiation to form images
                               b. X- ray radiation to form images
                               c. X- rays and gamma radiations to form images
                               d. None of radiation to form images.
                            2. The radionuclide in clinical practice are
                                a.   Technetium
                                b. Thallium
                                c. Gallium 
                                d. ALL of them

                          12.4 MAGNETIC RESONANCE IMAGING (MRI) 

                          Activity 12.7: Principles of MRI

                             I. What does MRI mean?
                            II. What is it used for?
                           III. What makes MRI to be powerful compared to other imaging techniques?
                           IV. is it advisable for a pregnant woman to be placed in MRI Scanner?
                                Explain your view?

                          12.4.1. MRI physics and terminology. 

                          Magnetic resonance (MR) imaging has become the dominant clinical imaging modality with widespread, primarily noninvasive, applicability throughout the body and across many disease processes. The progress of MR imaging has been rapid compared with other imaging technologies and it can be attributed in part to physics and in part to the timing of the development of MR imaging, which corresponded to an important period of advances in computing technology. 

                          Initially let us described how magnetic resonance can be demonstrated with a pair of magnets and a compass. If a compass happens to find itself near a powerful magnet, the compass needle will align with the field. In a normal pocket compass, the needle is embedded in liquid to dampen its oscillations. Without liquid, the needle will vibrate through the north direction for a period before coming to rest. The frequency of the oscillations depends on the magnetic field and of the strength of the magnetic needle.

                                              
                          Let us focus on what made the needle oscillate. It was the small movements of the magnet, back and forth, or more precisely the oscillation of a weak magnetic field perpendicular to the powerful stationary magnetic field caused by the movement of the magnet. But oscillating magnetic field is what we understand by “radio waves”, which means that in reality, we could replace the weak magnet with other types of radio wave emitters. 

                          This could, for example, be a small coil subject to an alternating current, as shown in figure above. Such a coil will create a magnetic field perpendicular to the magnetic needle. The field changes direction in synchrony with the oscillation of the alternating current, so if the frequency of the current is adjusted to the resonance frequency of the magnetic needle, the current will set the needle in motion. This is also applied in an MR scanner. In summary, the needle can be set in motion from a distance by either waving a magnet or by applying an alternating current to a coil. In both situations, magnetic resonance is achieved when the magnetic field that motion or alternating currents produce, oscillates at the resonance frequency. When the waving or the alternating current is stopped, the radio waves that are subsequently produced by the oscillating needle will induce a voltage over the coil.

                          MRI uses the magnetic properties of spinning hydrogen atoms to produce images. The first step in MRI is the application of a strong, external magnetic field. For this purpose, the patient is placed within a large powerful magnet. Most current medical MRI machines have field strengths of 1.5 or 3.0 Tesla. The hydrogen atoms within the patient align in a direction either parallel or antiparallel to the strong external field. 

                          A greater proportion aligns in the parallel direction so that the net vector of their alignment, and therefore the net magnetic vector, will be in the direction of the external field. This is known as longitudinal magnetization. A second magnetic field is applied at right angles to the original external field. This second magnetic field is known as the radiofrequency pulse (RF pulse), because it is applied at a frequency in the same part of the electromagnetic spectrum as radio waves. A magnetic coil, known as the RF coil, applies the RF pulse.

                          The RF pulse causes the net magnetization vector of the hydrogen atoms to turn towards the transverse plane, i.e. a plane at right angles to the direction of the original, strong external field. The component of the net magnetization vector in the transverse plane induces an electrical current in the RF coil. This current is known as the MR signal and is the basis for formation of an image. Computer analysis of the complex MR signal from the RF receiver coils is used to produce an MR image.

                          12.4.2. The magnetism of the body 

                          Let‘s see how magnet needles with and without spin are affected by radio waves, we now turn to the “compass needles” in our own bodies.
                              a. Most frequently, the MR signal is derived from hydrogen nuclei (meaning the atomic nuclei in the hydrogen atoms). Most of the body’s hydrogen is found in the water molecules. Few other nuclei are used for MR.
                              b.  Hydrogen nuclei (also called protons) behave as small compass needles that align themselves parallel to the field.
                              c. The compass needles (the spins) are aligned in the field, but due to movements and nuclear interactions in the soup, the alignment only happens partially.
                              d. The nuclei in the body move among each other (thermal motion) and the net magnetization in equilibrium is thus temperature dependent. 
                              e. Due to the number of hydrogen nuclei (about 27 10 ) found in the body, the net magnetization still becomes measurable. It is proportional to the field: A large field produces a high degree of alignment and thus a large magnetization and better signal to noise ratio.

                          12.4.3.  Magnetic ResonanceImaging (MRI). 

                          In MRI, a particular type of nucleus is selected and its distribution in the body is monitored. Hydrogen is the most commonly imaged element, not only due to its abundance in the body but also because it gives the strongest MRI signals.

                          The technique uses a very powerful magnet to align the nuclei of atoms inside the body, and a variable magnetic field that causes the atoms to resonate, a phenomenon called nuclear magnetic resonance. The nuclei produce their own rotating magnetic fields that a scanner detects and uses to create an image. 

                          MRI is used to diagnose a variety of disorders, such as strokes, tumors, aneurysms, spinal cord injuries, multiple sclerosis and eye or inner ear problems. It is also widely used in research to measure brain structure and function, among other things.

                          An MRI scan can be used to examine almost any part of the body, including the:   • Brain and spinal cord 
                            • Bones and joints
                            • Breasts
                            • Heart and blood vessels
                            • Internal organs, such as the liver, womb or prostate gland ,etc
                          The results of an MRI scan can be used to help diagnose conditions, plan treatments and assess how effective previous treatment has been.

                          12.4.4. Functional of MRI Scan

                           Activity:12.8

                             a. Explain the function of MRI Scan.
                             b. What are the advantages and disadvantages of MRI Scan?
                             c. What are the hazards associated with MRI?

                          There are many forms of MRI, some of them are:
                            a. Diffusion-weighted imaging. 

                          Diffusion-weighted imaging (DWI) is sensitive to the random Brownian motion (diffusion) of water molecules within tissue. The greater the amount of diffusion, the greater the signal loss on DWI. Areas of reduced water molecule diffusion show on DWI as relatively high signal. Diffusion-weighted imaging is the most sensitive imaging test available for the diagnosis of acute cerebral infarction. With the onset of acute ischaemia and cell death there is increased intracellular water (cytotoxicoedema) with restricted diffusion of water molecules. An acute infarct therefore shows on DWI as an area of relatively high signal.

                          b. Perfusion-weighted imaging

                          In perfusion-weighted imaging (PWI) the brain is rapidly scanned following injection of a bolus of contrast material (gadolinium). The data obtained may be represented in a number of ways including maps of regional cerebral blood volume, cerebral blood flow, and mean transit time of the contrast bolus. PWI may be used in patients with cerebral infarct to map out areas of brain at risk of ischaemia that may be salvageable with thrombolysis.

                          c. Magnetic resonance spectroscopy 

                          Magnetic resonance spectroscopy (MRS) uses different frequencies to identify certain molecules in a selected volume of tissue, known as a voxel. Following data analysis, a spectrographic graph of certain metabolites is drawn. Metabolites of interest include lipid, lactate, NAA (N-acetylaspartate), choline, creatinine, citrate and myoinositol.

                          Uses of MRS include characterization of metabolic brain disorders in children, imaging of dementias, differentiation of recurrent cerebral tumour from radiation necrosis, and diagnosis of prostatic carcinoma. 

                          d. Blood oxygen level-dependent imaging 

                          Blood oxygen level-dependent (BOLD) imaging is a non-invasive functional MRI (fMRI) technique used for localizing regional brain signal intensity changes in response to task performance. BOLD imaging depends on regional changes in concentration of deoxyhemoglobin, and is therefore a tool to investigate regional cerebral physiology in response to a variety of stimuli. BOLD fMRI may be used prior to surgery for brain tumor or arteriovenous malformation (AVM), as a prognostic indicator of the degree of postsurgical deficit.

                          12.4.5 Advantage and disadvantages of MRI. 

                          Advantages of MRI in clinical practice include: 
                           1. Excellent soft tissue contrast and characterization
                           2. Lack of ionizing radiation.
                           3. Noninvasive machine.
                           4. Lack of artefact from adjacent bones, e.g. pituitary fossa

                          Disadvantages of MRI:
                           
                          1. High capital and running costs.
                           2. Image selected and interpretation is complex.
                           3. Examination can be difficult for some people who are claustrophobic
                           4. The examination is noisy and takes long.
                           5. Hazards with implants, particularly pacemakers.
                           6. Practical problems associated with large superconducting magnets. 

                          12.4.7. Checking my progress 

                           1. What is meant by relaxation in the context of MRI?
                           2. Give the reasons why the hydrogen nucleus is most used in MRI.
                           3. What does NMR stand for? Explain carefully the role of the three terms involved
                           4. Draw the basic steps in the formation of MRI image.

                          12.5 ENDOSCOPY 

                          Activity 12.9 
                           
                          a. How can we examine inside the stomach by using light rays? 
                          2. How is endoscope performed?
                           
                          12.3.1 Description 

                          Endoscopy is a nonsurgical procedure used to examine a person’s digestive tract. Using an endoscope, which is a flexible tube with a light and camera attached to it, the specialist can view pictures of your digestive tract on a monitor.
                          Endoscopy is a nonsurgical procedure used to examine a person’s digestive tract. Using an endoscope, which is a flexible tube with a light and camera attached to it, the specialist can view pictures of your digestive tract on a monitor. During an upper endoscopy, an endoscope is easily passed through the mouth and throat and into the esophagus, allowing the specialist to view the esophagus, stomach, and upper part of the small intestine. Similarly, endoscopes can be passed into the large intestine (colon) through the rectum to examine this area of the intestine. 

                          12.3.2 Upper endoscopy 

                          Upper Endoscopy (also known as gastroscopy, EGD, or esophagogastroduodenoscopy) is a procedure that enables your surgeon to examine the lining of the esophagus (swallowing tube), stomach and duodenum (first portion of the small intestine). A bendable, lighted tube about the thickness of your little finger is placed through your mouth and into the stomach and duodenum.

                                            
                          12.3.3. How is the upper endoscopy performed? 

                          Upper endoscopy is performed to evaluate symptoms of persistent upper abdominal pain, nausea, vomiting, difficulty swallowing or heartburn. It is an excellent method for finding the cause of bleeding from the upper gastrointestinal tract. It can be used to evaluate the esophagus or stomach after major surgery. It is more accurate than X-rays for detecting inflammation, ulcers or tumors of the esophagus, stomach and duodenum. Upper endoscopy can detect early cancer and can distinguish between cancerous and noncancerous conditions by performing biopsies of suspicious areas.
                                  
                          A variety of instruments can be passed through the endoscope that allows the surgeon to treat many abnormalities with little or no discomfort, remove swallowed objects, or treat upper gastrointestinal bleeding. Safe and effective control of bleeding has reduced the need for transfusions and surgery in many patients. 

                          12.3.4. Advantages and disadvantages of endoscopy 

                          Advantages

                           
                          • Complete visualization of the entire stomach or digestive tract.
                           • It is very safe and effective tool in diagnosis
                           • Does not leave any scar because it uses natural body openings. • It is cost effective and has low risk 
                           • They are generally painless.
                           • Can do therapeutic interventions
                           • Allows for sampling/biopsying of small bowel mucosa
                           • Allows for resection of polyps.

                          Disadvantages: 

                          Although the endoscope is very safe; however, the procedure has a few potential complications which may include:
                           • Bleeding
                           • Perforation (tear in the gut wall)
                           • Infection 
                           • Reaction to sedation (action of administering a sedative drug to produce a state of calm or sleep.
                           • Technically difficult procedure
                           • Very time consuming (Procedure can take > 3 hours)
                           • Patient may need to be admitted to the hospital
                           • Higher risk of small bowel perforation
                           • Case reports of pancreatitis and intestinal necrosis
                           • Reported incidents of aspiration and pneumonia

                          12.3.5 Checking my progress 

                             1. What are instruments used to view the esophagus, stomach and upper small intestine of human body?
                             2. Explain the function of endoscope.
                             3. Compare and contrast colonoscopy and gastroscopy

                          12.3.6. hazards associated with medical imaging 

                          The following are some hazards associated with medical imaging:
                            1. Exposure to ionizing radiation
                            2. Anaphylactoid reactions to iodinated contrast media
                            3. Contrast-induced nephropathy (CIN)
                            4. MRI safety issues
                            5. Nephrogenic systemic sclerosis (NSF) due to Gd-containing contrast media.

                          1. Exposure to ionizing radiation 

                          Radiation effects and effective dose Radiography, scintigraphy and CT use ionizing radiation. Numerous studies have shown that ionizing radiation in large doses is harmful. The risks of harm from medical radiation are low, and are usually expressed as the increased risk of developing cancer as a result of exposure. Radiation effects occur as a result of damage to cells, including cell death and genetic damage. Actively dividing cells, such as are found in the bone marrow, lymph glands and gonads are particularly sensitive to radiation effects.

                          2. Anaphylactoid contrast media reactions 

                          Most patients injected intravenously with iodinated contrast media experience normal transient phenomena, including a mild warm feeling plus an odd taste in the mouth. With modern iodinated contrast media, vomiting at the time of injection is uncommon. More significant adverse reactions to contrast media may be classified as mild, intermediate or severe anaphylactoid reactions:
                           • Mild anaphylactoid reactions: mild urticaria and pruritic
                           • Intermediate reactions: more severe urticaria, hypotension and mild bronchospasm
                           • Severe reactions: more severe bronchospasm, laryngeal oedema, pulmonary oedema, unconsciousness, convulsions, pulmonary collapse and cardiac arrest.

                          3. Contrast-induced nephropathy 


                          Contrast-induced nephropathy (CIN) refers to a reduction of renal function (defined as greater than 25 per cent increase in serum creatinine) occurring within 3 days of contrast medium injection. Risk factors for the development of CIN include:  

                          Pre-existing impaired renal function, particularly diabetic nephropathy, Dehydration, Sepsis, Age>60 years,  Recent organ transplant ,  Multiple myeloma. The risk of developing CIN may be reduced by the following measures:  Risk factors should be identified by risk assessment questionnaire.
                            • Use of other imaging modalities in patients at risk including US or noncontrast-enhanced CT.
                            • Use of minimum possible dose where contrast medium injection is required.    • Adequate hydration before and after contrast medium injection.
                            • Various pretreatments have been described, such as oral acetylcysteine; however, there is currently no convincing evidence that anything other than hydration is beneficial.

                          4. MRI safety issues 

                          Potential hazards associated with MRI predominantly relate to the interaction of the magnetic fields with metallic materials and electronic devices. Ferromagnetic materials within the patient could possibly be moved by the magnetic field causing tissue damage. Common potential problems include metal fragments in the eye and various medical devices such as intracerebral aneurysm clips. Patients with a past history of penetrating eye injury are at risk for having metal fragments in the eye and should be screened prior to entering the MRI room with radiographs of the orbits. The presence of electrically active implants, such as cardiac pacemakers, cochlear implants and neurostimulators, is generally a contraindication to MRI unless the safety of an individual device is proven.

                          5. Nephrogenic systemic sclerosis 

                          Nephrogenic systemic sclerosis (NSF) is a rare complication of some Gd-based contrast media in patients with renal failure. Onset of symptoms may occur from one day to three months following injection. Initial symptoms consist of pain, pruritis and erythema, usually in the legs. As NSF progresses there is thickening of skin and subcutaneous tissues, and fibrosis of internal organs including heart, liver and kidneys. Identifying patients at risk, including patients with known renal disease, diabetes, hypertension and recent organ transplant, may reduce the risk of developing NSF following injection of Gd- based contrast media.

                          Risk reduction in MRI 

                          A standard questionnaire to be completed by the patient prior to MRI should cover relevant factors such as:
                            • Previous surgical history
                            • Presence of metal foreign bodies including aneurysm clips, etc.
                            • Presence of cochlear implants and cardiac pacemakers 
                            • Possible occupational exposure to metal fragments and history of penetrating eye injury 
                            • Previous allergic reaction to Gd-based contrast media
                            • Known renal disease or other risk factors relevant to NSF.

                          END UNIT ASSESSMENT

                          Part I: Copy the following in your notebook and chose the correct answer
                             1. Which are included in the system components of gamma rays camera for producing image of the body? 
                                a.  Collimator b. Scintillation c. Attenuation d.  All of the above

                              2. Which of the following modalities does not use a form of ionizing radiation?        a. Radiography. b. Computed tomography. c. Sonography. d. Magnetic resonance imaging
                              3. Hazards not associated with modern medical imaging include:
                                  a. Anaphylactoid reactions to iodinated contrast media 
                                  b. Complication of some Gd-based contrast media in patients with renal failure. 
                                  c. Imaging of the breast improves a physician’s ability to detect small tumors 
                                  d. Radiation effects and effective dose Radiography.

                               4. Medical imaging systems are often evaluated the characteristics which are directly related to: 
                                   a. Image noise.   b. Image blurring.     c. Image unsharpness. d. Visibility of anatomical detail.

                               5. Risks associated with radionuclide imaging are: 
                                     a. Generally poor resolution compared with other imaging modalities.
                                     b. Rarely receiving an overdose of chemical injected in the vein of the body.  c. High capital and running costs 
                                     d. None of them.

                          Part II: Structured questions 
                               
                          6. Write the missing word or words on the space before each number.
                          The term ………………….. is often used to refer to X-ray CT. 
                                    e. Gastroscopy is a procedure that enables your surgeon to examine the lining of the ………….
                                     f. The most sensitive imaging test available for the diagnosis of acute cerebral infarction is …………... 
                                     g. Array of …………………. to transform the flashes into amplified electrical pulses inside the body.
                                      h. Transducers used are different depending on ………. of a patient, one has 5 MHz and other 3.5 MHz.
                                       i. Hydrogen nuclei (also called protons) behave as small …………… that align themselves parallel to the field.
                                       j. In ………………….. there are appearance three words: nuclear, magnetic and resonance.
                                       k. Examination can be ………………… is one of the disadvantages of MRI. 
                                    7.  Answer by True if it is True and by False if it is False
                                        a. The use of gamma radiation to form images following the injection of various radiopharmaceuticals is known as Scintigraphy. 
                                        b. This decision to scan or not to scan a normal pregnancy must be made only by the photographer. There are universally accepted guidelines at present.
                                        c. Tissue in the body absorbs and scatters ultrasound in the same ways. Lower frequencies are more rapidly absorbed (attenuated) than higher frequencies.
                                        d. Upper endoscopy uses light and camera to view the esophagus, stomach, and upper part of the small intestine.
                                        e. Ultrasound is both generated and detected through high frequency oscillations in piezoelectric crystals so there is ionizing radiation exposure associated with ultrasound imaging.

                                     8. Compare endoscopy imaging and radionuclide imaging
                                     9. What are the advantages of MRI in clinical practice?
                                   10. Is ultrasound safe? explain.
                                   11. What areas of the body can be imaged by ultrasound?
                                   12. Why is ultrasound used in pregnancy?
                                   13. Explain the advantage of CT scan 
                                  14. In mammography exams, is the breast compression necessary?Why 

                          Essay question Historically, MRI began in the central nervous system, but it is now extended to all regions of the human body. The excellent resolution and contrast available in any chosen plane in the body, makes the MRI an invaluable diagnostic tool with which to study body structure, function and chemistry, as well as disease. Discuss the application of MRI.

                          • Key unit Competence

                            By the end of the unit the learner should be able to analyze the use of radiation in

                            medicine. 

                            My goals

                            • Explain radiation dosimetry.

                            • Differentiate the terms exposure, absorbed dose, quality factor (relative to

                            biological effectiveness) and dose equivalent as used in radiation dosimetry.

                            • Differentiate physical half-life, biological half-life and effective half-life

                            • Solve radiation dosimetry problems

                            • Analyse the basics of radiation therapy for cancer.

                            • Explain safety precautions when handling radiations

                            • Describe the concept of balanced risk.

                            Introductory activity

                             Radiation has always been present and is all around us. Life has evolved in a world containing significant levels of ionizing radiation. Our bodies are adapted to it. People are constantly exposed to small amounts of ionizing radiation from the environment as they carry out their normal daily activities; this is known as background radiation. We are also exposed through some medical treatments and through activities involving radioactive material.

                            Fig 13.1 above identifies four major sources of public exposure to natural radiation: cosmic radiation, terrestrial radiation, inhalation and ingestion. Brainstorm and try to answer the following questions:

                            a. Distinguish artificial source of radiation and natural source of radiation?

                            b. Explain briefly each major source of public exposure to natural radiation

                            stated above.

                            c. Which kind of sources of radiation are mostly preferred to be used in

                            medicine? Explain why

                            d. Does exposure to heavy ions at the level that would occur during deepspace missions of long duration pose a risk to the integrity and function

                            of the central nervous system? Explain to support your idea.

                            13.1 RADIATION DOSE

                            13.1.1 Ionization and non-ionization radiations

                            Activity 13.1: Types of radiation

                            Radiation is the emission of particles or electromagnetic waves from a source.

                            Radiation from radioactive materials has the ability to interact with atoms and

                            molecules of living objects.

                            a. With the help of the diagram below, distinguish the forms of radiation?

                            b. Which type do you think is mostly used in medical treatment? Explain

                            your answer with supporting arguments?

                            c. Suggest the possible side effects of using radiations in medicine? Which

                            of the two forms of radiation induces more side effects when exposed to

                            human body? Explain to support your choice.


                            In a neutral atom, the positive charge of the nucleus is equal and opposite to the total negative charge of the orbital electrons. If such an atom loses or gains an electron, it becomes an ion. The atom will now have a net positive or negative charge and is called an ion. This process is called ionization, and the radiation responsible for it is called ionising radiation. When discussing the interaction of radiations with matter in particularly in relation to health, two basic types of radiation can be considered:

                            a. Ionizing radiation.

                             Thisis a radiation that carries enough energy to liberate electrons from atoms or molecules, thereby ionizing them. As the more powerful form of radiation, ionizing radiation is more likely to damage tissue than non-ionizing radiation. The main source of exposure to ionizing radiation is the radiation used during medical exams such as X-ray radiography or computed tomography scans. However, the amounts of radiation used are so small that the risk of any damaging effects is minimal. Even when radiotherapy is used to treat cancer, the amount of ionizing radiation used is so carefully controlled that the risk of problems associated with exposure is tiny.

                            All forms of living things emit a certain amount of radiation, with humans, plants and animals accumulating radioisotopes as they ingest food, air and water. Some forms of radiation such as potassium-40 emit high-energy rays that can be detected using measurement systems. Together with the background radiation, these sources of internal radiation add to a person’s total radiation dose.

                            Background radiation is emitted from both naturally occurring and man-made sources. Natural sources include cosmic radiation, radon radiation in the body, solar radiation and external terrestrial radiation. Man-made forms of radiation are used in cancer treatment, nuclear facilities and nuclear weapons. Globally, the average exposure to ionizing radiation per year is around 3 milliSieverts (mSv), with the main sources being natural (around 80%). The remaining exposure is due to man-made forms such as those used in medical imaging techniques. Exposure to man-made forms of ionizing radiations is generally much higher in developed countries where the use of nuclear imaging techniques is much more common than in developing countries.

                            b. Non-ionizing radiations

                             Non-ionizing radiation refers to any type of electromagnetic radiation that does not carry enough energy to ionize atoms or molecules. Examples of non-ionizing radiations include visible light, microwaves, ultraviolet (UV) radiation, infrared radiation, radio waves, radar waves, mobile phone signals and wireless internet connections. Although UV has been classified as a non-ionizing radiation but it has been proven that high levels of UV-radiation can cause sunburn and increase the risk of skin cancer developing.

                            Scientific investigations suggest that the use of telecommunications devices such as mobile phones may be damaging, but no risk associated with the use of these devices has yet been identified in any scientific studies. This energy is emitted both inside the body and externally, through both natural and man-made processes.

                            13.1.2 Radiation penetration in body tissue

                            Activity13.2:

                            The figure below shows the penetrating power of radiation represented by A, B

                            and C. Use the figure to answer the following questions. 


                            Questions:

                            a. Interpret the figure and write the names of letters A, B and C labeled on

                            the figure above?

                            b. Which of the three types of radiation has high penetrating power?

                            Explain to support your idea.

                            c. Outline four uses of the man-made sources of radiation?

                            d. How does radiation affect me? Explain clearly with scientific reasoning.

                            An important characteristic of the various ionising radiations is how deeply they can penetrate the body tissues. X-rays, gamma rays, and neutrons of sufficient energy described below can reach all tissues of the body from an external source.

                            • Alpha Radiation  

                            Alpha radiation occurs when an atom undergoes radioactive decay, giving off an α- particle consisting of two protons and two neutrons (essentially the nucleus of a helium-4 atom) following the equation


                            Due to their charge and mass, alpha particles interact strongly with matter, and can only travel a few centimeters in air. A thin sheet of paper, on the other hand, stops alpha particles. They are also stopped by the superficial dead layer of skin that is only 70 µm thick. Therefore, radionuclides that emit only alpha particles are harmless unless you take them into the body. This you might do by inhalation (breathing in) or ingestion (eating and drinking).

                            • Beta Radiation

                             Beta radiation takes the form of either an electron or a positron (a particle with the size and mass of an electron, but with a positive charge) being emitted from an atom. Due to their smaller mass, they are able to travel further in air, up to a few meters, and can be stopped by a thick piece of plastic, or even a stack of paper. Such radiation can penetrate the skin a few centimeters, posing somewhat of an external health risk. The depth to which beta particles can penetrate the body depends on their energy.

                            High-energy beta particles (several MeV) may penetrate a cm of a tissue, although most are absorbed in the first few mm. As a result, beta emitters outside the body are hazardous only to surface tissues such as the skin or the lenses of the eye. When you take beta emitters into the body, they will irradiate internal tissues and then become a much more serious hazard.

                            • Gamma Radiation

                             Gamma radiation, unlike alpha or beta, does not consist of any particles, instead consisting of a photon of energy being emitted from an unstable nucleus. Having no mass or charge, gamma radiation can travel much farther through air than alpha or beta, losing (on average) half its energy. Gamma waves can be stopped by a thick or dense enough layer material, with high atomic number. Materials such as lead can be used as the most effective form of shielding.

                            • X-Rays 

                            X-rays are similar to gamma radiation, with the primary difference being that they originate from the electron cloud. This is generally caused by energy changes in an electron, such as moving from a higher energy level to a lower one, causing the excess energy to be released. X-Rays are longer-wavelength and (usually) lower energy than gamma radiation, as well.

                            • Neutron Radiation 

                             Neutron radiation consists of a free neutron, usually emitted as a result of spontaneous or induced nuclear fission. They are able to travel hundreds or even thousands of meters in air, they are however able to be effectively stopped if blocked by a hydrogen material, such as concrete or water. Neutron radiation occurs when neutrons are ejected from the nucleus by nuclear fission and other processes. The nuclear chain reaction is an example of nuclear fission, where a neutron being ejected from one fission atom will cause another atom to fission, ejecting more neutrons. Unlike other radiations, neutron radiation is absorbed by materials with lots of hydrogen atoms, like paraffin wax and plastics.


                            13.1.3 Radiation dosimetry

                            Activity13.3

                            a. What does the term Dosimeter in radiation dosimetry mean?

                            b. Who Should Wear a Dosimeter? Suggest reasons why it is very important to wear a

                            dosimeter?

                            Just as for drugs, the effect of radiation depends on the amount a person has received. Therefore, amounts of radiation received are referred to as doses, and the measurement of such doses is known as dosimetry

                            Dosimeters are used to monitor your occupational dose from radioactive material or radiation-producing equipments. Most individuals working with X-ray producing equipment in the hospital will be issued with a dosimeter. For those individuals working in the research laboratory setting, dosimeters will be issued based on the nuclide and total activity that will be used. 

                            Dosimeters are integrating detectors; that is, they accumulate the radiation dose and give off an amount of light which is proportional to that dose. The energy absorption properties of dosimeters are designed to be very similar to tissue, so they are very effective as personnel dosimeters. These devices are used to measure exposures from x-ray, gamma ray and high energy beta particles.

                            Dosimeters are not suitable for measuring exposures to low energy beta particles or alpha particles.

                            13.1.4 Radiation exposure

                            Activity13.4:

                            a. What are the symptoms of radiation exposure?

                            b. Explain briefly the effects of radiation exposure to the human body?

                            c. It is possible that side effects can happen when a person undergoes

                            radiation treatment for cancer. Suggest the common side effects of

                            radiation exposure to the human body?

                            d. Does radiation exposure to the human body induce risks? Support your

                            decision with clear explanations.

                            Long-term exposure to small amounts of radiation can lead to gene mutations and increase the risk of cancer, while exposure to a large amount over a brief period can lead to radiation sickness.


                            13.1.5 Absorbed radiation dose

                            Activity13.5

                            a. What does the term absorbed dose mean in medical treatment?

                            b. In the application of radiation in medicine, we use the statement “A

                            measure of the risk of biological harm”. Brainstorm and explain clearly

                            what the statement means.

                            c. Explain why doses of alpha and gamma radiation produce unequal

                            biological effects?

                            What is important when we analyze the effect of radiation on human being is not so much the total dose to the whole system but the dose per kg. That’s why a doctor will prescribe smaller doses of medicine for children than for adults. A similar approach is used in radiation protection measurements, where the unit of absorbed dose is specified in terms of the amount of energy deposited by radiation in 1 kg of material. This unit is the Gray, abbreviated Gy.

                            It was named in honor of Louis Gray, who was a very big name in the early days of radiation dosimetry. An absorbed radiation dose of 1 Gray corresponds to the deposition of 1 joule of energy in 1 kg of material. The gray is a measure of energy absorbed by 1 kg of any material, be it air, water, tissue or whatever. A person who has absorbed a whole body dose of 1 Gy has absorbed one joule of energy in each kg of its body tissue.

                            As we shall see later, the gray is a fairly hefty dose, so for normal practical purposes we use the milligray (abbreviated mGy) and the microgray (abbreviated µGy). The gray is a physical unit. It describes the physical effect of the incident radiation (i.e., the amount of energy deposited per kg), but it tells us nothing about the biological consequences of such energy deposition in tissue. Studies have shown that alpha and neutron radiation cause greater biological damage for a given energy deposition per kg of tissue than gamma radiation does.

                            In other words, equal doses of, say, alpha and gamma radiation produce unequal biological effects. This is because the body can more easily repair damage from radiation that is spread over a large area than that which is concentrated in a small area. Because more biological damage is caused for the same physical dose.

                            13.1.6 Quality factors 

                            Quality factors are used to compare the biological effects from different types of radiation. For example, fast neutron radiation is considered to be 20 times as damaging as X-rays or gamma radiation. You can also think of fast neutron radiation as being of “higher quality”, since you need less absorbed dose to produce equivalent biological effects. This quality is expressed in terms of the Quality Factor (Q). The quality factor of a radiation type is defined as the ratio of the biological damage produced by the absorption of 1 Gy of that radiation to the biological damage produced by 1 Gy of X or gamma radiation. The Q of a certain type of radiation is related to the density of the ion tracks it leaves behind it in tissue; the closer together the ion pairs, the higher the Q.

                            13.1.7 Equivalent dose 

                            The absorbed radiation dose, when multiplied by the Q of the radiation delivering the dose, will give us a measure of the biological effect of the dose. This is known as the equivalent dose. The unit of equivalent dose H is the Sievert (Sv). An equivalent dose of one Sievert represents that quantity of radiation dose that is equivalent, in terms of specified biological damage, to one gray of X or gamma rays. In practice, we use the millisievert (mSv) and microsievert (µSv). The sievert is the unit that we use all the time, because it is the only one that is meaningful in terms of biological harm. In calculating the equivalent dose from several types of radiation (we call this “mixed radiation”), all measurements are converted to Sv, mSv or µSv and added.

                            Most of the radiation instruments we use to measure doses or dose rates read in mSv or µSv. Few other instruments can read in mGy or µGy, but they measure only gamma radiation.


                            13.1.8 Radiation protection

                             The effects of radiation at high doses and dose rates are reasonably well documented. A very large dose delivered to the whole body over a short time will result in the death of the exposed person within days. We know from these that some of the health effects of exposure to radiation do not appear unless a certain quite large dose is absorbed. However, many other effects, especially cancers are readily detectable and occur more often in those with moderate doses. At lower doses and dose rates, there is a degree of recovery in cells and in tissues. Radiation protection sets examples for other safety disciplines in two unique respects:

                            • First, there is the assumption that any increased level of radiation above natural

                            background will carry some risk of harm to health.

                            • Second, it aims to protect future generations from activities conducted today.

                            The use of radiation and nuclear techniques in medicine, industry, agriculture, energy and other scientific and technological fields has brought tremendous benefits to society. The benefits in medicine for diagnosis and treatment in terms of human lives saved are large in size. No human activity or practice is totally devoid of associated risks. Radiation should be viewed from the perspective that the benefit from it to mankind is less harmful than from many other agents.

                            Quick check 13.2:

                            At what level is radiation harmful? Explain your idea

                            Note: The optimization of patients’ protection is based on a principle that the dose to the irradiated target (tumor) must be as high as it is necessary for effective treatment while protecting the healthy tissues to the maximum extent possible.

                            13.1.9 Checking my progress

                            1. Does receiving external-beam radiation make a person radioactive or able

                            to expose others to radiation? Explain to support idea

                            2. How can I be sure that the external-beam radiating machine isn’t damaging

                            normal, healthy tissue in my body? Explain clearly with scientific reasoning.

                            3. I am having an imaging test using radioactive materials. Will I be radioactive

                            after the test? Comment to support your decision.

                            4. All my radioactive material is secured properly and I have empty waste

                            containers in the lab. Do I have to lock the room? Explain clearly to justify

                            your decision.

                            13.2 BIOLOGICAL EFFECTS OF RADIATION EXPOSURE

                            13.2.1 Deterministic and stochastic effects

                            Activity 13.6:

                            Is the use of ionizing radiation in medicine beneficial to human health? Explain to

                            support your point.

                            1. Are there risks to the use of ionizing radiation in medicine? Explain your

                            answer.

                            2. How do we quantify the amount of radiation?

                            3. What do we know about the nature (mechanism) of radiation-induced

                            biological effects?

                            4. How are effects of radiation classified? 

                            Effects of radiations due to cell killing have a practical threshold dose below which the effect is not evident but in general when the effect is present its severity increases with the radiation dose. The threshold doses are not an absolute number and vary somewhat by individual. Effects due to mutations (such as cancer) have a probability of occurrence that increases with dose.

                            a. Deterministic effects: 

                            These effects are observed after large absorbed doses of radiation and are mainly a consequence of radiation induced cellular death. They occur only if a large proportion of cells in an irradiated tissue have been killed by radiation, and the loss can be compensated by increasing cellular proliferation.

                            b. Stochastic effects:

                             They are associated with long term, low level (chronic) exposure to radiation. They have no apparent threshold. The risk from exposure increases with increasing dose, but the severity of the effect is independent of the dose. Irradiated and surviving cells may become modified by induced mutations (somatic, hereditary). These modifications may lead to two clinically significant effects: malignant neoplasm (cancer) and hereditary mutations.

                            The frequency or intensity of biological effects is dependent upon the total energy of radiation absorbed (in joules) per unit mass (in kg) of a sensitive tissues or organs. This quantity is called absorbed dose and is expressed in gray (Gy). In evaluating biological effects of radiation after partial exposure of the body further factors such as the varying sensitivity of different tissues and absorbed doses to different organs have to be taken into consideration.

                            To compare risks of partial and whole body irradiation at doses experienced in diagnostic radiology and nuclear medicine a quantity called equivalent or effective dose is used. A cancer caused by a small amount of radiation can be just as malignant as one caused by a high dose. 

                            Activity 13.7: 

                            1. What is magnitude of the risk for cancer and hereditary effects?

                            2. Is ionizing radiation from medical sources the only one to which people is

                            exposed?

                            3. What are typical doses from medical diagnostic procedures?

                            4. Can radiation doses in diagnosis be managed without affecting the

                            diagnostic benefit? Explain to support your decision.

                            5. Are there situations when diagnostic radiological investigations should be

                            avoided? Explain to support your decision. 

                            The lifetime value for the average person is roughly a 5% increase in fatal cancer after a whole body dose of 1 Sv. It appears that the risk in fetal life, in children and adolescents exceeds somewhat this average level (by a factor of 2 or 3) and in persons above the age of 60 it should be lower roughly by a factor of ~ 5.

                            Animal models and knowledge of human genetics, the risk of hereditary deleterious effects have been estimated to not be greater than 10% of the radiation induced carcinogenic risk. All living organisms on this planet, including humans, are exposed to radiation from natural sources. An average yearly effective dose from natural background amounts to about 2.5 mSv. This exposure varies substantially geographically (from 1.5 to several tens of mSv in limited geographical areas).

                            Various diagnostic radiology and nuclear medicine procedures cover a wide dose range based upon the procedure. Doses can be expressed either as absorbed dose to a single tissue or as effective dose to the entire body which facilitates comparison of doses to other radiation sources (such as natural background radiation. There are several ways to reduce the risks to very, very low levels while obtaining very beneficial health effects of radiological procedures. Quality assurance and quality control in diagnostic radiology and nuclear medicine play also a fundamental role in the provision of appropriate, sound radiological protection of the patient.

                            There are several ways that will minimize the risk without sacrificing the valuable information that can be obtained for patients’ benefit. Among the possible measures it is necessary to justify the examination before referring a patient to the radiologist or nuclear medicine physician. Failure to provide adequate clinical information at referral may result in a wrong procedure or technique being chosen by radiologist or nuclear medicine specialist. An investigation may be seen as a useful one if its outcome - positive or negative influences management of the patient. Another factor, which potentially adds to usefulness of the investigation, is strengthening confidence in the diagnosis. Irradiation for legal reasons and for purposes of insurance should be carefully limited or excluded.

                            Activity 13.8:

                            1. Are there special diagnostic procedures that should have special

                            justification? Explain to support your decision.

                            2. Do children and pregnant women require special consideration in

                            diagnostic procedures?

                            3. What can be done to reduce radiation risk during the performance of a

                            diagnostic procedure?

                            While all medical uses of radiation should be justified, it stands to reason that the higher the dose and risk of a procedure, the more the medical practitioner should consider whether there is a greater benefit to be obtained. Among these special position is occupied by computed tomography (CT), and particularly its most advanced variants like spiral or multi slice CT.

                            Both the fetus and children are thought to be more radiosensitive than adults. Diagnostic radiology and diagnostic nuclear medicine procedures (even in combination) are extremely unlikely to result in doses that cause malformations or a decrease in intellectual function. The main issue following in childhood exposure at typical diagnostic levels (<50 mGy) is cancer induction.

                            Medically indicated diagnostic studies remote from the fetus (e.g. radiographs of the chest or extremities, ventilation/perfusion lung scan) can be safely done at any time of pregnancy if the equipment is in proper working order. Commonly the risk of not making the diagnosis is greater than the radiation risk. If an examination is typically at the high end of the diagnostic dose range and the fetus is in or near the radiation beam or source, care should be taken to minimize the dose to the fetus while still making the diagnosis. This can be done by tailoring the examination and examining each radiograph as it is taken until the diagnosis is achieved and then terminating the procedure

                            For children, dose reduction in achieved by using technical factors specific for children and not using routine adult factors. In diagnostic radiology care should be taken to minimize the radiation beam to only the area of interest. Because children are small, in nuclear medicine the use of administered activity lower than that used for an adult will still result in acceptable images and reduced dose to the child. The most powerful tool for minimizing the risk is appropriate performance of the test and optimization of radiological protection of the patient. These are the responsibility of the radiologist or nuclear medicine physician and medical physicist.

                            The basic principle of patients’ protection in radiological X-ray investigations and nuclear medicine diagnostics is that necessary diagnostic information of clinically satisfactory quality should be obtained at the expense of a dose as low as reasonably achievable, taking into account social and financial factors.

                            13.2.2 Effects of radiation exposure

                            Quick check13.1:

                            Will small radiation doses hurt me? Some effects may occur immediately (days or months) while others might take tens of years or even get passed to the next generation. Effects of interest for the person being exposed to radiation are called somatic effects and effects of

                            I. Radiation Health 

                            Effects Ionizing radiation has sufficient energy to cause chemical changes in cells and damage them. Some cells may die or become abnormal, either temporarily or permanently. By damaging the genetic material (DNA) contained in the body’s cells, radiation can cause cancer.  Fortunately, our bodies are extremely efficient at repairing cell damage. The extent of the damage to the cells depends upon the amount and duration of the exposure, as well as the organs exposed.

                            Exposure to an amount of radiation all at once or from multiple exposures in a short period of time. In most cases, a large acute exposure to radiation causes both immediate ( radiation sickness) and delayed effects (cancer or death), can cause  sickness or even death  within hours or days.  Such acute exposures are extremely rare.

                            II. Chronic Exposure 

                            With chronic exposure, there is a delay between the exposure and the observed health effect. These effects can include cancer and other health outcomes such as benign tumors, cataracts, and potentially harmful genetic changes. Some radiation effects may occur immediately (days or months) while others might take years or even get passed to the next generation. Effects of interest for the person being exposed to radiation are called somatic effects and effects of interest that affect our children are called genetic effects.

                            Activity13.5: Low levels of radiation exposure

                            a. What is the safe level of radiation exposure? Explain your answer.

                            b. What is the annual radiation exposure limit? Explain your answer

                            Radiation risks refer to all excess cancers caused by radiation exposure (incidence risk) or only excess fatal cancers (mortality risk). Risk may be expressed as a percent, a fraction, or a decimal value.

                            For example, a 1% excess risk of cancer incidence is the same as a 1 in a hundred (1/100) risk or a risk of 0.01. However, it is very hard to tell whether a particular cancer was caused by very low doses of radiation or by something else.

                            While experts disagree over the exact definition and effects of “low dose”. Radiation protection standards are based on the premise that any radiation dose carries some risk, and that risk increases directly with dose.

                            Note:

                            • The risk of cancer from radiation also depends on age, sex, and factors such as

                            tobacco use.

                            • Doubling the dose doubles the risk. 

                            Acute health effects occur when large parts of the body are exposed to a large amount of radiation. The large exposure can occur all at once or from multiple exposures in a short period of time. Instances of acute effects from environmental sources are very rare.

                            13.2.3 Safety precautions for handling radiations

                            Activity 13.10: Safety precautions to be recognized when handling radiations

                            a. Who is involved in planning my radiation treatment?

                            b. How is the treatment plan checked to make sure it is best for me?

                            c. What procedures do I have in place so that the treatment team is able

                            to treat me safely?

                            d. How can I be assured that my treatment is being done correctly every

                            day?

                            e. What is the difference between a medical error and a side effect?

                            f. Outline the measures taken to reduce doses from external exposure

                            Shortening the time of exposure, increasing distance from a radiation source and shielding are the basic countermeasures (or protective measures) to reduce doses from external exposure.

                                                    

                            Note: Time: The less time that people are exposed to a radiation source, the less the absorbed dose Distance: The farther away that people are from a radiation source, the less the absorbed dose.

                                                                    

                            Note: Shielding: Barriers of lead, concrete or water can stop radiation or reduce radiation intensity. There are four main factors that contribute to how much radiation a person absorbs from a source. The following factors can be controlled to minimize exposure to radiation:

                            I. The distance from the source of radiation

                             The intensity of radiation falls sharply with greater distance, as per the inverse square law. Increasing the distance of an individual from the source of radiation can therefore reduce the dose of radiation they are exposed to. For example, such distance increases can be achieved simply by using forceps to make contact with a radioactive source, rather than the fingers.

                            II. Duration of exposure 

                            The time spent exposed to radiation should be limited as much as possible. The longer an individual is subjected to radiation, the larger the dose from the source will be. One example of how the time exposed to radiation and therefore radiation dose may be reduced is through improving training so that any operators who need to handle a radioactive source only do so for the minimum possible time.

                            III. Reducing incorporation into the human body

                             Potassium iodide can be given orally immediately after exposure to radiation. This helps protect the thyroid from the effects of ingesting radioactive iodine if an accident occurs at a nuclear power plant. Taking Potassium iodide in such an event can reduce the risk of thyroid cancer developing.

                            IV. Shielding 

                            Shielding refers to the use of absorbent material to cover the source of radiation, so that less radiation is emitted in the environment where humans may be exposed to it. These biological shields vary in effectiveness, depending on the material’s crosssection for scattering and absorption. The thickness (shielding strength) of the material is measured in g/cm2 . Any amount of radiation that does penetrate the material falls exponentially with increasing thickness of the shield.

                            Some examples of the steps taken to minimize the effects of radiation exposure are

                            described below;

                            • The exposed individual is removed from the source of radiation.

                            • If radiation exposure has led to destruction of the bone marrow, the number of healthy white blood cells produced in the bone marrow will be depleted.

                            • If only part of the body has been exposed to radiation rather than the whole body, treatment may be easier because humans can withstand radiation exposure in large amounts to non-vital body parts.

                            In every medicine there is a little poison. If we use radiation safely, there are benefits and if we use radiation carelessly and high doses result, there are consequences. Ionizing radiation can change the structure of the cells, sometimes creating potentially harmful effects that are more likely to cause changes in tissue. These changes can interfere with cellular processes so cells might not be able to divide or they might divide too much.

                            Radioactive rays are penetrating and emit ionizing radiation in the form of electromagnetic waves or energetic particles and can therefore destroy living cells. Small doses of radiation over an extended period may cause cancer and eventually death. Strong doses can kill instantly. Marie Curie and Enrico Fermi died due to exposure to radiation.

                            Several precautions should be observed while handling radioisotopes. Some of

                            these are listed in the following:

                            • No radioactive substance should be handled with bare hands. Alpha and beta

                            emitters can be handled using thick gloves. Gamma ray emitters must be

                            handled only by remote control that is by mechanical means. Gamma rays are

                            the most dangerous and over exposure can lead to serious biological damage.

                            • Radioactive materials must be stored in thick lead containers.

                            • Reactor and laboratories dealing with and conducting experiments with

                            radioactive metals must be surrounded with thick concrete lined with lead.

                            • People working with radioactive isotopes must wear protective clothing

                            which is left in the laboratory. The workers must be checked regularly with

                            dosimeters, and appropriate measures should be taken in cases of overdose.

                            • Radioactive waste must be sealed and buried deep in the ground.

                            13.2.3 Checking my progress

                            1.

                            a. What does the term background radiation mean?

                            b. Hat is radiation – am I exposed to background radiation each day even

                            if I do not have an X-ray examination?

                            2. What are the risks associated with radiation from diagnostic X-ray imaging

                            and nuclear medicine procedures?

                            3. How do I decide whether the risks are outweighed by the benefits of

                            exposure to X-radiation when I have a radiology test or procedure?

                            4. Are there alternatives to procedures that involve ionizing radiation that

                            would answer my doctor’s question? Justify your answer with clear facts.

                            5. What kinds of safety checks do you perform each day?

                            6. How often does the medical physicist check the various machines involved

                            during my treatment are working properly?

                            7. If I have side effects after my treatment, who can I call?

                            a. My best friend

                            b. My primary care doctor

                            8. I have a question about a radiation treatment I had many years ago. Who

                            should I call?

                            13.3 CONCEPT OF BALANCED RISK.

                            13.3.1 Risks of ionizing radiation in medical treatment

                            Activity13.12: balanced risk

                            Brainstorm and write briefly how balance risks in medical treatment occur?

                            Risk in the area of radiation medicine has several dimensions that are less common in other areas of medicine. First, there may be risks from overexposure that do not cause immediate injury. For example, the causal connection, if any, may be difficult or impossible to verify for a malignancy that surfaces several years after an inappropriate exposure. Second, the risks associated with the medical use of ionizing radiation extend beyond the patient and can affect health care workers and the public.

                            In amplifying these and other aspects of the risks that attend medical uses of ionizing radiation, the discussion addresses the following issues: human error and unintended events; rates of misadministration in radiation medicine; inappropriate and unnecessary care; and efforts that reduce misadministration and inappropriate care.

                            13.3.2 Human Error and Unintended Events 

                            Errors occur throughout health care: A pharmacist fills a prescription with the wrong medicine; an x-ray technician takes a film of the wrong leg; a surgeon replaces the wrong hip. The advent of complex medical technology has increased the opportunity for error even as it has increased the opportunity for effecting cures.

                            By educating health care workers, and by circumscribing their actions, human error may be minimized. However, some number of mistakes will always, unavoidably, be made, and no amount of training or double-checking can erase that fact.

                            13.3.3 Comparison of risks in the use of ionizing radiation 

                            The comparison of relative risks of misadministration in by-product radiation medicine to error rates and events in other medical practice settings, as well as the comparison of disease and death rates with the risks of the therapeutic administration itself, help to some extent to place ionizing radiation use in a broader context.

                            To achieve this success requires the highest standards of performance (accuracy of delivered dose), both when planning irradiation for an individual patient and in actual delivery of the dose. In a large number of cases, decreasing the dose to the target volume is not possible since it would unacceptably decrease the cure rate. In these cases present technological developments aim at optimizing the patients’ protection, keeping the absorbed tumor dose as high as is necessary for effective treatment while protecting nearby healthy tissues.

                            It should be remembered that successful eradication of a malignant tumor by radiation therapy requires high-absorbed doses and there is a delayed (and usually low) risk of late complication. The above mention techniques are used to provide the best benefit/risk ratio.

                            A malignant tumor in a pregnant woman may require radiotherapy in attempt to save life of the patient. If a tumor is located in a distant part of the body, the therapy with individually tailored protection of the abdomen (screening) - may proceed.

                            When thyroid cancer with metastases is diagnosed in a pregnant woman, treatment with 131I is not compatible with continuation of the pregnancy. The treatment should then be delayed until delivery if doing so wouldn’t put the mother’s life in danger. Medical radiation can be delivered to the patient from a radiation source outside the patient. Regardless of how much dose the patient received, they do not become radioactive or emit radiation.

                            • Balancing risks are often summarized in the following:

                            • The demand for imaging, especially computed tomography, that has increased

                            vastly over the past 20 years

                            • An estimated 30% of computed tomography tests that may be unnecessary

                            • Ionizing radiation that may be associated with cancer.

                            • The risks of radiation exposure that is often overlooked and patients are

                            seldom made aware of these risks

                            • The requesting doctor who must balance the risks and benefits of any high

                            radiation dose imaging test, adhering to guideline recommendations if

                            possible

                            • Difficult cases that should be discussed with a radiologist, ideally at a clinic

                            radiological or multidisciplinary team meeting.

                            13.3.4 Checking my progress

                            1. When patients are intentionally exposed to ionizing radiation for medical

                            purposes, do they suffer unintentional exposures as a result of error or

                            accident? Comment to support your idea.

                            2. What can be done to reduce radiation risk during conduct of radiation

                            therapy?

                            3. Can pregnant women receive radiotherapy? Explain to support your decision.

                            4. Can patients’ treatment with radiation affect other people? Explain to

                            support your decision.

                            13.4 THE HALF-LIVES: PHYSICAL, BIOLOGICAL, AND EFFECTIVE

                            Activity 13.14:

                            Distinguish between physical half-life, biological half-life and effective half-life.

                            Brainstorm and write the distinction between physical half-life, biological half-life and effective half-life in your note books.

                            The half-life is a characteristic property of each radioactive species and is independent of its amount or condition. The effective half-life of a given isotope is the time in which the quantity in the body will decrease to half as a result of both radioactive decay and biological elimination.

                            There are three half-lives that are important when considering the use of radioactive drugs for both diagnostic and therapeutic purposes. While both the physical and biological half-lives are important since they relate directly to the disappearance of radioactivity from the body by two separate pathways (radioactive decay, biological clearance), there is no half-life as important in humans as the effective half-life

                            The half-life takes into account not only elimination from the body but also radioactive decay. If there is ever a question about residual activity in the body, the calculation uses the effective half-life; in radiation dosimetry calculations, the only half-life that is included in the equation is the effective half-life.

                            13.4.1 Physical half Lives


                            The physical half-life is unaffected by anything that humans can do to the isotope. High or low pressure or high or low temperature has no effect on the decay rate of a radioisotope.

                            14.4.2 Biological half lives

                             Biological Half-life is defined as the period of time required to reduce the amount of a drug in an organ or the body to exactly one half its original value due solely to biological elimination. It is typically designated Tb . There are a few things to note about the Tb :

                            • For radioactive compounds, we have to calculate the Tb because the mass of the isotope is usually on the nanogram scale and, when distributed throughout the body, and especially in the target organ, concentrations are in the pictogram/ml range, much too small to measure directly.

                            • For non-radioactive compounds, we can measure the Tb directly. For example,

                            assuming that a person is not allergic to penicillin, we could give 1 000 mg of

                            the drug and then measure the amount present in the blood pool and in the

                            urine since we administered such a large amount of the drug.

                            • Tb is affected by many external factors. Perhaps the two most important are

                            hepatic and renal function. If kidneys are not working well, we would expect

                            to see a high background activity on our scans.

                            • Each individual organ in the body has its own Tb and the whole body also has

                            a Tb representing the weighted average of the Tb of all internal organs and

                            the blood pool. It is therefore very important to have a frame of reference. For

                            example, do you need to know the Tb of the drug in the liver or in the whole

                            body?

                            • All drugs have aTb , not just radioactive ones. Drug package inserts often refer

                            to the half-time of clearance of a drug from the blood pool or through the

                            kidneys.

                            • Since the whole body has a Tb representing the weighted average of the Tb of

                            all internal organs, it will almost never equal that of an internal organ. 

                            13.4.3 Effective half lives

                             Effective half-life is defined as the period of time required to reduce the radioactivity level of an internal organ or of the whole body to exactly one half its original value due to both elimination and decay.

                            It is designated Te can be measured directly. For example, one can hold a detection device 1 m from the patient’s chest and count the patient multiple times until the reading decreases to half of the initial reading.

                            The patient is permitted to use the rest room between readings as needed, so both elimination and decay are taking place. The half-life being measured in this case is the Te andTe is affected by the same external factors that affect Tb since Te is dependent uponTb .



                            13.4.4 Checking my progress

                            1. I-131 sodium iodide has a Tb of 24 days. What is Te if Tp = 8 d ?

                            2. A Tc-99 m compound has a Te = 1 days. What isTb if Tp = 6 d

                            3. A radiopharmaceutical has a biological half-life of 4.00 hr and an effective

                            half-life of 3.075 hr. What isotope was used? 

                            13.5 END UNIT ASSESSMENT

                            13.5.1 Multiple choice

                            1. Which of the following would reduce the cell damage due to radiation for a

                            lab technician who works with radioactive isotopes in a hospital or lab?

                            a. Increase the worker’s distance from the radiation source.

                            b. Decrease the time the worker is exposed to the radiation.

                            c. Use shielding to reduce the amount of radiation that strikes the worker.

                            d. Have the worker wear a radiation badge when working with the

                            radioactive isotopes.

                            e. All of the above.

                            2. If the same dose of each type of radiation was provided over the same

                            amount of time, which type would be most harmful?

                            a. X-rays. c. γ rays.

                            b. α Rays. d. β particles.

                            3. Which of the following is true?

                            a. Any amount of radiation is harmful to living tissue.

                            b. Radiation is a natural part of the environment.

                            c. All forms of radiation will penetrate deep into living tissue.

                            d. None of the above is true.

                            4. Which radiation induces the most biological damage for a given amount of

                            energy deposited in tissue?

                            a. Alpha particules.

                            b. Gamma radiation.

                            c. C. Beta radiation.

                            d. D. All do the same damage for the same deposited energy.

                            5. Which would produce the most energy in a single reaction?

                            a. The fission reaction associated with uranium-235.

                            b. The fusion reaction of the Sun (two hydrogen nuclei fused to one

                            helium nucleus).

                            c. Both (A) and (B) are about the same.

                            d. Need more information.

                            6. The fuel necessary for fusion-produced energy could be derived from

                            a. Water.        d. Superconductors.

                            b. Uranium.    e. Helium.

                            c. Sunlight.

                            13.5.2 Structured questions

                            7. If the equipment isn’t working and my treatment is delayed or postponed,

                            who checks that it is safe to use again? And will this delay affect my cancer?

                            8. Do you have weekly chart rounds where you review patient-related

                            information in peer review?

                            9. Will you take imaging scans regularly during my treatment to verify position

                            of my treatment? Who reviews those scans?

                            10. People who work around metals that emit alpha particles are trained that

                            there is little danger from proximity or touching the material, but they must

                            take extreme precautions against ingesting it. Why? (Eating and drinking

                            while working are forbidden.)

                            11. What is the difference between absorbed dose and effective dose? What are

                            the SI units for each?

                            12. Radiation is sometimes used to sterilize medical supplies and even food.

                            Explain how it works.

                            13. How might radioactive tracers be used to find a leak in a pipe?

                            14. Explain that there are situations in which we may or may not have control

                            over our exposure to ionizing radiation.

                            a. When do we not have control over our exposure to radiation?

                            b. When do we have control over our exposure to radiation?

                            c. Why might we want to limit our exposure to radiation when possible?

                            15. Does exposure to heavy ions at the level that would occur during deepspace missions of long duration pose a risk to the integrity and function of

                            the central nervous system?

                            16. Radiation protection of ionizing radiation from radiation sources is

                            particularly difficult. Give a reason for this difficulty. 

                            13.5.3 Essay questions

                            17. I always lock my radioactive material-use rooms. However, renovators came

                            in during the weekend, worked, and left the door open while they were

                            on their lunch break. Am I responsible and how can I prevent this from

                            happening? Debate on the situation above to support your answer.

                            18. How can I ensure that personnel who work in my lab, but do not use

                            radioactive material, do not violate the security requirements? Debate to

                            support your idea.

                            19. 19. A Housekeeping staff member opens my radioactive material-use room

                            after working hours and does not lock it when they leave. What should I do?

                            Explain clearly to support your idea.

                            20. Make a research and predict what steps that can or might be taken to reduce

                            the exposure to radiation (consider if living near a radioactive area like an

                            abandoned uranium mine, if finding a radioactive source, or in the event of

                            a nuclear explosion or accident). 


                            • Key unit Competence

                              By the end of the unit the learner should be able to explain the origin, the structure and the evolution of the Universe.

                              My goals

                              •Outline types of galaxies and cluster of galaxies.

                              •Explain the structure of Milky way galaxy and earth’s position

                              •Apply planetary motion knowledge to explain phenomena of planet motion.

                              •Explain Doppler shift due to cosmic expansion.

                              •State Hubble’s law.

                              •Explain the big bang theory and relate to the expansion of universe.

                              Introductory activity

                              1. a. Why are there different types of stars, such as red giants and white dwarfs, as well as main-sequence stars?

                              d. Were they all born this way, in the beginning? Or might each different type represent a different age in the life cycle of a star?

                              2. How can astronomers tell the galaxies are moving away? How the explosion at the beginning can explain such expansion?

                              14.1 GALAXIES AND CLUSTERS

                              Activity 14.1 Our place in the Universe

                              1. Our planet is the Earth and it orbits around the Sun, does the sun orbit anything?

                              2. How does the sun interact with other objects in the Universe?

                              14.1.1 The structure of the Milky Way Galaxy

                              The Milky Way is our own galaxy.It is a spiral galaxy, composed of three parts:

                              •The disk. Most of the stars in the Milky Way are located in a disk about 2 kpc thick, and about 40 kpc across. A parsec (pc) is a unit of distance commonly used in astronomy, 1pc=3.86x1016 m=3.26 ly. The disk is composed primarily of hot, young stars, and contains lots of dust and gas.

                              •The bulge. The bulge lies in the center of the galaxy. It is about 6 kpc across, and extends above and below the disk. There is very little gas or dust which arethe material required to form new stars. Therefore the bulge consists mainly of old stars.

                              •The halo. The halo is primarily made up of globular clusters, and is roughly spherical in shape. It is centered on the center of the galaxy, and is about 30 kpc to 40 kpc in radius. Again, there is very little dust and gas. The halo is primarily composed of old stars. Interestingly, most of these stars are low metallicity stars, which mean that they have even fewer metals than the Sun.

                              Our Galaxy has a diameter of almost 100 000 light-years and a thickness of roughly 2000 ly. It has a central bulge and spiral arms (Fig.14.1).


                              Our Sun, which is a star like many others, is located about halfway from the galactic centre to the edge, some 26 000 ly (8.5 kpc) from the centre. Our Galaxy contains roughly 400 billion stars 9(400 10 )×. The Sun orbits the galactic centre approximately once every 220 million years, so its speed is roughly 200km/s relative to the centre of the Galaxy. There is also strong evidence that our Galaxy is permeated and surrounded by a massive invisible “halo” of “dark matter”

                              In 1915, Shapley attempted to figure out the location of the center of the galaxy by mapping out the positions of globular clusters. A globular cluster is a group of hundreds of thousands of stars, all tightly bound together in a ball 20 pc to100 pc across. They have a very distinctive appearance, and so are easy to find (Halliday, Resneck, & Walker, 2007).

                              He discovered that 20% of the clusters lay in the direction of the constellation Sagittarius, and occupied only about 2% of the sky, and inferred that the bulk of the Galaxy must lie in that direction. He used RR Lyrae stars to estimate the distances to the globular clusters. He found that these globular clusters are centered on a point about 15 kpc from the Sun. Shapley reasoned that if the clusters were distributed evenly about the Galaxy (and there’s no reason to think they shouldn’t be), then the center of the Galaxy lies in the direction of Sagittarius, about 15 kpc away. Shapley didn’t know about dust and consequently he overestimated the distance to the center of the Galaxy by a factor of two. The center is actually about 8.5 kpc away (Douglass, PHYSICS, Principles with applications., 2014).

                              Example 14.1: Our Galaxy’s mass

                              Estimate the total mass of our Galaxy using the orbital data above for the Sun about the centre of the Galaxy. Assume the mass of the Galaxy is concentrated in the central bulge.

                              Answer

                              We assume that the Sun (including our solar system) has total mass m and moves in a circular orbit about the centre of the Galaxy (total mass M), and that the mass M can be considered as being located at the centre of the Galaxy. We then apply Newton’s second law,Fmα= with αbeing the centripetal acceleration, α=and for F we use the universal law of gravitation

                              Our Sun and solar system orbit the center of the Galaxy, according to the best measurements as mentioned above, with a speed of about v at a distance r from the Galaxy center we use Newton’s second law:

                              In terms of numbers of stars, if they are like our Sun there would be about stars.

                              14.1.2 Types of galaxies

                              There are three main types of galaxies: Elliptical, Spiral, and Irregular. Two of these three types are further divided and classified into a system that is now known the tuningfork diagram Fig 14.2. When Hubble first created this diagram, he believed that this was an evolutionary sequence as well as a classification. He believed that all galaxies started out as E0 ellipticals and evolved into spirals, as the galaxy flattened out and developed arms. Astronomers have found today that instead, possibly it is the other way around. The spiral galaxies sometimes merge to form elliptical galaxies (Linda, 2004).

                              a. Spirals

                              Spiral galaxies have three main components: a bulge, disk, and halo. The bulge is a spherical structure found in the center of the galaxy. This feature mostly contains reddish, older stars. The disk is made up of dust, gas, and bluish, younger stars. The disk forms arm structures. Our Sun is located in one of the arms, called the Orion arm which is thought to be an offshoot of the Sagittarius arm in our galaxy, the Milky Way.The halo of a galaxy is a loose, spherical structure located around the bulge and some of the disk. The halo contains reddish, old clusters of stars, known as globular clusters.

                              Spiral galaxies are classified into two groups, ordinary and barred. The ordinary group is designated by S, and the barred group by SB. In normal spirals (as seen Fig.14.5) the arms originate directly from the nucleus, or bulge, where in the barred spirals (see Fig.14.5) there is a bar of material that runs through the nucleus that the arms emerge from. Both of these types are given a classification according to how tightly their arms are wound.

                              The classifications are a, b, c, d ... with “a” having the tightest arms. In type “a”, the arms are usually not well defined and form almost a circular pattern. Sometimes you will see the classification of a galaxy with two lower case letters. This means that the tightness of the spiral structure is halfway between those two letters.



                              Elliptical galaxies are classified according to the elongation from a perfect circle (also known as the ellipticity). The larger the number, the more elliptical the galaxy is. So, for example a galaxy of classification of E0 appears to be perfectly circular, while a classification of E7 is very flattened (the most elliptical).

                              The elliptical scale varies from 0 to 7. Elliptical galaxies have no particular axis of rotation.Ellipticals galaxies can also be sorted by size:

                              Giant ellipticals are a few trillion parsecs across. They contain trillions of stars.

                              Dwarf ellipticals, on the other hand, are only about a thousand parsecs across, and contain millions of stars.

                              There are many dwarf elliptical galaxies than the giants, but the giants are so large that they actually contain most of the mass that is found in elliptical galaxies. Ellipticals contain very little gas and dust. Fig. 14.8 shows a few elliptical galaxies.

                              c. Irregulars

                              Irregular galaxies are all the galaxies that don’t fit in the other two categories. In general, they are thought to be the result of collisions between galaxies. They contain a lot of dust and gas, and consequently are full of young stars. They have no regular or symmetrical structure and the fraction of such galaxies is very small.They are divided into two groups, Irr I and IrrII.

                              Irr I type galaxies have HII regions, which are regions of elemental hydrogen gas, and many Population I stars, which are young hot stars. Irr II galaxies simply seem to have large amounts of dust that block most of the light from the stars. All this dust makes almost impossible to see distinctly stars in this kind of galaxies.

                              14.1.3 Clusters of galaxies

                              In addition to stars both within and outside the Milky Way, we can see by telescope many faint cloudy patches in the sky which were all referred to once as “nebulae” (Latin for “clouds”). A few of these, such as those in the constellations Andromeda and Orion, can actually be distinguished with unaided eye on a clear night.

                              A group of stars within a galaxy which are close to each other and held together by gravitational attraction is called stellar cluster. Some are star clusters (Fig. 14.10a), groups of stars that are so numerous they appear to be a cloud. Others are glowing clouds of gas or dust (Fig. 14.10b), and it is for these that we now mainly reserve the word nebula.

                              Most fascinating are those that belong to a third category: they often have fairlyregularelliptical shapes. Immanuel Kant (about 1755) guessed they are faint because they are a great distance beyond our Galaxy. At first it was not universally accepted that these objects were extragalactic—that is, outside our Galaxy. But the very large telescopes constructed in the twentieth century revealed that individual stars could be resolved within these extragalactic objects and that many contain spiral arms.

                              Edwin Hubble (1889–1953) did much of this observational work in the 1920s using the 2.5 m telescope on Mt. Wilson near Los Angeles, California, and then the world’s largest. Hubble demonstrated that these objects were indeed extragalactic because of their great distances.

                              The distance to our nearest large galaxy, Andromeda, is over 2 million light-years, a distance 20 times greater than the diameter of our Galaxy. It seemed logical that these nebulae must be galaxies similar to ours. (Note that it is usual to capitalize the word “galaxy” only when it refers to our own.) Today it is thought there are roughly 1110galaxies in the observable universe—that is, roughly as many galaxies as there are stars in a galaxy. (See Fig. 14.11.)


                              Many galaxies tend to be grouped in galaxy clusters held together by their mutual gravitational attraction. Our own, called localgroup, contains at least 28 galaxies. Of these, three are spirals, eleven are irregulars and fourteen are ellipticals. There may be anywhere from a few dozen to many thousands of galaxies in each cluster. Furthermore, clusters themselves seem to be organized into even larger aggregates: clusters of clusters of galaxies, or superclusters.

                              Some astronomical measurements indicate that there is “something else” among the stars and interstellar materials. This is called dark matter, because it cannot be seen, but it apparently has mass and does affect other matter and gravitational fields. Although the so-called dark matter appears to account for around 90% of the mass of most galaxies, the nature of this material is not well understood. At the center of some galaxies, there may be super massive black holes. Again, they cannot be seen but they are indicated on how they affect the nearby stars.

                              14.1.4 Checking my progress

                              1. List the three major classifications of Galaxies. What do they all have in common?2. What is the name of the Galaxy that you live in?

                              14.2 COSMOLOGY

                              Activity 14.2: How stars are formed

                              What does it mean that distant galaxies are all moving away from us, and with ever greater speed the farther they are from us? Explain how the Hubble constant may be used to estimate the age of the universe

                              1. How do stars form? What factors determine the masses, luminosities, and distribution of stars in our Galaxy?

                              Cosmology aims to explain the origin and evolution of the Universe, the underlying physical processes, and thereby to obtain a deeper understanding of the laws of Physics assumed to hold throughout the Universe. Cosmology is the study of the history of the Universe as a whole, both its structure and evolution.

                              The study assumes that over large distances the Universe looks essentially the same from any location (the Universe is homogeneous) and that the Universe looks essentially the same in all directions (the Universe is isotropic). The two assumptions are known as the cosmologicalprinciple. In addition, it is assumed that the same laws of Physics hold everywhere in the Universe.

                              To study the evolution of the Universe, astronomers rely on observations of distant objects. For example, the Andromeda Galaxy (M31) is about 2 million light years away. This means that our photographs of M31 show the galaxy as it was 2 million years ago. The Virgo cluster of galaxies is about 50 million light years away, and the information presently received by our telescopes describe the state of the cluster as it was 50 million years ago. Information received from galaxies that are billions of light years away pertains to the state of these objects as they were billions of years ago, when they were much younger, possibly just forming. Receiving information from distant objects is equivalent to receiving information from the past. This information is vital in reconstructing the evolutionary stages of the galaxies, and the Universe as a whole.

                              14.2.1 Doppler shift due to cosmic expansion

                              Activity14.3: Doppler Effect

                              How Doppler Effect is used in communication with satellites?

                              1. How is the Doppler Effect used in Astronomy?

                              Movement toward or away from a source of radiation does indeed change the way we perceive the radiation.

                              Motion along any particular line of sight is known as radial motion. It should be distinguished from transverse motion, which is perpendicular to the line of sight. Radial motion but- not transverse motion- brings about changes in the observed properties of radiation.

                              In visible light, red light has the longest wavelength, and violet light the shortest. The light of an object moving away from an observer is shifted toward longer wavelengths (red color). The light from an object moving at a high speed toward an observer is shifted toward the color violet.

                              This change in the observed wavelength of a wave be it an electromagnetic (light) wave or an acoustical (sound) wave is known as the Doppler Effect, in honor of Christian Doppler, the nineteenth century Austrian physicist who first explained it.

                              Astronomers most often use the Doppler Effect to measure the velocity of galaxies, which are moving away from Earth the (red-shift effect, a shift to lower frequencies) or toward the Earth (blue-shift, toward shorter wavelength).

                              Blue-shift

                              The equation for the observed frequency of a light wave when the source is traveling toward you (blue-shift) is:

                              The blue-shift equation for wavelength is:

                              where

                              fb is the observed blue-shift frequency

                              vb is the velocity of the source moving toward you

                              c is the speed of light. c >> vb (c is much greater than vs)

                              λb is the observed blue-shift wavelength

                              λ is the emitted wavelength (Greek symbol lambda)

                              •Red-shift

                              The equation for the observed frequency of a light wave when the source is traveling away from you (red-shift) is:

                              The red-shift equation for wavelength is:

                              Where

                              rf is the observed red-shift frequency,

                              rv is the velocity of the source moving away from you,

                              is the observed red-shift wavelength,

                              λ is the emitted wavelength (Greek symbol lambda

                              Note that “−” and “+” are reversed as compared to the standard Doppler Effect equations of sound waves. In general, when an object is approaching or moving away, the wavelength of the light it emits (or reflects) is changed. The shift of the wavelength,, is directly related to the velocity, v, of the object:

                              This value is known as the cosmological redshift of a star, denoted

                              •If z is positive, the star is moving away from us (receding object)- the wavelength is shifted up towards the red end of the electromagnetic spectrum.

                              •If z is negative, the star is moving towards us. This is known as blue shift and the emitted wavelength appears shorter

                              Example 14.2

                              If a distant galaxy is moving away from us at approximately 50 000 km/s and we approximate the speed of light (λ= 434 nm, which is in the violet region of the visible spectrum) as c = 300 000 km/s, calculate the resulting wavelength

                              Answer

                              the resulting wavelength will be

                              Substitute values into equation:

                              The line has shifted from violet to green.

                              Quick check 14.1:

                              a. M31 (the Andromeda galaxy) is approaching us at about 120 km s-1. What is its red/blue-shift?

                              b. Some light from M31 reaches us with a wavelength of 590 nm. What is its wavelength, relative to M31?

                              Velocity

                              Typically, an astronomer would study the spectrum of a distant star or galaxy and measure the new observed spectral lines of the various elements on the object. Then the direction and velocity of the star or galaxy would be determined.The blue-shift equation for velocity is:

                              The red-shift equation for velocity is: 

                              Where λ is the wavelength emitted if the object is at rest and v is the component of the velocity along the ‘‘line of sight’’ or the ‘‘radial velocity.’’

                              Example 14.3

                              Suppose that molecules at rest emit with a wavelength of 18 cm. You observe them at a wavelength of 18.001 cm. How fast is the object moving and in which direction, towards or away from you?

                              Answer

                              To find out how quickly, use the Doppler equation:This problem calls for the Doppler equation.

                              The molecules are travelling with a radial speed of 16.7 km/s. Since the wavelength is longer, the light has been red-shifted, or stretched out, and so the object is moving away from you.

                              Quick check 14.2.

                              A radio spectrum of an interstellar cloud shows the 21 cm line shifted to 21.007 cm. Is the cloud approaching, receding, or remaining at the same distance from us? If it is travelling, what is its speed?

                              14.2.2 The Hubble’s law

                              Activity 14.4: Hubble’s law

                              Discuss the limitations of Hubble’s law. Explain how the Hubble constant may be determined.

                              Analysis of redshifts from many distant galaxies led Edwin Hubble to a remarkable conclusion. The speed of recession of a galaxy is proportional to its distance from us (Fig. 14.10). This relationship is now called the Hubble law; expressed as an equation,

                              Where

                              The is then commonly expressed in the mixed units (kilometers per second per megaparsec) where

                              To appreciate the immensity of this distance, consider that our farthest-ranging unmanned spacecraft have traveled only about 0.001 ly from our planet.

                              Another aspect of Hubble’s observations was that, in all directions, distant galaxies appeared to be receding from us. There is no particular reason to think that our Galaxy is at the very center of the Universe; if we lived in some other galaxy, every distant galaxy would still seem to be moving away. That is, at any given time, the universe looks more or less the same, no matter where in the universe we are. This important idea is called the cosmological principle.

                              There are local fluctuations in density, but on average, the universe looks the same from all locations. Thus the Hubble constant is constant in space although not necessarily constant in time, and the laws of Physics are the same everywhere.

                              Example 14.4 Recession speed of a galaxy

                              1. The spectral lines of various elements are detected in light from a galaxy in the constellation Ursa Major. An ultraviolet line from singly ionized calcium λ= 393nmis observed at wavelength λ=414rnm red-shifted into the visible portion of the spectrum.

                              a. At what speed is this galaxy receding from us?

                              b. Use the Hubble law to find the distance from earth to the galaxy

                              Answer

                              a. This example uses the relationship between redshift and recession speed for a distant galaxy. We can use the wavelengths λ at which the light is emitted and rλ that we detect on earth in Eq. (14.05) to determine the galaxy’s recession speed v if the fractional wavelength shift is not too great. The redshift is

                              For high redshift the speed is obtained by the following formula:

                              b. Use the Hubble law to find the distance from Earth to the galaxy Answer The Hubble law relates the redshift of a distant galaxy to its distance r from earth. We solve Eq.for r and substitute the recession speed v from Eq

                              14.2.4 The Big Bang theory and expansion of Universe

                              Activity 14.5: Stellar expansion

                              1. How does the curvature of the universe affect its future destiny?

                              2. Describe some of the evidence that the universe started with a “Big Bang.”

                              3. How does dark energy affect the possible future of the universe?

                              4. Explain how the big bang theory explains the observed Doppler Shifts of Galaxies.

                              The major theory of how the Universe started is the “Big Bang” theory. This states that about 13.7 billion years ago (13 700 000 000 years) all matter was compressed to what some estimate was the size of a golf ball. It then expanded in a “big bang” and spread out until it has reached the enormous size of the present-day Universe. While the matter was spreading out, it started to clump together into larger and larger masses. The turbulence of the expansion resulted in the spinning of the galaxies.

                              The whole idea of the Big Bang theory came when astronomers noticed that distant nebulas (or more correctly, nebulae) and galaxies were all moving away from us. It was also seen that they were moving away at speeds proportional to their distance from us. Since it is assumed that our galaxy is also moving in some direction, it was calculated that all of the galaxies in the universe were moving away from some given point in space.

                              The way astronomers were able to estimate the speed of the galaxies is by what is called the “red-shift” of their light. The red-shift is a form of Doppler Effect with light, such that when an object is moving away from you at high speeds, the light shifts towards lower frequencies.

                              Measurements show that the Universe is still expanding. By interpolating the directions and velocities backward, astronomers have estimated the beginning time of the explosion. Of course, such measurements are highly inaccurate. There is debate on this theory and whether the Universe will continue to expand or will start to contract.

                              The Hubble law suggests that at some time in the past, all the matter in the universe was far more concentrated than it is today. It was then blown apart in an immense explosion called the Big Bang, giving all observable matter more or less the velocities that we observe today.

                              When did this happen? According to the Hubble law, matter at a distance away from us is traveling with speed dv. the time needed to travel a distance is:

                              By this hypothesis the Big Bang occurred about 14 billion years ago. It assumes that all speeds are constant after the Big Bang; that is, it neglects any change in the expansion rate due to gravitational attraction or other effects. We’ll return to this point later. For now, however, notice that the age of the earth determined from radioactive dating is 4.54 billion years. It’s encouraging that our hypothesis tells us that the universe is older than the earth!

                              The expansion of the universe suggests that typical objects in the universe were once much closer together than they are now. This is the basis for the idea that the universe began about 14 billion years ago as an expansion from a state of very high density and temperature known affectionately as the Big Bang.

                              The birth of the universe was not an explosion, because an explosion blows pieces out into the surrounding space. Instead, the Big Bang was the start of an expansion of space itself. However, after the expansion of the universe, matter exploded into stars and galaxies. The observable universe was relatively very small at the start and has been expanding, getting ever larger, ever since. The initial tiny universe of extremely dense matter is not to be thought of as a concentrated mass in the midst of a much larger space around it.

                              The initial tiny but dense universe was the entire universe. There wouldn’t have been anything else. When we say that the universe was once smaller than it is now, we mean that the average separation between objects (such as electrons or galaxies) was less. The universe may have been infinite in extent even then, and it may still be now (only bigger). The observable universe (that which we have the possibility of observing because light has had time to reach us) is, however, finite.

                              14.2.4 Stellar evolution

                              Activity14.6: How are stars born

                              1. Explain why giants are not in the main sequence on theH-R diagram.

                              2. How do their temperatures and absolute magnitudes compare with those of main sequence stars?

                              It is believed that stars are born, when gaseousclouds (mostly hydrogen) and dust called a nebula contract due to the pull of gravity. Gravitational forces cause instability within the nebula. A huge gas cloud might fragment into numerous contracting masses, each mass centered in an area where the density is only slightly greater than that at nearby points. Once such “globules” form, gravity causes each to contract in toward its center of mass see Fig.14.13.

                              As the particles of such a protostar accelerate inward, their kinetic energy increases. Eventually, when the kinetic energy is sufficiently high, the Coulomb repulsion between the positive charges is not strong enough to keep all the hydrogen nuclei apart, and nuclear fusion can take place. When the particles in the smaller clouds move closer together, the temperatures in each nebula increase. As temperatures inside each nebula reach 10 000 000 K, fusion begins. The energy released radiates outward through the condensing ball of gas. As the energy radiates into space, stars are born.

                              In a star like our Sun, the fusion of hydrogen (sometimes referred to as “burning”) occurs via the proton–proton chain, in which four protons fuse to form a 4/2Henucleus with the release of γrays, positrons, and neutrinos:

                              These reactions require a temperature of about 107 K , corresponding to an average kinetic energy of about 1 keV.

                              The tremendous release of energy in this fusion reaction produces an outward pressure sufficient to halt the inward gravitational contraction. Our protostar, now really a young star, stabilizes on the mainsequence. Exactly where the star falls along the main sequence depends on its mass. The more massive the star, the farther up (and to the left) it falls on the H–R diagram of Fig. 14.14.

                              Our Sun required perhaps 30 million years to reach the main sequence, and is expected to remain there about 10 billion years but a star ten times more massive may reside there for only More massive stars have shorter lives, because they are hotter and the Coulomb repulsion is more easily overcome, so they use up their fuel faster. As it moves upward, it enters the redgiant stage. Thus, theory explains the origin of red giants as a natural step in a star’s evolution.

                              As hydrogen fuses to form helium, the helium that is formed is denser and tends to accumulate in the central core where it was formed. As the core of helium grows, hydrogen continues to fuse in a shell around it.

                              When much of the hydrogen within the core has been consumed, the production of energy decreases at the center and is no longer sufficient to prevent the huge gravitational forces from once again causing the core to contract and heat up.

                              The hydrogen in the shell around the core then fuses even more aggressively because of this rise in temperature, allowing the outer envelope of the star to expand and to cool. The surface temperature, thus reduced, produces a spectrum of light that peaks at longer wavelength (reddish). This process marks a new step in the evolution of a star. The star has become redder, it has grown in size, and it has become more luminous, which means it has left the main sequence. It will have moved to the right and upward on the on the H–R diagram, as it moves upward, it enters the red giant stageas shown in Fig. 14.15


                              Low Mass Stars—White Dwarfs

                              After the star’s core uses up its supply of helium, it contracts even more. As the core of a star like the sun runs out of fuel, the outer layers escape into space. This leaves behind the hot, dense core. The core contracts under the force of gravity. At this stage in a star’s evolution, it is a white dwarf. A white dwarf is about the size of Earth.

                              Stars born with a mass less than about 8 solar masses eventually end up with a residual mass less than about 1.4 solar masses. A residual mass of 1.4 solar masses is known as the Chandrasekhar limit.

                              For stars smaller than this, no further fusion energy can be obtained because of the large Coulomb repulsion between nuclei. The core of such a “low mass” star (original solar masses) contracts under gravity. The outer envelope expands again and the star becomes an even brighter and larger red giant, Fig.14.15. Eventually the outer layers escape into space, and the newly revealed surface is hotter than before. So the star moves to the left in the H–R diagram see Fig.14.15. Then, as the core shrinks the star cools, and typically follows the downward, becoming a white dwarf. A white dwarf with a residual mass equal to that of the Sun would be about the size of the Earth.

                              white dwarf contracts to the point at which the electrons start to overlap, but no further because, by the Pauli exclusion principle, no two electrons can be in the same quantum state. At this point the star is supported against further collapse by this electron degeneracy pressure. A white dwarf continues to lose internal energy by radiation, decreasing in temperature and becoming dimmer until it glows no more. It has then become a cold dark chunk of extremely dense material.

                              Supergiant and supernova

                              In stars that are over ten times more massive than our sun, the stages of evolution occur more quickly and more violently. The core heats up to much higher temperatures. Heavier elements form by fusion. The star expands into a supergiant. Eventually, iron forms in the core. Fusion can no longer occur once iron is obtained. In fact, iron is so tightly bound that no energy can be extracted by fusion.However, when it happen that Iron fuses, it absorbs energy in the process and the cote temperature and pressure drop. The core collapses violently, sending a shock wave outward through the star. The outer portion of the star explode, producing a supernova. A supernova can be millions of times brighter than the original star.

                              Neutron stars and black holes

                              The collapsed core of a supernova shrinks to about 10 km to 15 km. only neutrons can exist in dense core, and the supernova becomes a neutron star. If the remaining dense core is over three times more massive than the sun, probably nothing can stop the core’s collapse. It quickly evolves into a blackhole- an object so dense, nothing can escape its gravity field. In fact, not even light can escape a black hole.

                              Nebulas

                              A star begins its life as a nebula, but where does the matter in nebula come from? Nebulas form partly from the matter that was once in other stars. This matter can be incorporated into other nebulas, which can evolve into new stars. The matter in stars is recycled many times. However, when it happen that iron fuse, it absorbs energy in the process and the core temperature and pressure drops.

                              14.2.5 Checking my progress

                              1. If the velocity of the source was 0.1c toward you, what would be the new frequency?

                              a. 1.1 c

                              b. 1.1 f

                              c. Not enough information

                              2. If c = 186 000 mi/s and vr = 6 000 mi/s away from the Earth, what would be the observed wavelength?

                              a. 1.03λ

                              b. 0.97λ

                              c. λ

                              3.If the observed wavelength λr equals the emitted wavelength, what is vr?

                              a. c

                              b. 2c

                              c. 0

                              4. About how far does light travel in 1/10 second?

                              a. 18 600 miles or 30 000 km

                              b. 186 000 miles or 300 000 km

                              c. 1 860 000 miles or 3 000 000 km

                              5. Why does light bend when it goes through glass at an angle?

                              a. It goes faster, causing the beam to bend

                              b. It goes slower, causing the beam to bend

                              c. Light can’t pass through glass

                              6. What happens when matter travels at 190 000 miles/sec or 310 000 km/s?

                              a. The matter heats up because of the high speed

                              b. It becomes invisible to most people

                              c. Matter can’t go faster than the speed of light

                              7. Where is the speed of light highest? Speed of light is maximum in water, air or steel?

                              8. Some light has a wavelength, relative to M31, of 480 nm. What is its wavelength, relative to us?

                              14.3 END UNIT ASSESSMENT

                              14.3.1 Multiple choices:

                              1. What is a result of the Big Bang Theory?

                              a. Not Sure

                              b. An estimate of how many years ago the Universe began

                              c. An explanation of life on Earth

                              d. The disproving of the Theory of Relativity

                              2.How did ancient people discover things about astronomy?

                              a. Not Sure

                              c. They read it in a book b. They were observant

                              d. They worshiped the Sun god

                              3. Why do they call it dark matter?

                              a. Not Sure

                              b. Because it is very heavy

                              c. Because it is a dark brown color

                              d. Because no one has seen it

                              4. What planet is known for its rings?

                              a. Not Sure

                              c. Earth

                              b. Mars

                              d. Saturn

                              14.3.2 Solve these problems

                              5. The Sun (and everything else in the Galaxy), is in orbit around the center. The Sun’s velocity is 220 km/s. The Sun’s galactic radius is 8.5 kpc. Using the velocity of the Sun (220 km/s), and its distance from the center of the Milky Way (8 500 pc), calculate how long it takes the Sun to orbit the center.

                              6. Describe how we can estimate the distance from us to other stars.Which methods can we use for nearby stars, and which can we use for very distant stars? Which method gives the most accurate distance measurements for the most distant stars?

                              7.GEAT THINKERS KRISS KROSS: Fill the names of these famous scientists and thinkers into the puzzle. We’ve filled in one name to get you started.

                              4 letters: CROSS (English physician)5 letters:

                              GAMON (Russian-born American physicist)

                              •GAUSS (German mathemathician and astronomer)

                              •MORSE (American inventer)

                              6 letters:

                              DARWIN (English naturalist)

                              EDSON ( American inventor)

                              EUCLID (Greeek mathematician and physicist)

                              JENNER (English physicist)

                              7 letters:

                              FARADAY (English physicist and chemist)

                              •Pasteur (French chemist)

                              PAULING (American chemist)

                              PTOLEMY (Greek-Egyptian astronomer and geographer)

                              10 letters: Aristarchus (Greek astronomer)7.

                              8. Find and circle the hidden science words. Look up, down, across, diagonally, and backward.

                              Air, atmosphere, bacteria, bolt, chemical, gas, mineral, odor, ozone, temperature, thunder, vapor, virus, water.

                              9. Fit the names of these famous scientists and thinkers into the puzzle. We have filled in one name to get you started.

                              3 letters: LEE (Chinese-born American physicist)

                              4 letters:

                              •BELL (Scottish-born American inventor)

                              •BOHR (Danish physicist)

                              •YOUNG (Chinese-born American physicist)5 letters

                              •CURIE (Polish-born French chemist and physicist)

                              •SOGAN (American astronomer)

                              6 letters:

                              •FERMAT (French mathematician)

                              •MENDEL (Austrian botanist)

                              •NEWTON (English mathematician and scientist)7 letters

                              •EHRLICH (German bacteriologist)

                              •GALILEO (Italian astronomer and physicist)

                              •LEIBNIZ (German philosopher and mathematician)•MARCONI (Italian engineer and inventor)

                              •MAXWELL (Scottish physicist)

                              8 letters:

                              EINSTEIN (German-born American theoretical physicist)

                              FRANKLIN (American statesman and scientist)

                              LINNAEUS (Swedish botanist)

                              10. INTERPLANETARY WORD FIND: Find and circle the hidden words. Look up, down, across, diagonally, and backward.

                              Earth, Galaxy, Jupiter, Mars, Meteor, Moon, Orbit, Planet, Pluto, Ring, Satellite, Saturn, Sun, Telesphore, Venus.

                              Bibliography

                              eschooltoday. (2008-2018). Retrieved February 19, 2018, from natural diseasters: httpeschooltoday. (2008-2018). Retrieved February 19, 2018, from Climate change: httphttp://www.threastafrican.co.ke. (2017). Retrieved from rwanda/Business/kigali.Abbot, A. F., & Cockcroft, J. (1989). Physics (5 ed.). Heinemann: Educational Publishers.Atkins, K. R. ( 1972). Physics-Once over Lightly. New York : New York.Avison, J. (1989). The world of PHYSICS. Cheltenham: Thomas Nelson and Sons Ltd.AVISON, J. (1989). The world of PHYSICS. Cheltenham: Thomas Nelson and Sons Ltd.BIPM. (2006). The International System of Units (SI). (8 ed.). Sevres, France: International Bureau of Weights and Measures.Breithaupt, J. (2000). Understanding Physics For Advanced Level. (4 ed.). Ellenborough House, Italy: Stanley Thorners.Chand, S., & S.N., G. S. (2003). Atomic Physics (Modern Physics) (1 ed.). India.CPMD. (2015). Advanced Level Physics Sylabus. Kigali: REB.Cunningham, & William, P. (2000). Environmental science (6 ed.). Mc Graw-Hill.Cutnell, J. D., & Johnson, K. W. (2006). Essentials of Physics. USA: John Wlley &Sons, Inc.Cutnell, J. D., & Johnson, K. W. (2007). Physics. (7 ed.). USA: John Wiley; Sons, Inc.Cuttnell, J. D., & kennety, W. J. (2007). Physics (7 ed.). United State of America: John Willey & Sons . Inc.Douglass, C. G. (2014). PHYSICS, Principles with applications. (7 ed.). Pearson Education.Douglass, C. G. (2014). PHYSICS, Principles with applications. (8 ed.). Pearson Education.Duncan, T., & Kennett, H. (2000). Advanced Physics (5 ed.). London, UK: Holder Education.Giancoli, D. (2005). PHYSICS: Principles with applications. New Jersey: Pearson Education, Inc.Giancoli, D. C. (2005). Physics principals with application. Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458: Pearson Education, Inc.Giancoli, D. C. (2005). Physics: principals with application. Upper Saddle River, NJ 07458: Pearson Education, Inc.Giancoli, D. C. (2005). Physics: Principles with applications. New Jersey: Pearson Education, Inc.Glencoe. (2005). Physics - Principles and Problems [textbook]. McGraw.Haber-Schaim, U., Cutting, R., Kirkesey, H. G., & Pratt, H. A. (2002). Force, Motion, and Energy.USA: Science Curriculum, Inc.Halliday, D., Resneck, R., & Walker, J. (2014). Fundamentals of Physics. (10 ed.). USA: John Wiley; Sons,Inc.Halliday, Resneck, & Walker. (2007). Fundamentals of Physics. (8 ed.). Wiley.Hewitt, P. G., SUCH0CKI, J., & Hewitt, L. A. (1999). Conceptual Physical Science. (2 ed.). Addison Wesley Longman.

                              Hirsch, A. S. (2002). Nelson Physics 12. Toronto: University Preparation.Hugh, D. Y., & Roger, A. F. (2012). University Physics with Modern Physics (13 ed.). San Francisco, USA: Pearson Education, Inc.IPCC. (1996). Economics of Greenhouse Gas limitation, Main report “Methodological Guidelines.John, M. (2009). Optical Fiber Communications, Principals and Practice (3rd Ed.). London: Pearsnon Prentice Hall.Jones, E. R., & Childers, R. L. (1992). Contemporary College Physics. (2 ed.). USA: Addison-Wesley Publishing Company.Kansiime, J. K. (2004). Coumpound Physical Geography: Morphology, Climatology, Soils and Vegetation. uganda.Linda, W. (2004). Earth Sceience demystified a self-teaching guide. USA: McGraw-Hill Campanies, inc.Michael, E. B. (1999). Schaum’s outline of Theory and Problems of Physics for Engineering and Science. USA: McGRAW-HILL Companies, Inc.Michael, J. P., Loannis, M., & Martha, C. (2006). Science Explorer, Florida Comprehensive Science.Boston: Pearson Prentice Hall.MIDIMAR. (2012). Disaster High Risk Zones on Floods and Landslide. Kigali: MIDMAR.Nagashima, Y. (2013). Elementary Particle Physics. Osaka University: Deutsche Nationalbibliothek.Nelkon, M., & Parker, P. (1997). Advanced level Physics. (7 ed.). Edinburgh: Heinemann.Nelkon, M., & Parker, P. (2001). Advanced Level Physics (7 ed.). Edinburgh gate: Heinemann.Office, U. M. (2011). Warming: A guide to climate change. U.K.: Met Office Hadley Centre.Orazio, S. (2010). Principles of Lasers (5 ed.). Milan, Italy: Springer.Patrick, T. (2004). Mathematics standard level. (3 ed.). Victoria: Ibid Press.R.B., B. (1984). Physical Geography in diagrams for Africa. Malaysia: Longmann Group Limited.Randall, D., & Knight. (2004). Physics for scientists and engineers: Stategic approach (Vol. 2). San Fransisco: Pearson Education.Randall, D., & Knight. (2004). Physics for scientists and engineers: Stategic approach. (Vol. 3). San Fransisco: Pearson Education, Inc.Randall, D., & Knight. (2008). Physics for scientists and engineers: Stategic approach. (2 ed., Vol. 3). San Fransisco: Pearson Education, Inc.Randall, D., & Knight. (2008). Physics for scientists and engineers: Stategic approach. (2 ed., Vol. 3). San Fransisco: Pearson Education, Inc.REMA. (n.d.). Rwanda Second National Communication Under the UNFCCC. KIGALI: MINISTRY OF NATURAL RESOURCES,RWANDA.Science, G. (2006). Florida Physical Science with Earth Science. USA: Mc Graw Hill Glencoe Companies, Inc.

                              Serway, R. A. (1986). Physics for Scientists and Engineers (2 ed.). Saunders College Publishing.Serway, R. A. (1992). Principles of Physics. Orlando, Florida: Saunders College Publishing.Serway, R. A., & Jewett, J. J. (2008). Physics for Scientists and Engineers. (7 ed.). USA: Thomson Learning, Inc.Serway, R. A., & Jewett, J. J. (2010). Physics for Scientists and Engineers with Modern Physics. (8 ed.).Silver, B., & Ginn, I. (1990). Physical Science. Unit States of America.Stephen, P., & Whitehead, P. (1996). Physics. (2 ed.). School Edition.Stephen, P., & Whitehead, P. (1996). Physics. (2 ed.). School Edition.Strassler, M. (2011, September 25). What’s a Proton, Anyway? Retrieved March 05, 2018, from www.profmattstrassler.com: https://profmattstrassler.com/articles-and-posts/largehadroncolliderfaq/whats-a-proton-anyway/Subranya, K. (1993). Theory and applications of fluid mechanics. Tata McGraw: Hill Companies.Taylor, E., & Wheeler, J. A. (1992). Spacetime Physics: Introduction to Special Relativity. (2 ed.). San Francisco: W.H.Freeman & Company, Publishers.Taylor, E., & Wheeler, J. A. (1992). Spacetime Physics: Introduction to Special Relativity. (2 ed.). San Francisco: W.H.Freeman & Company, Publishers.Tipler, P. A. (1991). Physics for Scientists and Enginners. (3 ed., Vol. 2). USA: Worth Publishers, Inc.Tipler, P. A. (1991). Physics for Scientists and Enginners. (3 ed., Vol. 1). USA: Worth Publishers, Inc.Tom, D. (2000). Advanced Physics (5 ed.). H. Kennett.Toyal, D. C. (2008). Nuclear Physics (5 ed.). Himalaya Publishing House.Uichiro, M. (2001). Introduction to the electron theory of metals . Cambridge University Press .Weseda, Y., Mastubara, E., & Shinoda, K. (2011). X-rays properties-google search. Retrieved 03 06, 2018, from www.springer.com: http://www.springe.com/978-3-642-26634-1Wysession, M., Frank, D., & Yancopoulos, S. (2004). Physical Science. Boston, Massachusetts, Upper Saddle River, New Jersey: Pearson Prentice Hall.